1 ___________________ Introduction 2 ___________________ Description SENTRON Protection devices 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual 3 ___________________ Applications ___________________ 4 Accessories ___________________ 5 Service and maintenance ___________________ 6 Technical specifications ___________________ A Appendix ___________________ B ESD guidelines ___________________ C List of abbreviations ___________________ D Conversion tables 03/2019 A5E03603177010-03 Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Division Energy Management Postfach 32 20 91050 ERLANGEN GERMANY Document order number: 3ZW1012-0VA10-0AC1 03/2019 Subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2014. All rights reserved Table of contents 1 2 Introduction................................................................................................................................... 9 1.1 About this documentation .................................................................................................... 9 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 Product-specific information............................................................................................... 10 Target readers................................................................................................................... 10 Technical Support ............................................................................................................. 10 Reference documents ....................................................................................................... 10 Description ................................................................................................................................. 13 2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 Overview - applications and portfolio ................................................................................. 13 Applications and possible uses .......................................................................................... 14 Portfolio............................................................................................................................. 16 Application examples......................................................................................................... 20 Detailed information about applications and possible uses ................................................. 22 Technical specifications ..................................................................................................... 24 Molded case circuit breakers and accessories in the system.............................................. 28 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 Ergonomic design.............................................................................................................. 30 The right circuit breaker for any installation conditions ....................................................... 31 Ergonomic design of circuit breakers, handles and control elements .................................. 34 Wide range of accessories ................................................................................................ 37 Connection technology ...................................................................................................... 39 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 Technical details................................................................................................................ 41 Circuit breaker identification............................................................................................... 42 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 46 Design and components - 3VA1 ........................................................................................ 47 Design and components - 3VA2 ........................................................................................ 48 Current limitation ............................................................................................................... 49 Breaking capacity .............................................................................................................. 51 Infeed ................................................................................................................................ 52 2.4 Selectivity .......................................................................................................................... 53 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6 2.5.7 2.5.8 2.5.9 Standards and guidelines .................................................................................................. 57 Compliance with standards ................................................................................................ 57 Electromagnetic compatibility ............................................................................................ 57 Certificates ........................................................................................................................ 58 Ambient conditions ............................................................................................................ 58 Permissible mounting positions and mounting positions with accessories .......................... 60 Safety clearances .............................................................................................................. 61 Arcing spaces.................................................................................................................... 67 Degrees of protection ........................................................................................................ 68 Environmental protection ................................................................................................... 68 2.6 2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 Protection system .............................................................................................................. 69 Description of functions ..................................................................................................... 70 Characteristic curves ......................................................................................................... 72 Guide to setting the tripping characteristic.......................................................................... 73 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 3 Table of contents 3 2.6.4 2.6.5 2.6.6 2.6.7 2.6.8 2.6.9 Overload protection (L) .......................................................................................................75 Short-time delayed short-circuit protection (S) ....................................................................76 Instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) .............................................................................76 Ground-fault protection (G) .................................................................................................76 Neutral conductor protection (N) .........................................................................................79 Zone selective interlocking (ZSI).........................................................................................82 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 Thermal-magnetic trip unit ..................................................................................................85 Thermal trip unit (L) ............................................................................................................85 Magnetic trip unit with short-circuit protection (I) .................................................................85 Application cases and trip unit types ...................................................................................86 2.8 2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.3 2.8.4 2.8.5 Electronic trip unit ...............................................................................................................87 Connections .......................................................................................................................89 Protection functions ............................................................................................................90 Operator controls ...............................................................................................................93 Load acceptance and load shedding - load management..................................................102 Measuring with a Rogowski coil ........................................................................................103 Applications............................................................................................................................... 109 3.1 3VA IEC trip units .............................................................................................................109 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.1.1 3.2.1.2 3.2.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers ......................................110 Variants............................................................................................................................111 Thermal-magnetic trip units ..............................................................................................111 Electronic trip units ...........................................................................................................115 Overview of 3VA molded case circuit breakers in line protection applications ....................140 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.2.1 3.3.2.3 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.4.1 3.3.4.2 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers ...................................144 3VA molded case circuit breakers for starter protection.....................................................145 3VA molded case circuit breakers for motor protection......................................................148 3VA2 motor protection circuit breaker up to 500 A, tested according to IEC EN 60947-4-1 ............................................................................................................149 3VA2 motor protection breaker as tested motor protection combination, 3VA2 with 3RT ..................................................................................................................................150 Protection functions of 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers for motor protection ................150 ETU350M electronic trip unit ............................................................................................155 5-series and 8-series electronic trip units ..........................................................................158 ETU550M electronic trip unit ............................................................................................159 ETU860M electronic trip unit ............................................................................................161 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 Use of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers as switch disconnectors ..................................165 Overview of 3VA1 as switch disconnectors .......................................................................169 Upstream protection of switch disconnectors ....................................................................170 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 DC network applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers ..........................................172 Variants............................................................................................................................173 Breaking capacity with direct current.................................................................................174 Recommended circuit configurations for DC systems .......................................................175 3.6 Applications of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker with frequency converters ................177 3.7 400 Hz network applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers ....................................179 3.8 3.8.1 3.8.2 IT system applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers .............................................181 Selection criteria for 3VA molded case circuit breakers .....................................................181 Fault situation...................................................................................................................182 3.3.2.2 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 4 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Table of contents 3.9 4 Safety-related applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers ...................................... 183 Accessories .............................................................................................................................. 185 4.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 Overview of accessories for 3VA molded case circuit breakers ........................................ 185 Accessories groups ......................................................................................................... 185 Possible combinations of of accessories .......................................................................... 186 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 Internal accessories......................................................................................................... 191 Mounting locations on 3VA molded case circuit breakers ................................................. 191 Auxiliary and alarm switches............................................................................................ 197 Contact sequence diagrams ............................................................................................ 201 Technical specifications of auxiliary and alarm switches .................................................. 202 Auxiliary releases ............................................................................................................ 204 Time-delay devices for undervoltage releases ................................................................. 209 COM060 communication module ..................................................................................... 209 24 V module .................................................................................................................... 210 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.2.1 4.3.2.2 4.3.2.3 4.3.2.4 4.3.3 4.3.3.1 4.3.3.2 Connection system .......................................................................................................... 211 General information about cables and busbars ................................................................ 211 Portfolio of connection components for 3VA molded case circuit breakers ....................... 214 General overview ............................................................................................................ 214 Front cable connection .................................................................................................... 218 Front busbar and cable lug connections........................................................................... 232 Rear busbar and cable lug connections ........................................................................... 239 Further connection accessories ....................................................................................... 246 Insulating measures ........................................................................................................ 246 Auxiliary conductor terminal ............................................................................................. 269 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.5.1 4.4.5.2 4.4.6 4.4.6.1 4.4.6.2 4.4.7 4.4.7.1 4.4.7.2 4.4.7.3 Plug-in and draw-out technology...................................................................................... 272 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 272 Overview of variants / products........................................................................................ 275 General information ......................................................................................................... 276 Information about installation, built-on and built-in components ........................................ 277 Plug-in technology ........................................................................................................... 278 Product description.......................................................................................................... 278 Combination with other accessories................................................................................. 284 Draw-out technology........................................................................................................ 285 Product description.......................................................................................................... 285 Combination with other accessories................................................................................. 295 Accessories for plug-in and draw-out units ....................................................................... 295 Description of individual product variants ......................................................................... 295 Overview of technical specifications................................................................................. 307 Combination with other accessories................................................................................. 308 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.5.4 4.5.5 4.5.5.1 4.5.5.2 4.5.6 4.5.7 Manual operators ............................................................................................................ 309 Opening, closing and resetting the 3VA molded case circuit breaker ................................ 310 Front mounted rotary operator ......................................................................................... 312 Door mounted rotary operator.......................................................................................... 316 Side wall mounted rotary operator ................................................................................... 322 Locking and interlocking for manual operators ................................................................. 324 Locking by the handle...................................................................................................... 324 Locking and interlocking by the rotary operator ................................................................ 326 Degree of protection ........................................................................................................ 329 Accessories..................................................................................................................... 330 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 5 Table of contents 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.1.1 4.6.1.2 4.6.1.3 4.6.2 4.6.2.1 4.6.2.2 4.6.2.3 4.6.3 4.6.3.1 4.6.3.2 4.6.3.3 4.6.3.4 4.6.3.5 4.6.4 Motor operators ................................................................................................................331 MO310 side mounted motor operator ...............................................................................331 MANUAL, AUTO and LOCK modes..................................................................................334 Closing, opening and resetting the 3VA molded case circuit breaker.................................336 Faults, causes of faults and rectification of faults ..............................................................338 Motor operator MO320 .....................................................................................................339 MANUAL, AUTO and LOCK modes..................................................................................341 Opening, closing and resetting the 3VA molded case circuit breaker.................................342 Faults, causes of faults and rectification of faults ..............................................................346 SEO520 motor operator with stored energy operator ........................................................347 MANUAL, AUTO and LOCK modes..................................................................................349 Closing, opening and resetting the 3VA molded case circuit breaker.................................350 Faults, causes of faults and rectification of faults ..............................................................353 Communication ................................................................................................................354 Accessories......................................................................................................................355 Technical specifications....................................................................................................357 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.1.1 4.7.1.2 4.7.2 4.7.2.1 4.7.2.2 4.7.3 4.7.3.1 4.7.3.2 4.7.3.3 4.7.4 Locking and interlocking ...................................................................................................360 General information ..........................................................................................................360 Locking ............................................................................................................................360 Interlocking.......................................................................................................................361 Locking ............................................................................................................................363 Padlock device for the handle ...........................................................................................363 Cylinder locks for locking the 3VA molded case circuit breaker .........................................365 Front interlocking..............................................................................................................369 Cylinder locks for implementing interlocks between multiple 3VA molded case circuit breakers ...........................................................................................................................369 Sliding bar with Bowden cable: Modules for sliding bar with Bowden cable .......................374 Sliding bar ........................................................................................................................377 Rear interlock ...................................................................................................................379 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.1.1 4.8.2 4.8.2.1 4.8.2.2 4.8.2.3 4.8.2.4 4.8.2.5 4.8.2.6 4.8.3 Residual current devices ..................................................................................................386 Portfolio............................................................................................................................386 Possible combinations of residual current devices and 3VA circuit breakers .....................394 Residual current devices for mounting on circuit breakers.................................................395 Side mounted residual current devices Basic RCD310 and Basic RCD510 .......................397 Loadside residual current devices Basic RCD320 and Basic RCD520 ..............................415 Loadside residual current device Basic RCD520B ............................................................428 Loadside residual current device Advanced RCD820........................................................452 Special operating modes of residual current devices.........................................................469 Technical specifications....................................................................................................472 Modular residual current device ........................................................................................478 4.9 4.9.1 4.9.2 4.9.3 4.9.3.1 4.9.3.2 4.9.4 4.9.4.1 4.9.5 4.9.6 4.9.7 Communication and system integration ............................................................................484 System description ...........................................................................................................484 Communication system of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker........................................484 COM800 / COM100 breaker data server...........................................................................486 Area of application............................................................................................................487 Features...........................................................................................................................488 Communication with ETUs ...............................................................................................488 Area of application............................................................................................................488 DSP800 display................................................................................................................489 Commissioning and testing of electronic trip units using powerconfig ................................490 Power management with powermanager ..........................................................................494 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 6 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Table of contents 5 6 4.10 4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 4.10.4 4.10.5 4.10.6 EFB300 external function box .......................................................................................... 495 General information ......................................................................................................... 495 Power supply................................................................................................................... 496 Functions of the digital input and digital outputs ............................................................... 496 Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) ...................................................................................... 499 <SET> button .................................................................................................................. 501 Technical specifications ................................................................................................... 507 4.11 4.11.1 4.11.1.1 4.11.1.2 4.11.2 4.11.2.1 4.11.2.2 4.11.2.3 4.11.2.4 Test devices .................................................................................................................... 509 TD300 activation and trip box .......................................................................................... 509 Operation and execution of the TD300 tripping function ................................................... 510 Technical specifications of TD300 ................................................................................... 512 TD500 test device ........................................................................................................... 513 Operation and execution of test functions ........................................................................ 518 Executing the test functions using a PC and powerconfig................................................. 522 Parameterizing using the powerconfig software ............................................................... 523 Technical specifications of TD500 ................................................................................... 524 4.12 4.12.1 4.12.2 4.12.3 External current transformer for N conductor ................................................................... 525 Parameterization of the external N transformer ................................................................ 525 External current transformer for front busbar connector up to 630 A................................. 526 External current transformer as straight-through transformer up to 1250 A ....................... 527 4.13 4.13.1 4.13.2 Escutcheon ..................................................................................................................... 528 Product description.......................................................................................................... 528 Labeling plate .................................................................................................................. 530 4.14 4.14.1 4.14.2 DIN rail adapter ............................................................................................................... 531 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 531 Information about installation, assembly and attachment ................................................. 532 Service and maintenance ........................................................................................................... 535 5.1 Notes .............................................................................................................................. 535 5.2 Regular maintenance ...................................................................................................... 535 5.3 Maintenance following tripping of a molded case circuit breaker....................................... 537 5.4 Fault diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 538 Technical specifications ............................................................................................................. 539 6.1 6.1.1 6.1.1.1 6.1.1.2 6.1.1.3 6.1.2 6.1.2.1 6.1.2.2 6.1.2.3 6.1.3 Circuit diagrams .............................................................................................................. 539 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers.................................................................................. 539 Basic units....................................................................................................................... 539 Accessories..................................................................................................................... 542 Example: 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker with built-on/built-in accessories .................. 547 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers.................................................................................. 548 Basic units....................................................................................................................... 548 Accessories..................................................................................................................... 550 Example: 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker with built-on/built-in accessories .................. 563 Application example ........................................................................................................ 564 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.1.1 6.2.1.2 Dimensional drawings ..................................................................................................... 565 Dimensions of basic units ................................................................................................ 565 3VA10 and 3VA11 ........................................................................................................... 565 3VA12 ............................................................................................................................. 567 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 7 Table of contents 6.2.1.3 6.2.1.4 6.2.1.5 6.2.1.6 6.2.2 6.2.2.1 6.2.2.2 6.2.2.3 6.2.2.4 6.2.2.5 6.2.2.6 6.2.2.7 6.2.2.8 6.2.2.9 6.2.2.10 6.2.2.11 3VA13 / 3VA14.................................................................................................................568 3VA20 / 3VA21 / 3VA22 ...................................................................................................569 3VA23 / 3VA24.................................................................................................................570 3VA25 ..............................................................................................................................571 Dimensions of accessories ...............................................................................................572 Connection technology .....................................................................................................572 Plug-in and draw-out units ................................................................................................584 Manual operators .............................................................................................................587 Motor operators ................................................................................................................600 Accessories for locking, blocking and interlocking .............................................................603 Residual current devices ..................................................................................................614 Communication and system integration ............................................................................619 EFB300 external function box ...........................................................................................620 Test devices .....................................................................................................................621 External current transformer for N conductor ....................................................................622 Escutcheon ......................................................................................................................624 6.3 6.3.1 6.3.2 Power losses....................................................................................................................625 Power losses of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers .........................................................625 Power losses of 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers .........................................................627 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 Derating and temperature compensation ..........................................................................628 Derating of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers.................................................................628 Temperature compensation for thermal-magnetic trip units TM210, TM220 and TM240 ....632 Additional correction factors with frequencies other than 50/60 Hz for 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers ........................................................................................................637 Correction factors with direct current for the thermal-magnetic trip units of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers ............................................................................................638 Derating for the 3VA1 switch disconnector........................................................................639 Derating for the electronic trip units of 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers ........................641 Use of terminals with auxiliary conductor connection ........................................................645 6.4.4 6.4.5 6.4.6 6.4.7 A Appendix .................................................................................................................................. 647 A.1 B ESD guidelines .......................................................................................................................... 649 B.1 C Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) ................................................................................649 List of abbreviations ................................................................................................................... 651 C.1 D Standards and approvals ..................................................................................................647 List of abbreviations .........................................................................................................651 Conversion tables ...................................................................................................................... 657 Glossary ................................................................................................................................... 661 Index ........................................................................................................................................ 667 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 8 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Introduction 1.1 1 About this documentation 3VA molded case circuit breakers with certification according to standard IEC 60947 The 3VA molded case circuit breakers from the portfolio of SENTRON protection, switching, measuring and monitoring devices ensure the reliable protection of people and property as integral components of efficient power distribution systems. The product portfolio is designed for use in markets where low-voltage switchboards are installed according to IEC standards. The 3VA molded case circuit breakers are certified according to IEC 60947 and are suitable for the following applications: Incoming and outgoing circuit breakers in distribution systems Switching and protection devices for motors (motor protection in combination with a contactor and motor protection relay) Switch disconnectors The 3VA molded case circuit breakers are available in the following versions: For line protection: The overload and short-circuit releases are designed for the protection of wiring and non-motor loads. For generator protection For the protection of three-phase squirrel-cage motors For the protection of starter combinations comprising molded case circuit breaker, contactor and overload relay: In this case, the 3VA molded case circuit breaker provides the short-circuit protection and the disconnector functionality. As a switch disconnector in compliance with IEC 60947-3: These molded case circuit breakers can be used as main switches for opening and closing or for disconnecting load switches. They are not equipped with overload and short-circuit protection. Scope of validity of this document This manual has been specially compiled for the 3VA molded case circuit breakers certified to IEC 60947 and their accessory products. This manual serves as a reference manual for technical information regarding the configuration, commissioning and operation of 3VA molded case circuit breakers and their accessories. Refer to the manual "3VA molded case circuit breakers with UL and IEC certification" (see chapter Reference documents (Page 10)) for 3VA UL molded case circuit breakers certified to UL 489. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 9 Introduction 1.2 Product-specific information 1.2 Product-specific information 1.2.1 Target readers Target readers of this documentation The information contained in this manual is provided for the benefit of: Users Cubicle manufacturers Switchgear manufacturers Maintenance personnel 1.2.2 Technical Support You can find further support on the Internet at: Technical Support (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support) 1.2.3 Reference documents Further documents You will find further information in the following documents: Table 1- 1 Reference documents Title Article number Catalog - chapter "Molded case circuit breakers" (chapter 2 of LV 10) 3VA molded case circuit breaker catalog (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ ww/en/view/109750637) Manual - 3VA27 molded case circuit breakers and 3WL10 air circuit breakers DE 3ZW1012-0WL10-0AB1 3VA UL molded case circuit breakers DE 3ZW1012-0VA51-0AB1 EN 3ZW1012-0WL10-0AC1 EN 3ZW1012-0VA51-0AC1 3VA molded case circuit breaker operating instructions Link 3VA27 molded case circuit breakers manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ ww/en/view/109753821) 3VA UL molded case circuit breakers manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ ww/en/view/109758561) 3VA molded case circuit breaker documentation (http://www.siemens.com/3VADocumentation) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 10 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Introduction 1.2 Product-specific information Title System manual - Communication Article number DE 3ZW1012-0VA20-0BB0 EN 3ZW1012-0VA20-0BC0 Link 3VA molded case circuit breakers, communication system manual (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ ww/en/view/98746267) 3VA molded case circuit breaker tables (updated daily) 3VA molded case circuit breaker documentation (http://www.siemens.com/3VADocumentation) SENTRON ATC5300 - Automatic transfer DE A5E02469034-01 switching equipment EN A5E02469035-01 Automatic transfer control device ATC5300 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/ WW/view/de/41909986/0/en) ATSE - Remote Control Software Manual DE A5E02469028-01 ATSE - Remote Control Software Manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/ WW/view/de/41909978) EN ATSE - Modbus Communication Protocol DE A5E02469001-01 EN ATSE - Modbus Communication Protocol (http://support.automation.siemens.com/ WW/view/de/40761679) Grundlagen der Niederspannungsschalttechnik (Fundamentals of Low-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear), Siemens AG (c) 2008 -- -- Hartmut Kiank, Wolfgang Fruth: Planungsleitfaden fur Energieverteilungsanlagen (Planning Guide for Power Distribution Plants), Publicis Publishing ISBN: A19100-L531-B115 -- Schalten, Schutzen, Verteilen in Niederspannungsnetzen (Switching, Protection and Distribution in Low-Voltage Networks), substantially extended and revised edition 1997 ISBN 3-89578-041-3 -- Siemens: Residual Current Protective Devices, Low-Voltage Circuit Protection Technology Primer Siemens AG (c) 04 / 2009 E10003-E38-9T-B3011 -- 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 11 Introduction 1.2 Product-specific information 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 12 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.1 2 Overview - applications and portfolio This chapter provides an overview of all molded case circuit breakers in the 3VA portfolio and describes the potential areas of application for different circuit breaker models. The topics discussed in this chapter are listed below: Applications and possible uses Portfolio Possible configurations Detailed information about applications and possible uses Technical specifications Molded case circuit breakers and accessories in the system 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 13 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio 2.1.1 Applications and possible uses The two tables below show examples of possible uses and applications for 3VA molded case circuit breakers. Possible uses The 3VA molded case circuit breakers can be used in various areas where they perform different protection tasks. The following table (sorted according to breaking capacity) shows the areas in which 3VA molded case circuit breakers are used: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 14 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio Functions and applications 3VA molded case circuit breakers are used for various functions as shown in the table below: Molded case circuit breakers are primarily designed for the following applications: Subdistribution systems Industrial distribution systems Final distribution systems On-site isolation Use in machines 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 15 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio 2.1.2 Portfolio The 3VA molded case circuit breakers set new standards in flexibility and the variety of modular accessories available. Standardized accessories suitable for use with several sizes of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker up to 1000 A together with quick and easy installation help to cut costs and save time. Sizes The integrated 3VA portfolio consists of two different ranges of molded case circuit breakers in twelve frame sizes. The 1600 A frame size of the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker and the 400 A and 630 A of the 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker are new. The 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers are available in 1 to 4-pole versions (3VA1 160 A) or in 3 and 4-pole versions (3VA1 100 A to 630 A). The 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers are available in 3 and 4-pole versions. The circuit breakers are suitable for rated operational currents ranging from 16 A to 1600 A and rated voltages up to 690 V AC, depending on the range and frame size. Note A separate manual is available for the 1600 A size of the 3VA27 molded case circuit breaker (see chapter Reference documents (Page 10)). The rest of this manual will deal with the properties and accessory components up to 1000 A in particular. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 16 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers The 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers reliably perform all the tasks required for line protection. Features The key features of the 3VA1 range are: Compact design 1 and 2-pole versions in size 160 A; 3 and 4-pole versions in sizes 100 A, 160 A, 250 A, 400 A and 630 A Breaking capacity of 16 kA ... 70 kA at 415 V or 110 kA, (in sizes 400 A and 630 A), 3pole or 4-pole breakers and 36 kA at 240 V, 1-pole breakers (dependent on size) Fixed-mounted, plug-in version Thermal-magnetic trip units AC/DC applications No derating up to +50 C Modular and easy-to-fit internal accessories with diverse functions Uniform accessories platform across all 3VA molded case circuit breakers Compact dimensions Thanks to a mounting depth of 70 mm and a cover size of 45 mm, the 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers of sizes 100 A, 160 A and 250 A are optimized for installation in distribution boards, where they are used for protecting cables and lines. A wide range of accessories is also available for these applications, such as adapters for installation on DIN rails, as well as residual current devices (RCD310 and RCD510) and motor operators (MO310) that can be side mounted. Thermal-magnetic trip units The 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers have a thermal-magnetic trip unit with overload and short-circuit protection. This has been developed for implementing economical, cost-efficient installations up to 630 A. It is suitable for use in three-phase networks, AC networks, 400 Hz applications and with DC currents. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 17 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers The 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers reliably perform all the tasks associated with line and generator protection. This range is designed for applications with more exacting requirements: Increased breaking capacity Excellent selective protection Integrated metering function Connection to a fieldbus communication system Features The key features of the 3VA2 range are: Compact dimensions 3 and 4-pole versions Four breaking capacity classes from 55 kA ... 150 kA (at 415 V) Fixed-mounting, plug-in technology, draw-out technology Depending on size: Selective tripping at rated operational current difference 1 : 2.5 or with ELISA 1 trip units: 1.6 Electronic trip units Communication capability (ETUs 5-series and ETUs 8-series) Integrated metering function (ETUs 8-series) AC applications No derating up to +50 C Modular and easy-to-fit internal accessories with diverse functions Uniform accessories platform across all 3VA molded case circuit breakers up to 1000 A Electronic Trip Units (ETU) with different setting values Compact dimensions with expanded functionality In addition to its expanded functionality, the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker also comes with compact dimensions for fixed mounting, as a plug-in version and a draw-out version. A cover size of 70 mm for the door cutout (up to 630 A) and a complete selection of breaking capacity classes from 55 kA to 150 kA at 415 V AC provide the necessary flexibility for planning. Despite its compact size, the circuit breaker offers the following benefits: Extremely high breaking capacity Extremely good selectivity Electronic trip units, versions with and without integrated metering function and optional fieldbus communication interface 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 18 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio Selective contact system With its contact system, the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker is designed for fast selectivity tripping. The selective contact system ensures the following: Dynamic instantaneous short-circuit range High breaking capacity Selective protection response of the molded case circuit breakers in relation to each other Selective protection response of the molded case circuit breakers in relation to other protection devices (e.g. downstream low-voltage fuses) Electronic trip unit (ETU) The current sensor of the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker comprises an iron-cored transformer for the internal power supply and a Rogowski coil for precise current measurement. Each transformer can be optimized accordingly for its specific task. Thanks to the high accuracy of current measurement, the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker is suitable for power/energy measurement. In addition, finer adjustment of ground-fault current monitoring is possible. The electronic trip units (ETUs) provide the following protection functions: Overload protection L ("L" = Long-time delay) Adjustable in steps from 40% to 100% of the rated operational current of the molded case circuit breaker. Short-time delayed short-circuit protection S ("S" = Short-time delay) for time-selective response in case of a short circuit Instantaneous short-circuit protection I ("I" = instantaneous): Protection of the neutral conductor against overload and short-circuit ("N" = neutral) Protection against residual currents to ground ("G" = Ground fault) Energy management and communication The electronic trip units (ETUs) provide the following energy management and communication functions: Metering functions Transfer of measured values and status information of the circuit breaker to a higher-level communication network Remote parameter assignment of tripping thresholds and circuit breaker parameters Flexible, local digital inputs and outputs via the EFB300 external function box Software commissioning support with the "powerconfig" software package Testing and archiving with the TD300 and TD500 test devices (with powerconfig) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 19 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio 2.1.3 Application examples 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 20 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 21 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio 2.1.4 Detailed information about applications and possible uses 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 22 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio See also Applications (Page 109) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 23 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio 2.1.5 Technical specifications 1) A side plate must be installed (see chapter Insulating measures (Page 246)) if the installation conditions on the right-hand side are such that the device is not finger-safe. 2) In 125 A, 160 A: Icu / Ics = 36 kA / 36 kA 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 24 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio a. A. On request 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 25 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 26 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio a. A. On request 1) Utilization category B only for 400 A and 500 A and ETUs 5-series 8-series 2) In 400/500 A and In 630 A: Ics = 65 kA 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 27 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio 2.1.6 Molded case circuit breakers and accessories in the system The 3VA molded case circuit breakers come with a large portfolio of internal and external accessories that can be installed flexibly in any size of circuit breaker (depending on the type of accessory). The table below indicates which accessories are compatible with particular molded case circuit breakers, and which sizes of breakers are compatible with the same accessory: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 28 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.1 Overview - applications and portfolio Overview of accessories in the system 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 29 Description 2.2 Ergonomic design 2.2 Ergonomic design This chapter provides an overview of the ergonomic design features of the 3VA molded case circuit breakers and explains what makes them so special. The topics discussed in this chapter are listed below: Optional installation variants Color-coded indication of switching position in the draw-out unit Clear status indication Active illumination Ergonomic handle Color-coded control elements Broad range of accessories Connection options Integrated system The 3VA molded case circuit breakers set new standards, not only in terms of their technical features and functional scope, but also in terms of their design. The 3VA range provides an integrated system with regard to operation, functionality and installation. This principle is embodied in the basic units and in all internal and external accessories. The internal and external accessories of the 3VA molded case circuit breakers offer the following benefits: Standardized methods of operation Standardized scope of functions Standardized installation procedures Uniform accessories from 16 A ... 1000 A (e.g. auxiliary switches, auxiliary releases, etc.) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 30 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.2 Ergonomic design 2.2.1 The right circuit breaker for any installation conditions The range of molded case circuit breakers can be equipped with additional components so that they can be installed as fully functional switches in any location, a feature of the product which affords maximum flexibility to system planners. The following components can be installed to suit the installation location: Front mounted rotary operator Door mounted rotary operator Side wall mounted rotary operator Motor operator When the 3VA molded case circuit breaker is in the OFF position, it reliably disconnects all current paths of the circuit in accordance with IEC 60947-2 and IEC 60204-1 (VDE 0113). In the event of overvoltage between input and output, the reduced clearances prevent leakage currents at the surface and ensure that the dielectric strength is not degraded. The 3VA molded case circuit breaker therefore also meets the requirements for disconnector units according to IEC 60204-1. The main switch or disconnector unit functionality is not diminished by installation of the following accessory components: Plug-in and draw-out units Manual operator Motor operator Residual current device 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 31 Description 2.2 Ergonomic design Optional installation variants 3VA molded case circuit breakers are available in the following installation variants: Fixed mounted Plug-in technology Draw-out technology All variants offer the full range of functions, e.g. they can be equipped with every kind of accessory. In addition, the last two variants are designed to allow speedy molded case circuit breaker replacement for maintenance purposes or visual indication of the electrical isolation in the main circuit. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 32 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.2 Ergonomic design Indication of switching positions in the draw-out unit The picture below illustrates the colors used to indicate the switching position in the draw-out unit: The switching position is indicated in a window of the draw-out unit and is clearly colorcoded, enabling immediate identification of the current switching position of the molded case circuit breaker. The draw-out unit has three switching positions: CONNECT: The molded case circuit breaker is connected to the main circuit. The auxiliary circuits are also closed. TEST: In the TEST position, the main contacts of the molded case circuit breaker are not connected to the main circuit, but only to the auxiliary circuit. This allows the functionality of the auxiliary circuit and all of its components (auxiliary switches, auxiliary releases, communication, etc.) to be tested when the main circuit is open. DISCONNECT: The molded case circuit breaker is not connected to the main circuit nor to the auxiliary circuit. UNBLOCK: The molded case circuit breaker is not in any of the positions defined above and can be moved by means of the crank handle. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 33 Description 2.2 Ergonomic design Motor operator for remote control 3VA molded case circuit breakers can also be controlled remotely. Whether the circuit breaker is controlled from "just" the other side of the closed panel door, or the breaker is switched on via a control room or operator panel, for example, is irrelevant. Motor operators are available as accessories for remote control of the circuit breakers. 2.2.2 Ergonomic design of circuit breakers, handles and control elements Ergonomic handle With its wide surface area, the ergonomic handle is designed to assist manual operation of the circuit breaker. The white strip around the edge of the handle makes it easy to identify in conditions of poor visibility. The additional rated operational current information stamped on the white strip also significantly eases identification of the circuit breaker when it is one of many breakers in a large switchboard installation. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 34 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.2 Ergonomic design Clear status indication The possible switching positions of manual rotary operators are listed below: ON - red marking TRIP - yellow marking OFF - green marking The handle clearly engages in one of these positions depending on the status of the molded case circuit breaker. The switching positions are color-coded so that you can identify the status of the circuit breaker at a glance. Active illumination You can retrofit an active illumination kit for handling manual rotary operators. The illuminated indicator in the rotary handle signals the relevant switching position in the colors red, yellow and green. This provides clear visualization of the switching position on-site in conditions of poor visibility. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 35 Description 2.2 Ergonomic design Color-coded control elements The control elements on the thermal-magnetic and electronic trip units are color-coded. The color of each control element indicates that it performs a specific function, helping you to make the required settings quickly. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 36 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.2 Ergonomic design 2.2.3 Wide range of accessories The internal accessories (e.g. alarm and auxiliary switches, auxiliary releases, etc.) all belong to one family and can be installed on any size of circuit breaker up to 1000 A in the 3VA1 and 3VA2 ranges. The accessories are designed for quick and easy installation. The components are coded by color and design to ensure that they are always installed at the correct position in the circuit breaker. Color coding of accessories 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 37 Description 2.2 Ergonomic design A system of color coding has been used to clearly identify the specific functions of individual accessories: The cylinder lock and communication accessories included with the internal accessories in the picture above are explained in chapters Locking and interlocking (Page 360) and Communication and system integration (Page 484). Fast assembly of motor operators The motor operators have been designed for quick and easy assembly and disassembly. The internal accessories are therefore easily accessible. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 38 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.2 Ergonomic design 2.2.4 Connection technology A large selection of connection technology is available for the 3VA range of molded case circuit breakers. The supported cable cross-sections are based on the size of the molded case circuit breaker and the cable terminals used. The terminals are fitted either internally or externally to the molded case circuit breaker. With it you can implement various front and rear main conductor connections for the molded case circuit breakers in all types of installation (fixed-mounted, plug-in and draw-out). Box terminal Wire connector Wire connector, large Nut keeper kit Nut keeper kit, right-angled Bus connectors edgewise Front bus connectors extended Front bus connectors offset Rear connection stud flat Rear connection stud round Wire connector for 2 cables Distribution wire connector for 6 cables 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 39 Description 2.2 Ergonomic design Cables and busbars The 3VA molded case circuit breakers are designed for different cables and busbars: Different cable types, e.g. - Circular conductor - Sector-shaped conductor - Stranded - Finely stranded Busbars - Rigid - Laminated or flexible Laminated copper bar Different materials - Copper cables - Aluminum cables 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 40 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.3 Technical details 2.3 Technical details A summary of the technical features of 3VA molded case circuit breakers can be found in this chapter. The topics discussed in this chapter are listed below: Circuit breaker identification Operation Design and components - 3VA1 Design and components - 3VA2 Current limitation Breaking capacity 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 41 Description 2.3 Technical details 2.3.1 Circuit breaker identification Each 3VA molded case circuit breaker can be clearly identified from various labels and plates attached to the unit. Circuit breaker labeling Each 3VA molded case circuit breaker has labels displaying all the important technical information, enabling unique identification: Connection information label ETU connection designations Key electrical data Internal accessories label Adhesive label insert (in accessory compartment) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 42 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.3 Technical details Front panel: Labeling The following information is displayed on the front panel of the circuit breaker: Circuit breaker designation Approvals Rated operational current Knowledge Manager (see below) Rated operational current Product version Article number Trip unit type Size and breaking capacity class Key electrical data Date of manufacture Knowledge Manager A QR code is attached in a clearly visible location to every 3VA molded case circuit breaker. This code can be scanned with a smartphone or a tablet PC. For the full range of QR code functions, use the "Industry Support" app supplied free of charge by Siemens. It allows you to directly view or download all relevant product information. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 43 Description 2.3 Technical details The key electrical data label contains the following information: IEC breaking capacity values at various voltages Frequency, utilization category Insulation data Supported standards Connection information label The connection information label displays the following information: Approvals Information about cable connections Article number for operating instructions Circuit breaker article number Code for production 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 44 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.3 Technical details Label insert The label insert can be found in the right-hand accessory compartment. When an accessory (e.g. motor operator or manual operator) is installed on the circuit breaker, this label can be attached to the accessory. The label insert displays the following information: Information about the molded case circuit breaker Article number Key electrical data Internal accessories label You can make a note of the number of installed accessories on the internal accessories label. This will enable you to ascertain which accessories are installed without removing the accessory cover and to use the information, for example, to reorder components. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 45 Description 2.3 Technical details 2.3.2 Operation ON: Main contacts closed TRIP: Switching position following a trip OFF: Main contacts open PUSH TO TRIP: Initiates a mechanical trip The main contacts of the molded case circuit breakers are opened and closed by means of a handle mounted on the front of the unit. All contacts open and close simultaneously on all 3VA molded case circuit breakers in response to the following events: The handle is moved from OFF to ON. The handle is moved from ON to OFF. The tripping mechanism is activated by a trip unit. The tripping mechanism is activated by auxiliary releases (e.g. shunt trips, trip units). Reclosing the circuit breaker contacts from the TRIP position Follow the steps below to reclose the circuit breaker contacts from the TRIP position: 1. Move the handle to the OFF position. 2. Move the handle to the ON position. The breaker contacts are now closed. Free tripping All 3VA molded case circuit breakers have a free tripping capability. This function ensures that the breaker cannot be prevented from tripping even if the operator blocks or is held manually in the ON position or if the breaker is about to close. Follow the steps below to test the free tripping function in order to verify that the breaker's mechanical release system is working correctly: 1. Move the handle to the ON position. 2. Hold the handle in the ON position and press the button marked <PUSH TO TRIP>. The circuit breaker trips and opens the main contacts. The handle moves quickly into the TRIP position as soon as you release it. Failure of the molded case circuit breaker to trip indicates that it is defective and must be replaced. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 46 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.3 Technical details 2.3.3 Design and components - 3VA1 The design of the 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker is illustrated in the diagram below: Main connections Breaker mechanism with handle Trip unit: TMTU Rotary contact system Arc plates Pole cassette enclosure 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 47 Description 2.3 Technical details 2.3.4 Design and components - 3VA2 The design of the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker is illustrated in the diagram below: Main connections Breaker mechanism with handle Trip unit: ETU Arc plates Maglatch Current sensor Rotary contact system 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 48 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.3 Technical details 2.3.5 Current limitation "Current limiting" means that the peak value of the prospective impulse short-circuit current ip is limited to a smaller let-through current iD. The compact design of the breakers has been made possible by their excellent current limiting capabilities. In the event of a short-circuit, the molded case circuit breaker substantially reduces the magnitude of the let-through currents, i.e. reduces the load reaching downstream equipment (less thermal load, lower dynamic forces). The level of letthrough energy is also reduced to a considerable extent. 3VA molded case circuit breakers are designed with a current-limiting capability. IEC EN 60947-2 (VDE 0660-101), section 2.3, page 12, defines current-limiting molded case circuit breakers as follows: "Circuit breaker that, within a specified range of current, prevents the let-through current from reaching the prospective peak value and which limits the let-through energy (I2t) to a value less than the let-through energy of a half-cycle wave of the symmetrical prospective current." Unlimited current iD Let-through current ip Unlimited impulse short-circuit current ta Break time Peak value of limited current Limited current 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 49 Description 2.3 Technical details Double-rotary contact system To achieve excellent current limiting, the 3VA molded case circuit breakers are equipped with a rotary double-contact system that opens dynamically - on its own - above the specified disengaging currents, on the principle of magnetic repulsion, before the expected peak value of the short-circuit current is reached. These limits have been coordinated and optimized to suit the overall device characteristics. This substantially reduces the thermal and mechanical loading on the molded case circuit breaker and the electrical installation. Fixed contacts Rotary contact system Arc splitter chute The switching pole cassettes are optimized for high breaking capacity, and their rotary double-contact system design enables extremely good current limiting thanks to the build-up of peak arc voltage generated at both contacts in the event of a short-circuit. This results in significant limitation of the let-through energy It and the let-through current. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with a rated operational current In > 630 A are equipped with a single contact in order to optimize the mounting depth. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 50 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.3 Technical details 2.3.6 Breaking capacity The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu is the maximum value of the short-circuit current which the protective device is capable of disconnecting in accordance with regulations. Up to this value, the protective device is also allowed to be used in a network. The 3VA molded case circuit breakers are available with identical external dimensions but various breaking capacity classes according to size and rated operational current range. The tested tolerance range of the rated operational voltages is 5%. Breaking capacity of the 3VA1 range 1) In 125 A, 160 A: Icu / Ics = 36 kA / 36 kA 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 51 Description 2.3 Technical details Breaking capacity of the 3VA2 range 1) 2.3.7 In 400/500 A and In 630 A: Ics = 65 kA Infeed The 3VA molded case circuit breakers can be supplied with power from above and below. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 52 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.4 Selectivity 2.4 Selectivity Switching devices connected in series, e.g. molded case circuit breakers and fuses, work together to ensure graded tripping of these switching devices. The closest, upstream switching device before the location of the short-circuit must trip. The other switching devices on the same current run do not trip. The purpose of selectivity is to minimize the effects of a fault in terms of its duration and the area affected by the fault. Selectivity is achieved when the circuit breakers are matched to each other by means of selection, configuring and trip settings in such a way that, in the event of a fault, only the breaker closest to the location of the fault trips. Short-circuit location Selective behavior The selective behavior of molded case circuit breakers is mainly influenced by the following factors: Tripping value settings of the trip unit Tripping and break times Let-through current values Modes of switching of the relevant circuit breakers - Zero-current interrupter - Current limiter 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 53 Description 2.4 Selectivity The selective behavior of circuit breakers can be implemented technically by a variety of selectivity concepts: Current selectivity The selectivity can be calculated in the overload range by comparing the time/current characteristics. In the short-circuit range, this comparison leads to values that are too low. The reason for this is that the trip unit behaves differently in the case of short-circuit currents compared with its long-term behavior, e.g. in the case of overload. If the short-circuit currents differ sufficiently at the installation points of two molded case circuit breakers, the instantaneous short-circuit releases can normally be set such that if a short-circuit occurs behind the downstream circuit breaker, only this downstream breaker trips. If the short-circuit currents are approximately the same at the installation points of the molded case circuit breakers, the grading of the tripping currents of the short-circuit releases only enables selectivity up to a specific short-circuit current . This current is referred to as the ultimate selectivity value Is. Time selectivity Selectivity can be achieved by time selectivity up to the threshold values of the instantaneous short-circuit releases. To achieve this, the upstream circuit breaker requires delayed short-circuit releases, so that in the event of a fault, only the downstream circuit breaker will disconnect the part of the electrical installation affected by the fault from the supply. Both the tripping delays and the tripping currents of the short-circuit releases are graded. Zone selective interlocking - ZSI Selective behavior is achieved by installing parallel control cables between the molded case circuit breakers. The electronic trip units then use a fast signal link to determine priorities in the tripping sequence. Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) was developed by SIEMENS to prevent undesirably long tripping times when several molded case circuit breakers are connected in series. ZSI enables the tripping delay to be reduced to 50 ms for the circuit breaker upstream from the location of the short circuit. Dynamic selectivity This method is based on evaluation of the arc power which is generated in the arc chute when the contacts open dynamically in response to a short circuit. During this process, a smaller sized downstream molded case circuit breaker converts more energy in the arc chute than the larger, upstream molded case circuit breaker. A selective trip unit evaluates the energy conversion in both molded case circuit breakers. The downstream molded case circuit breaker trips, while the contacts of the upstream circuit breaker close again. Since both molded case circuit breakers perform a current limiting function, the residual current limit imposed in practice is higher than the limiting action specified for the individual molded case circuit breakers. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 54 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.4 Selectivity Full selectivity There is an increasing demand for full selectivity in order to safeguard continuity of service by power distribution systems. A power system is said to be fully selective if only the protective device located upstream of the fault location when viewed in the direction of energy flow, i.e. from the infeed to the load, trips in the event of a fault. Full selectivity always refers to the short-circuit current occurring at the installation point. Partial selectivity A system is said to be partially selective when selective tripping in response to a system fault is not ensured up to the maximum ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu of the switching devices. Selectivity is then ensured only up to a certain Is current value (ultimate selectivity value). If the calculated prospective short-circuit current at the installation point of the downstream protective device is lower than the ultimate selectivity value specified for the switchgear assembly, then it is still possible to describe the system as fully selective. If the value determined by the short-circuit current calculation (e.g. according to IEC / EN 60909, DIN VDE 0102) at the installation point of the downstream circuit breaker is below the selectivity limit current listed in the respective table for the selected combination, selectivity is guaranteed for all possible short circuits at the installation point. If the calculated short-circuit current at the installation point is higher than the ultimate selectivity value, selective tripping by the downstream circuit breaker is only assured up to the value listed in the table. A judgment must be made as to whether the value can be considered to be sufficient because the probability that the maximum short-circuit current will occur is low, for example. Otherwise, a circuit breaker combination should be chosen whose selectivity limit lies above the maximum short-circuit current. Selectivity with 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers The 3VA2 range is designed to deliver excellent selective tripping combined with optimum current limiting and outstanding breaking capacity. 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers have been specifically designed to meet the following requirements: System-wide, high selectivity with a rated operational current interval of 1 : 2.5 up to the miniature circuit breaker (for molded case circuit breakers with ELISA trip units, even 1 : 1.6 to each other or to LV HRC fuses) Selectivity in combination with high current limiting and high breaking capacity Cost-effective design / configuring of selective power distribution systems These molded case circuit breaker requirements are achieved in engineering terms as follows: Rotary double-contact system for highly dynamic opening response Coordinated electronic trip units Dynamic selectivity 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 55 Description 2.4 Selectivity Depending on the molded case circuit breakers used, with a size/rated operational current differential in a ratio of at least 1 : 2.5 and selection of suitable breaking capacity classes, you can achieve selective tripping of the area of the installation directly affected by the fault up to the maximum ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity. You can find information on selectivity values for 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers on the Internet under the link for 3VA documentation (http:/www.siemens.com/3VADocumentation). Electronic trip units and fast trip units As a protective device, the molded case circuit breaker is required to clear electrical faults in the system. For this purpose, 3VA2 circuit breakers are equipped with intelligent electronic trip units which can be combined with metering functions. The tripping characteristic of the electronic trip units can be finely and flexibly adjusted. In the event of short circuits, a fast trip unit also responds according to the arc power from the arc chute. This selective trip unit ensures that major short circuits are cleared more quickly, while at the same time ensuring that medium short circuits are interrupted selectively. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 56 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.5 Standards and guidelines 2.5 Standards and guidelines All the standards and guidelines with which 3VA molded case circuit breakers comply are summarized in this chapter. The topics discussed in this chapter are listed below: Compliance with standards Electromagnetic compatibility Ambient conditions Degrees of protection 2.5.1 Compliance with standards The standards fulfilled by the 3VA molded case circuit breakers include: IEC / EN 60947-1 IEC / EN 60947-2 IEC / EN 60947-2, Annexes B, H and M IEC / EN 60947-3 IEC / EN 60947-6-1 2.5.2 Electromagnetic compatibility The 3VA molded case circuit breakers meet the requirements of the following standards: CISPR11, Class A and Class B IEC / EN 60947-1, Annex S IEC / EN 60947-2, Annexes B, F, J and N The 3VA molded case circuit breakers are adequately resistant to the following factors: Electrostatic charge Electrostatic discharge Electromagnetic waves, e.g. from transmission systems, mobile phones, radio telephone sets and radar systems Overvoltage, e.g. caused by lightning Voltage surges 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 57 Description 2.5 Standards and guidelines 2.5.3 Certificates You can find information on the available certification (CE, UL, CSA, FM, marine approvals) on the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54137334/134200). In the Entry List you can use the certificate type (e.g. general product approval, explosion protection, test certificates, shipbuilding) as a filter criterion. 2.5.4 Ambient conditions Pollution degree Operation of the 3VA1 and 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers is approved in accordance with IEC / EN 60947-1 and IEC / EN 60664-1 for pollution degree 3. Ambient temperature 3VA molded case circuit breakers are used at ambient temperatures from -25 C to +70 C. Derating (reduction in rated operational current) is required at temperatures above +50 C. You will find more information on the applicable derating factors in chapter Derating and temperature compensation (Page 628). The permissible storage temperature in original Siemens packaging is between -40 C and +80 C. Special climatic requirements 3VA molded case circuit breakers can also be used under harsh conditions. Harsh conditions of storage, transportation and stationary use The molded case circuit breakers have been tested according to the relevant special test procedures defined in IEC / EN 60947-1, Annex Q for Class E applications. This class covers the areas MC3 + CC2 + SC1: Ambient temperature Humidity Vibration environment Shock environment These ambient conditions can be referred to as "Open deck, damp and cold atmosphere without salt spray" or "Difficult, non-marine conditions". 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 58 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.5 Standards and guidelines The following standards-related criteria are complied with: IEC / EN 60068-2-2 "Bd" and IEC / EN 60068-2-1 "Ab": Temperature range: -25 C ... +70 C IEC / EN 60068-2-30 "Db" Humid heat up to +55 C and air humidity up to 95 % IEC / EN 60068-2-6 "Fc" Vibration test IEC / EN 60068-2-27 "Ea" Shock resistance test Between the tests of compliance with the standards and at the end of the tests, the usability of the devices is assured with the "Verification of operation characteristics". Vibration resistance and shock resistance 3VA molded case circuit breakers are insensitive to vibrations and meet the requirements relating to mechanical and electromechanical vibration strength according to IEC / EN 60068 and the specifications of the shipbuilding societies. The circuit breakers resist impacts of up to 10 g and are tested to withstand without damage their operating conditions with shock impact according to IEC / EN 60068-2 27 "Ea" with 150 m/s / 11 ms. Installation altitudes When 3VA1 and 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers are used at up to 2000 m above sea level, the rated data will not change. An installation altitude above 2000 m can lead to higher temperatures at the switching devices. The lower density of air can significantly reduce heat dissipation, making it necessary to decrease rated operational voltage, the rated uninterrupted current and the short-circuit values. Refer to the table below for the calculation factor for determining the key values: 1) At maximum ambient temperature +50 C 2) Thermal-magnetic trip units only 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 59 Description 2.5 Standards and guidelines 2.5.5 Permissible mounting positions and mounting positions with accessories The following table shows the possible variations on the mounting positions, as well as mounting positions with accessories: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 60 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.5 Standards and guidelines 2.5.6 Safety clearances During a short-circuit interruption, high temperatures, ionized gases and high pressures occur in and above the arcing chambers of the molded case circuit breaker. For this reason, defined minimum clearances must be adhered to during installation between the molded case circuit breakers and the mounting plates, conductor bars and other protection systems placed in the immediate vicinity. This safety area was successfully confirmed with the help of tests on test setups according to IEC 60947-2 (perforated grid cage). Safety clearances are required to: allow pressure distribution prevent fire or damage caused by any diffused ionized gases prevent a flashover to grounded parts prevent arcing or short-circuit currents to live sections. The following safety clearances apply to 3VA molded case circuit breakers with accessories (e.g. phase barrier, long terminal cover, etc.): A Minimum clearance between molded case circuit breaker and current paths (uninsulated and grounded metal), see tables below B Minimum clearance between molded case circuit breaker and side walls left / right (uninsulated and grounded metal), see tables below C Minimum clearance between two horizontally installed molded case circuit breakers, see tables below; applicable to fixed-mounted and plug-in versions (see chapter Plug-in and draw-out technology (Page 272)) D Minimum clearance between molded case circuit breaker and panel door E Minimum clearance between live parts of connection technology and grounded mounting plate: - 3VA10 and 3VA11: 11 mm - 3VA12, 3VA13 and 3VA14: 8 mm 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 61 Description 2.5 Standards and guidelines Minimum clearance for 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers: 1) Can be used for connection technology: box terminal, screw terminal, internal wire connector and rear terminals 2) Can be used for connection technology: wire connector large, front bus connectors extended, and front bus connectors offset 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 62 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.5 Standards and guidelines 1) Can be used for connection technology: box terminal, screw terminal, internal wire connector and rear terminals 2) Can be used for connection technology: wire connector large, front bus connectors extended, and front bus connectors offset 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 63 Description 2.5 Standards and guidelines Minimum clearance for 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers: 1) Can be used for connection technology: box terminal, screw terminal, internal wire connector and rear terminals 2) Can be used for connection technology: wire connector large, front bus connectors extended, and front bus connectors offset 3) Does not apply to breaking capacity class L Note In addition to the clearances stated above, any insulation measures that might be required must also be considered, see chapter Insulating measures (Page 246). If the molded case circuit breaker is installed in a system whose connection type and operational voltage does not correspond to the specified insulation measures, a type test is required. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 64 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.5 Standards and guidelines It must be ensured that the cable or busbar connector does not reduce the air insulation clearance. Accessory components can increase the width or height of the molded case circuit breaker. In this case the minimum clearances apply from the corresponding sides of the overall molded case circuit breaker/accessory combination. NOTICE Damage to the molded case circuit breaker and the system Depending on the application, larger minimum clearances may be necessary. Please observe the specifications regarding air and creepage distances in the applicable overriding guidelines (e.g. IEC 61439). Safety clearances between molded case circuit breakers No minimum clearance needs to be observed between the molded case circuit breakers on the longitudinal sides (see table above). The following safety clearances apply to molded case circuit breakers installed directly on top of each other (for operation in the same network or at the same operational voltage): x See tables below for minimum clearance Insulation of cable Insulation of busbar Insulation between the molded case circuit breakers 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 65 Description 2.5 Standards and guidelines Minimum clearance for 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers: Minimum clearance for 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers: Maximum clearance to first fixing point of cable or busbar The figure and table show the recommended maximum clearance between molded case circuit breakers and the first fixing point of the cable or busbar. Fixing of cable Fixing of busbar Recommended maximum clearance for 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers: The values for the 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers are available from Siemens on request. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 66 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.5 Standards and guidelines Recommended maximum clearance for 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers: 2.5.7 Arcing spaces Adequate arcing spaces must be taken into account during planning and installation of the molded case circuit breakers. In particular, the following must be observed: Ventilation openings must be kept free. Ionized gases must not be routed in the direction of connecting terminals or non-insulated busbars. Arcing spaces must not be blocked by busbars installed too close to one another or by other objects. The 3VA molded case circuit breakers up to size 630 A have a rotary double-contact system and therefore blow out upwards and downwards. The upper blowout openings (at terminals 1, 3, 5) are located above the connections and the lower blowout openings (at terminals 2, 4, 6) are located below them. The 3VA molded case circuit breakers in size 1000 A (3VA25) only blow upwards, i.e. in the direction of terminals 1, 3, 5, as they have a single-contact system. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 67 Description 2.5 Standards and guidelines 2.5.8 Degrees of protection 3VA molded case circuit breakers comply with the following degrees of protection as defined by IEC 60529 and IEC 60947-1, Annex C: Degree of protection IP30 is achieved when a 3VA molded case circuit breaker is installed in a switchboard with a door cutout including cover frame (see below). Handle and trip unit are freely accessible, the panel door closes flush with the molded case circuit breaker. The units can be upgraded to comply with higher degrees of protection up to IP65 by installation of the following components: Door mounted rotary operator Side wall mounted rotary operator 2.5.9 Environmental protection The 3VA1 and 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers meet the specifications of the European Environment Guideline 2011 / 65 / EU RoHS directive (Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment). The development and production processes have been devised to have the lowest possible environmental impact. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 68 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.6 Protection system 2.6 Protection system This chapter contains an overview of the protection system of 3VA molded case circuit breakers. The topics discussed in this chapter are listed below: Description of functions Overload protection (L) Short-time delayed short-circuit protection (S) Instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) Ground-fault protection (G) Neutral conductor protection (N) ZSI - Zone Selective Interlocking Guide to setting the tripping characteristic 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 69 Description 2.6 Protection system 2.6.1 Description of functions The protection function performed by the molded case circuit breaker in the power distribution network is defined by the choice of trip unit. There are two different types of trip unit, i.e. thermal-magnetic (TMTU) and electronic (ETU): 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 70 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.6 Protection system 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 71 Description 2.6 Protection system 2.6.2 Characteristic curves To design a low-voltage switchboard in accordance with the valid rules, the system planner needs to dimension the protection settings of the molded case circuit breakers. The settings selected for the trip unit of a molded case circuit breaker depend on the type of equipment to be protected, e.g. switchboard and applications. Tripping characteristics up to a tripping time of 1 ms are represented graphically. In order to ease the coordination of different protection devices, the current is specified as a multiple of the current setting value and the time is specified in seconds. Tripping characteristics for thermal-magnetic trip units Characteristics are displayed graphically in the double-log coordinate system (cf. IEC 60947-2, paragraph 4.7.4 and IEC 60269-1). The ratio of current to time is 2: 1. Tripping characteristics for electronic trip units Characteristics are displayed graphically in the double-log coordinate system (cf. IEC 60269-1). The ratio of current to time is 1: 1. Delay of the short-time delayed protection Response threshold of the long-time delayed protection Response threshold of the instantaneous protection Delay of the long-time delayed protection L Overload range Response threshold of the short-time delayed protection S Short-time delayed short-circuit current range I2t characteristic ON/OFF of the short-time delayed protection I Instantaneous short-circuit current range Response threshold of the long-time delayed protection, thermal 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 72 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.6 Protection system 2.6.3 Guide to setting the tripping characteristic Supplementary conditions The settings selected for the trip unit of a molded case circuit breaker depend on the technical environment (e.g. switchboard and applications) and the type of equipment to be protected. The task of calculating and dimensioning the protection settings in accordance with the valid rules is the responsibility of the system planner. SIMARIS design The Siemens SIMARIS design software tool is a fast, simple and reliable tool for calculating and dimensioning networks in accordance with the valid rules: For further information about SIMARIS design, please visit: (http://www.siemens.com/simaris) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 73 Description 2.6 Protection system Basic rules for setting different trip parameters Setting the parameters for electronic trip units of the ETU 5-series and 8-series ETUs 5-series and ETUs 8-series are equipped with an LCD. Parameter settings can be adjusted via this LCD, values are input by means of buttons. The powerconfig software can also be used to input parameter settings. The TD500 test device and the COM800/COM100 breaker data server combined with the COM060 communication module can be used as the software interface. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 74 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.6 Protection system 2.6.4 Overload protection (L) The ID letter for overload protection is L (stands for "Long-time delay"). The trip unit is inverse-time delayed and exhibits the following characteristics depending on the trip unit type: Bimetal characteristic with thermal-magnetic trip units I2t characteristic with electronic trip units The letters Ir refer to the current setting value, and tr to the associated time delay. The time delay with the device-specific reference point defines the current-dependent curve shape of the setpoint characteristic. With 3VA molded case circuit breakers, this trip unit reference point corresponds to 6 times the current setting value Ir. The following mathematical equation determines the remaining curve of the setpoint characteristic: I2t = constant Thermal memory The electronic trip units feature a thermal memory function that can be deactivated on some electronic overload releases. Thermal memory activated (ON) If the thermal memory is activated, the previous thermal history is taken into account. After tripping, the thermal memories of the phases are set to a value corresponding to 85% of the thermal equivalent of the warmest phase. This setting allows reclosure of the contacts of the molded case circuit breaker. This is followed by a cool-down period according to an exponential function with a time constant Tau (). Thermal memory deactivated (OFF) It is the responsibility of the commissioning engineer/operator to provide additional thermal overload protection for the lower-level power distribution system while the thermal memory is deactivated. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 75 Description 2.6 Protection system 2.6.5 Short-time delayed short-circuit protection (S) The ID letter for short-time delayed short-circuit protection is "S" (stands for "Short-time delay"). The S function of the trip unit can be used to implement time-selective short-circuit tripping in low-voltage networks in which multiple molded case circuit breakers are installed in series. The short-time delayed short-circuit protection function protects phases L1 to L3 and the neutral conductor. The protection function responds if the current in at least one phase exceeds the set tripping current Isd for the set delay period tsd. The S release has a characteristic curve with current-dependent characteristic I2t, i.e. the delay time is dependent on the energy content of the short-circuit current present. The ETUs 5-series and ETUs 8-series can be optionally switched over to a current-independent tripping characteristic. In this case, a fixed delay time tsd applies. 2.6.6 Instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) The ID letter for instantaneous short-circuit protection is "I" (stands for "Instantaneous"). This short-circuit protection function protects phases L1 to L3. The instantaneous shortcircuit protection function responds if the instantaneous value equal to the rms of the current in at least one phase exceeds the instantaneous tripping current Ii. 2.6.7 Ground-fault protection (G) The ID letter for ground-fault protection is "G" (stands for "ground fault"). The G release detects residual currents between phases and grounded, electrically conductive parts. The ground-fault protection function responds if the ground fault current exceeds the set tripping current Ig for the set delay period tg. Ground-fault protection can be implemented either as a current-independent or a currentdependent function (I2t). On 4-pole molded case circuit breakers and 3-pole molded case circuit breakers with external current transformer for the N conductor, the G release calculates the vector sum of the currents of the three phases and the neutral conductor. On 3-pole molded case circuit breakers, the vector sum is calculated without the neutral conductor. The G release trips the circuit breaker, or an alarm is issued via the communication system if the rms value of this vector sum exceeds the set response threshold Ig for the set delay time tg. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 76 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.6 Protection system Ground-fault detection in balanced systems The three phase currents are evaluated using vectorial summation current. 3VA trip unit variants ETUs 3-series: ETU330 (LIG) ETUs 5-series: ETU560 (LSIG) ETUs 8-series: ETU860 (LSIG) 3-pole molded case circuit breaker in balanced systems: Ground-fault detection in unbalanced systems The neutral conductor current is measured directly and in the case of 3-pole molded case circuit breakers only for the ground-fault protection, but in the case of 4-pole circuit breakers the neutral conductor current is also evaluated for the neutral conductor protection. The trip unit calculates the ground-fault current using the three phase currents and the neutral conductor current for the vectorial summation. 3-pole molded case circuit breaker in unbalanced systems, 3-pole 3VA with external N transformer: 3VA trip unit variants, 3-pole 3VA2 with external N transformer ETUs 5-series: ETU560 (LSIG) ETUs 8-series: ETU860 (LSIG) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 77 Description 2.6 Protection system For 4-pole molded case circuit breakers, the fourth current transformer is internally installed for the neutral conductor. 4-pole molded case circuit breaker in unbalanced systems: 3VA trip unit variants, 4-pole 3VA2 ETUs 3-series: ETU330 (LIG) ETUs 5-series: ETU560 (LSIG) ETUs 8-series: ETU860 (LSIG) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 78 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.6 Protection system 2.6.8 Neutral conductor protection (N) The ID letter for neutral conductor protection is "N". The neutral conductor protection system protects the neutral conductor against overloads and short circuits. The letters IN refer to the current setting value; the associated setting time is identical to tr. Note A neutral conductor with full cross sectional area (distributed neutral conductor of the same size as the phases) is normally protected by the phase protection system and does not require separate protection. Neutral conductor protection Neutral conductor protection must be implemented in accordance with the standards valid in the country of installation. Possible reasons for implementing neutral conductor overload protection are: The neutral conductor has a smaller cross section than the phase conductors. Harmonic levels in the installation are expected to be higher than normal. A large number of loads, or predominantly single-phase loads, will be connected. Neutral conductor protection and 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers The following 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers have neutral conductor protection: All 4-pole versions of 3VA11, 3VA12, 3VA13, 3VA14 (TM210, TM220, TM240) All of these molded case circuit breakers are available in versions without or with 100% neutral conductor protection. A version with 50% neutral conductor protection is available in addition for rated operational currents greater than 100 A. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 79 Description 2.6 Protection system Neutral conductor protection and 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers The following versions of 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker have neutral conductor protection: All 3-pole versions with external current transformer for N conductor All 4-pole versions The tripping systems of the 5-series and 8-series ETUs enable overdimensioning of the neutral conductor protection up to 160% of In. This might be necessary to provide protection against third-order harmonics and multiples thereof. N Neutral conductor protection 1) At rated operational currents In 63 A: IN = 40 % ... 100 % In 2) Applies to In > 63 A 3) Dependent on circuit breaker size and rated operational current Parameters of the neutral conductor protection function Tripping current IN: Adjustable as a proportion of the current setting (Ir) for overload protection Tripping delay: Corresponds to the delay setting (tr) for overload protection Tripping current of the short-time delayed short-circuit protection: Corresponds to the short-time delayed short-circuit protection (Isd) Tripping delay: Corresponds to the delay setting for short-time delayed short-circuit protection (tsd) Instantaneous short-circuit protection: Corresponds to the tripping current (Ii) for instantaneous short-circuit protection You will find information about setting options in chapter Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers (Page 110). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 80 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.6 Protection system Example of a neutral conductor protection characteristic Response threshold of the neutral conductor protection Response threshold of the long-time delayed protection Adjustment of neutral conductor protection settings The tripping current IN can be adjusted: for ETU 3-series via rotary selector switches for ETUs 5-series and 8-series - via the buttons on the ETU display - via a PC using powerconfig 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 81 Description 2.6 Protection system 2.6.9 Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) Microprocessor-controlled, zone selective interlocking (ZSI) has been developed in order to control the total breaking time in low-voltage networks with multiple molded case circuit breakers connected in series. Regardless of the number of series-connected molded case circuit breakers, all short circuits in the network can be cleared within a maximum time period of 50 ms. Note Backward compatibility The ZSI function of the 3VA molded case circuit breakers is compatible with the ZSI function of the Siemens 3WL air circuit breakers. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 82 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.6 Protection system Operating principle The diagram below illustrates the operating principle of zone selective interlocking: --- Communication cable ti "Virtual" tripping time of I protection A Output, transmits the blocking signal tSD Delay time setting of S protection E Input, receives the blocking signal tZSI Delay time of all molded case circuit breakers which detect the short circuit but do not receive a blocking signal when ZSI is activated The ZSI function acts on the S and G ranges of the tripping characteristic. Currents within the I range (instantaneous short circuit) continue to cause instantaneous tripping. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 83 Description 2.6 Protection system Fault 1 If the short-circuit current is sufficiently large, the trip units of molded case circuit breakers Q41, Q33, Q22 and Q11 are activated. Since Q41 clears the fault within ti = 10 ms, none of the other molded case circuit breakers trips even though Q41 has no ZSI and cannot therefore transmit a blocking signal to Q33. Fault 2 If the short-circuit current is sufficiently large, the trip units of molded case circuit breakers Q32, Q22 and Q11 are activated. As a result of the ZSI function, Q32 temporarily blocks Q22 which in turn temporarily blocks Q11. Depending on the magnitude of the short-circuit current, the fault is cleared either within ti = 10 ms or tzsi = 50 ms. Fault 3 Q22 signals short-circuit protection to Q11 with the result that only Q22 trips when delay time tzsi = 50 ms expires. Without the ZSI function, the fault would not be cleared until tsd = 200 ms had expired. Fault 4 The short circuit is detected only by Q11. Since Q11 does not receive a blocking signal from the downstream molded case circuit breakers, it trips after tzsi = 50 ms. Without the ZSI function, Q11 would not trip until tsd = 300 ms had expired. It is especially important to minimize breaking times when short circuits involving very high short-circuit currents occur. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 84 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.7 Thermal-magnetic trip unit 2.7 Thermal-magnetic trip unit A thermal-magnetic trip unit consists of a thermal trip unit for protecting against overload, and a magnetic trip unit for protecting against short circuits. Both trip units are seriesconnected. 2.7.1 Thermal trip unit (L) The thermal trip unit consists of a temperature-dependent bimetal that heats up as a result of the flow of current. This means the trip unit is current-dependent. The temperature rise in the bimetal strip depends not only on the current magnitude, but also on the ambient temperature of the molded case circuit breaker. All current values specified for thermalmagnetic trip units of 3VA circuit breakers refer to an ambient temperature of +50 . 2.7.2 Magnetic trip unit with short-circuit protection (I) The magnetic trip unit with short-circuit protection comprises a yoke mounting through which a current path runs, and a flap armature that is kept at a distance from the yoke mounting by a tension spring. If a short-circuit current flows along the current path, the magnetic field thus generated causes the flap armature to be moved towards the yoke mounting against the opposite force of the tension spring. The tripping time is almost current-independent and instantaneous. The flap armature releases the breaker mechanism and thus opens the switching contacts. Immediately after tripping, the flap armature is moved back to its starting position by the restoring force of the tension spring. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 85 Description 2.7 Thermal-magnetic trip unit 2.7.3 Application cases and trip unit types The table below illustrates the applications for which different types of thermal-magnetic trip units can be used: 1) For 4-pole molded case circuit breakers only, available without protection, 50% ( In 100 A) and 100% 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 86 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit 2.8 Electronic trip unit An electronic trip unit is based on the following concepts: Complete measurement of the current in the phases L1, L2 and L3, with N and currents to ground optional Rogowski coil - Very precise measurement of the current - Better ground-fault protection because the vectorial sum is more exact Evaluation of the current measurement values and constant comparison with the tripping limits Tripping by means of a maglatch Electronic trip unit (ETU) Maglatch Current sensor 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 87 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit ETU protection against overtemperature The ETUs are equipped with a temperature sensor for their own protection. This effectively protects the electronic components of the ETU against irreparable damage. This protection takes effect in two stages: The first stage is an alarm which is indicated by LEDs directly on the ETU. This alarm is activated when the temperature reaches 90% of the maximum permissible temperature. It is automatically reset when the temperature falls below the activation limit. With 5-series and 8-series ETUs, this alarm can also be transmitted to a higher-level control system via the communication system. The second stage immediately opens the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker when the maximum permissible temperature is exceeded in the ETU. The molded case circuit breaker cannot be switched back on until the temperature falls below approx. 95% of the maximum permissible temperature. The temperature values of this temperature sensor do not allow any conclusions to be drawn about the temperature changes of other components within the circuit breaker, e.g. the circuits. Note The customer may perform insulation tests on the main circuits and the neutral conductor with test voltages up to 4 kV DC and surge voltages up to 14.5 kV. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 88 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit 2.8.1 Connections The connections on the ETU are illustrated in the diagram below: Interface for an external current transformer for N conductor Interface for connection of an EFB300 external function box Interface for connection of an RCD820 residual current device Connection for test devices TD300 and TD500 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 89 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit 2.8.2 1) Protection functions Available in a version with external current transformer for N conductor or 4-pole breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 90 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit 1) Available in a version with external current transformer for N conductor or 4-pole breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 91 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 92 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit 2.8.3 Operator controls The following figure shows the available ETU types of the 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers. You can decide which ETU to select according to the area of application. Name of the ETU LED display Front interface Rotary selector switches Pushbuttons LCD 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 93 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit LED displays The following table explains what the LED displays mean: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 94 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit Activation limits for ETUs without an external supply ETUs of the 3-series 3-series electronic trip units are equipped with rotary selector switches. A description of the operating principle of the rotary selector switches and operating instructions can be found in chapter Guide to setting the tripping characteristic (Page 73). Displays on 5-series and 8-series electronic trip units 5-series and 8-series electronic trip units are equipped with an LCD. The displayed values are refreshed once per second. Note The backlighting of the LCD is only active with an external voltage supply (e.g. COM060, EFB300, 24 V module). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 95 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit The following table explains what the symbols in the display mean: The following table explains what functions are performed by the buttons next to the display: Displays on 5-series and 8-series electronic trip units The basic structure comprises the following displays: Standard display Alarm display Measured value display Parameter display If no selection is made within an adjustable time period, the standard display will appear. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 96 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 97 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit Standard display Alarm display Active alarms are displayed consecutively in screens AV1 ... AV5. If no alarms are active, these screens are concealed. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 98 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit Measured value display The table below explains the measured value display: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 99 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit Parameter display The table below explains the parameter display: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 100 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit Setting and changing parameters 1. Use the arrow keys to navigate to the correct display. 2. Press the <OK> button. Edit mode is active. Activation is confirmed by display of "pencil" symbol. 3. Use the arrow keys to adjust the parameter setting. 4. Confirm the setting with the <OK> button, or cancel the operation with <ESC>. The setting is accepted with <OK>. The parameter display now appears. "Tripped" display After the ETU has initiated a trip, the "Tripped" display automatically appears: This screen can be identified by the word "Trip" which is displayed in the top, right-hand corner. The displayed current value shows the current at the moment of tripping. Press <ESC> to exit the display. The additional information contained in the "Tripped" display is explained in the table below: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 101 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit Diagnostics display When a TD500 test device is connected, you can use it to initiate a test. The following screen appears when a TD500 is connected. The bar flashes at a frequency of 0.5 Hz. The bar travels from left to right while testing is in progress. The test ends with a trip. 2.8.4 Load acceptance and load shedding - load management 3VA molded case circuit breakers equipped with an ETU 3-series or higher series provide two current thresholds for the purpose of implementing a local load management function. Load shedding is the upper threshold, and load acceptance the lower threshold. Incoming alarm "load shedding" Outgoing alarm "load shedding" Parameter load shedding 400 A Parameter load acceptance 100 A Incoming alarm "load acceptance" Outgoing alarm "load acceptance" Current in one phase Note No trip Tripping is never initiated as a result of the current value crossing the upper or lower thresholds. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 102 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit If the current in one phase exceeds the parameter setting for "load shedding" for longer than delay time tx, an incoming alarm "load shedding" is generated. Only when the current in all three phases drops below this threshold is an outgoing alarm "load shedding" generated. The incoming and outgoing alarms can be output via an optional EFB module and transferred via the communication link. The opposite applies for the load acceptance threshold. If the current in all three phases drops below the parameter setting, an incoming alarm "load acceptance" is generated. If only one of the three currents exceeds the parameter setting, an outgoing alarm "load acceptance" is generated. To prevent these alarms being generated by brief current peaks and troughs, they can be delayed by the time tx from 1 s to 15 s. powerconfig is used for parameterization. 2.8.5 Measuring with a Rogowski coil The Rogowski coil is a toroidal coil without a ferromagnetic core. It is used as a component in electronic measuring devices to measure alternating current. Advantages of the current sensor: Each transformer can be optimized for its task and operating points - Transformers for power generation - Transformers for measurement Higher accuracy of current measurement and therefore higher accuracy for ground-fault currents A power measurement is made possible by the more exact and more linear measurement of the current together with the integrated voltage tap in the molded case circuit breaker. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 103 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit Accuracy levels of the specified measured values of the 8-series ETU, including the integrated current sensors Ib is the maximum current in the relevant size. Example: 3VA21 Ib = 160 A Un refers to the nominal voltage of the metering function, between phase and neutral All specified accuracies refer to an ambient temperature of 23 C 2 C Interpretation of measured values PF Power factor Measured current and voltage values are always positive. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 104 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit The "normal" direction of energy flow of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker is top down (can also be adjusted using the powerconfig software), corresponding to operation in quadrants Q1 and Q4. If the molded case circuit breaker is supplied from below, it operates in quadrants Q2 and Q3. The following table provides an overview of the setting values: 1) Depending on ETU version Value can be read Value can be edited 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 105 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit 1) Depending on ETU version Value can be displayed/read 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 106 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit 1) Depending on ETU version Value can be displayed/read 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 107 Description 2.8 Electronic trip unit 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 108 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.1 3 3VA IEC trip units 1) In positions 9 and 10 of the Article No. 2) After a short circuit, tripping occurs at 140% of the set instantaneous short-circuit current with a 1-pole load. FTFM T (thermal trip unit) and M (magnetic trip unit) fixed ATFM T (thermal trip unit) adjustable, M (magnetic trip unit) fixed ATAM T (thermal trip unit) and M (magnetic trip unit) adjustable 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 109 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers The main applications of the circuit breakers as line protection components are: In main switchboards to provide protection for cables to subdistribution boards In subdistribution boards to provide protection for cables to small distribution boards Protection for mixed loads (e.g. machinery, lighting, heating) The trip units for line protection are designed to provide overload and short-circuit protection for: Cables Conductors Non-motor loads Suitable 3VA molded case circuit breakers and trip units 3VA molded case circuit breakers equipped with the following trip units are suitable for use in line protection: 3VA1 breakers with thermal-magnetic trip units - TMs 2-series (Page 111) 3VA2 breakers with electronic trip units - ETUs 3-series (Page 115) - ETUs 5-series (Page 131) - ETUs 8-series (Page 131) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 110 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.2.1 Variants 3.2.1.1 Thermal-magnetic trip units Derating Thermal-magnetic trip units employ a temperature-dependent bimetal to provide overload protection. The setting values are calibrated at an ambient temperature of +50 C. Compensation factors must be applied for ambient temperatures other than +50 C. You will find more information and derating factors in chapter Derating and temperature compensation (Page 628). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 111 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Thermal-magnetic trip unit TM210 LI Line protection FTFM - function LI The thermal-magnetic trip unit TM210 has: fixed parameter setting Ir for overload protection (L) fixed parameter setting Ii for instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) With 4-pole versions only: Neutral conductor (N) protection permanently set to 0%, 50% or 100% Ir depending on version Parameter TM210: 1) With 4-pole versions only: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 112 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Thermal-magnetic trip unit TM220 LI Line protection ATFM - function LI The thermal-magnetic trip unit TM220 has: adjustable parameter setting Ir for overload protection (L) fixed parameter setting Ii for instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) With 4-pole versions only: Neutral conductor (N) protection permanently set to 0%, 50% or 100% Ir depending on version Parameter TM220: 1) With 4-pole versions only: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 113 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Thermal-magnetic trip unit TM240 LI Line protection ATAM - function LI The thermal-magnetic trip unit TM240 has: adjustable parameter setting Ir for overload protection (L) adjustable parameter setting Ii for instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) With 4-pole versions only: Neutral conductor (N) protection permanently set to 0%, 50% or 100% Ir depending on version Parameter TM240: 1) With 4-pole versions only: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 114 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.2.1.2 Electronic trip units ETUs for line protection applications The following electronic trip units are suitable for use in line protection applications: ETU320 LI ETU330 LIG ETU340 ELISA; LI ETU350 LSI ETU550 LSI ETU560 LSIG ETU850 LSI ETU860 LSIG 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 115 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Electronic trip unit ETU320 LI ETU320 LI 3-pole: ETU320 LI 4-pole: Line protection - function LI The ETU320 electronic trip unit has: Adjustable parameter settings Ir and tr for overload protection (L) Adjustable parameter setting Ii for instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) With 4-pole versions only: Neutral conductor protection (N) which can be deactivated Permanently active thermal memory, cannot be deactivated ETU320 parameters: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 116 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Overload protection L: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 117 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Instantaneous short-circuit protection I: Neutral conductor protection N: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 118 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Electronic trip unit ETU330 LIG ETU330 LIG 3-pole: ETU330 LIG 4-pole: Line protection - function LIG The ETU330 electronic trip unit has: Adjustable parameter settings Ir and tr for overload protection (L) Adjustable parameter setting Ii for instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) Adjustable parameter settings Ig and tg for ground-fault protection (G) With 4-pole versions only: Neutral conductor protection (N) which can be deactivated Permanently active thermal memory, cannot be deactivated ETU330 parameters: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 119 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Overload protection L: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 120 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Instantaneous short-circuit protection I: Ground-fault protection G: The ground-fault protection cannot be deactivated. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 121 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Neutral conductor protection N: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 122 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Electronic trip unit ETU340 ELISA LI The 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker with the ETU340 ELISA electronic trip unit has been specially developed for implementing selectivity with fuses in operational class gG. The tripping characteristic of the ETU340 ELISA of the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker exhibits a similar characteristic to fuses of operational class gG, e.g. LV HRC fuses, across the entire overcurrent range. From the selectivity perspective, this ETU340 ELISA is therefore especially suitable for combination with upstream and downstream fuses. Thanks to the ELISA function of the ETU340, for example, total selectivity is afforded between an upstream 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker with a rated current In of just 160 A and a downstream 100 A LV HRC fuse. This advantageous feature allows users to choose cheaper circuit breakers and configure additional grading levels more easily in low-voltage networks. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 123 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Advantages of 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker with ETU340 ELISA over fuses The extensive internal and external accessories of the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker can be used. When the EFB300 external function box is used, it is possible to output alarms from the ETU, e.g. reason for tripping overload warning (overload or short circuit). Adjustable operating current for the overload release, thereby making it possible to use smaller cable cross sections Selectivity to downstream fuses 1 : 1.6 Can be closed again immediately after tripping and troubleshooting; no need to stock replacement fuses Note The minimum short-circuit current at the line side I``kmin must be at least 7 times the circuit breaker's rated current In to trip the molded case circuit breaker after 5 s in compliance with IEC 60364-4-43, DIN VDE 0100-430. ETU340 ELISA 3-pole: ETU340 ELISA 4-pole: Line protection - function ELISA LI The ETU340 ELISA electronic trip unit has: Simulation of the tripping characteristic of a fuse in a circuit breaker Adjustable parameter setting Ir for overload protection (L) Increased, fixed parameter setting Ii for instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) - Ii = 15 x Ir With 4-pole versions only: Neutral conductor protection (N) which can be deactivated Permanently active thermal memory, cannot be deactivated 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 124 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers ETU340 ELISA parameters Setting values Ir Setting values Ii The instantaneous short-circuit protection is permanently set to the highest possible value. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 125 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Setting values IN 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 126 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Electronic trip unit ETU350 LSI ETU350 LSI 3-pole: ETU350 LSI 4-pole: Line protection - function LSI The ETU350 electronic trip unit has: Adjustable parameter settings Ir and tr for overload protection (L) Adjustable parameter settings Isd and tsd for short-time delayed short circuit protection (S) Fixed parameter setting Ii for instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) With 4-pole versions only: Neutral conductor protection (N) which can be deactivated Permanently active thermal memory, cannot be deactivated ETU350 parameters: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 127 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Overload protection L: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 128 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Short-time delayed short-circuit protection S: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 129 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Instantaneous short-circuit protection I: The instantaneous short-circuit protection is permanently set to the highest possible value. Neutral conductor protection N: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 130 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 5-series and 8-series electronic trip units Parameter input via display unit With 5-series and 8-series electronic trip units, it is possible to set more parameters and to scale the selection of parameters more finely than on 3-series trip units. Parameters are set via the display unit and its buttons. This functionality is available, however, only if a separate, dedicated power supply is connected to the molded case circuit breakers. Potential alternatives for this power supply: 24 V supplied externally via: - EFB300 external function box - temporarily connected TD300 or TD500 test device - internal 24 V module - internal COM060 communication module Current flow > 20% In in one of the 3 phases A description of the parameter display can be found in chapter "Operator controls (Page 93)". Additional features of 8-series units In addition to the features shared with 5-series trip units, 8-series units also offer: With three-pole molded case circuit breakers, a voltage tap for each phase and the option of connecting the potential of the neutral conductor With four-pole molded case circuit breakers, four internal voltage taps are provided for measuring the conductor voltages Additional measurement of power values (only possible with an external 24 V supply) Note In order to avoid the display of small ghost currents (e.g. when the breaker is switched off), all currents below 5% of rated current are displayed as "0" as standard. This threshold can be changed using powerconfig. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 131 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Electronic trip units ETU550 LSI and ETU850 LSI ETU550 LSI 3-pole and 4-pole units: ETU850 LSI 3-pole and 4-pole units: Line protection - function LSI The ETU550 and ETU850 electronic trip units have: Adjustable parameter settings Ir and tr for overload protection (L) Adjustable parameter settings Isd and tsd for short-time delayed short circuit protection (S) Adjustable parameter setting Ii for instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) With 4-pole versions: adjustable parameter setting IN for neutral conductor protection (N) (can be activated optionally with 3-pole versions when an external current transformer is used for the neutral conductor) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 132 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers ETU550 / ETU850 parameters (3-pole version): 1) only 3-pole version with external current transformer for N conductor ETU550 / ETU850 parameters (4-pole version): 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 133 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Overload protection L: Ir Adjustable from 0.4 to 1.0 x In in absolute current values * Ir < 50 A: in steps of 0.5 A Ir 50 A: in steps of 1 A * tr Adjustable from 0.5 to 12 / 15 / 17 / 20 / 25 s (dependent on rated operational current and frame size) with a reference point of 6 x Ir. In steps of 0.1 s The ETU550 LSI and ETU850 LSI units have a thermal memory; this can be deactivated. Short-time delayed short-circuit protection S: Isd Adjustable from 0.6 to 9 / 10 x In * Isd < 50 A: in steps of 0.5 A * tsd Isd 50 A: in steps of 1 A Adjustable from 0.05 to 0.5 s with a reference point of Isd = 8 x Ir in steps of 0.01 s The curve shape I2t = constant can be deactivated. Instantaneous short-circuit protection I: Ii Sizes 100 A to 400 A: * adjustable from 1.5 to 10 / 12 x In Size 630 A: See tables above in steps of 1 A Neutral conductor protection N: The neutral conductor protection function is available only for 3-pole molded case circuit breakers with external current transformer for N conductor for 4-pole molded case circuit breakers. * IN Adjustable in steps of 1 A 3-pole breakers with external current transformer for N conductor: In < 63 A: 0.4 to 1.6 x In In 63 A: 0.2 to 1.6 x In 4-pole breakers: In < 63 A: 0.4 to 1.6 x In In 63 A: 0.2 to 1.0 or 1.6 x In 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 134 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Electronic trip units ETU560 LSIG and ETU860 LSIG ETU560 LSIG 3-pole and 4-pole units: ETU860 LSIG 3-pole and 4-pole units: Line protection - function LSIG The ETU560 and ETU860 electronic trip units have: Adjustable parameter settings Ir and tr for overload protection (L) Adjustable parameter settings Isd and tsd for short-time delayed short circuit protection (S) Adjustable parameter setting Ii for instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) Adjustable parameter settings Ig and tg for ground-fault protection (G) With 4-pole versions: adjustable parameter setting IN for neutral conductor protection (N) optionally available for 3-pole versions 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 135 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers ETU560 / ETU860 parameters (3-pole version): 1) only 3-pole version with external current transformer for N conductor ETU560 / ETU860 parameters (4-pole version): 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 136 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Overload protection L: Ir Adjustable from 0.4 to 1.0 x In in absolute current values * Ir < 50 A: in steps of 0.5 A Ir 50 A: in steps of 1 A * tr Adjustable from 0.5 to 12 / 15 / 17 / 20 / 25 s (dependent on rated operational current and frame size) with a reference point of 6 x Ir. In steps of 0.1 s The ETU560 LSIG and ETU860 LSIG units have a thermal memory which can be deactivated. Short-time delayed short-circuit protection S: * Isd Adjustable from 0.6 to 9 / 10 x In Isd < 50 A: in steps of 0.5 A Isd 50 A: in steps of 1 A * tsd Adjustable from 0.05 to 0.5 s with a reference point of Isd = 8 x Ir in steps of 0.01 s The curve shape I2t = constant can be deactivated. Instantaneous short-circuit protection I: Ii Sizes 100 A to 400 A: * adjustable from 1.5 to 10 / 12 x In Size 630 A: See tables above in steps of 1 A Ground-fault protection G: The detection of the ground-fault current is based on a vectorial summation of the phase currents and the neutral conductor current for 4-pole or 3-pole circuit breakers with an external current transformer for the neutral conductor. * Ig Adjustable from 0.2 / 0.25 / 0.4 / 0.6 to 1.0 x In in steps of 1 A * tg Adjustable from 0.05 to 0.8 s with a reference point of 2 x Ig In steps of 0.01 s An alarm threshold IgA between 0.2 to 1 x In can also be set. in steps of 1 A The current-dependent curve shape I2t = constant can be deactivated. The ground-fault protection function G can be deactivated. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 137 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Neutral conductor protection N: The neutral conductor protection function is available only for 3-pole molded case circuit breakers with external current transformer for N conductor for 4-pole molded case circuit breakers. * IN Adjustable in steps of 1 A 3-pole breakers with external current transformer for N conductor: In < 63 A: 0.4 to 1.6 x In In 63 A: 0.2 to 1.6 In 4-pole breakers: In < 63 A: 0.4 to 1.6 x In In 63 A: 0.2 to 1.0 or 1.6 x In 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 138 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 139 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.2.2 Overview of 3VA molded case circuit breakers in line protection applications 1) In 125 A, 160 A: Icu / Ics = 36 kA / 36 kA 2) Operating cycles C - O 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 140 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 1) In 125 A, 160 A: Icu / Ics = 36 kA / 36 kA 2) Operating cycles C - O For the rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity and rated service short-circuit breaking capacity with direct current, see chapter DC network applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers (Page 172) . 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 141 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 142 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.2 Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 1) In 400/500 A and In 630 A: Ics = 65 kA O. r. On request 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 143 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers The main applications for motor protection are: The 3VA molded case circuit breaker as a starter protection circuit breaker The 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker as a motor protection breaker Overview of possible uses of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker for motor protection: All 3VA molded case circuit breakers are suitable for use with IE3 motors and, in future, also with IE4 motors. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 144 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.3.1 3VA molded case circuit breakers for starter protection When the 3VA molded case circuit breaker is used as a starter protection circuit breaker, the 3VA only takes on the short-circuit protection function of the motor feeder. The overload protection of the motor feeder is provided by an overload relay, such as 3RB, or by a motor management device, such as SIMOCODE. Functional switching is performed by the contactor. Two different device ranges are available for starter protection applications: 3VA1 starter protection circuit breaker with a magnetic trip unit for standard motor feeders with a rated conditional short-circuit current Iq up to 100 kA 3VA2 starter protection circuit breaker with electronic trip unit for high-end motor feeders with a rated conditional short-circuit current Iq up to 150 kA You will find the tested device combinations in the Siemens Industry Online Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109483387). The short-circuit release of the TM110M magnetic trip unit is not adjustable. In this case the short-circuit release is permanently set to 16 times the rated current In. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 145 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Setting values of the TM110M magnetic trip unit for the 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker: Setting values of the TM120M magnetic trip unit for the 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 146 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Setting values of the ETU310M electronic trip unit for the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 147 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.3.2 3VA molded case circuit breakers for motor protection The 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers for motor protection are designed for optimal protection and direct-on-line starting of three-phase squirrel-cage motors. Possible uses 3VA2 motor protection circuit breaker up to 500 A, tested according to IEC EN 60947-4-1 3VA2 motor protection circuit breaker as motor protection combination, 3VA2 with 3RT Overview of possible uses of the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker for motor protection: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 148 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.3.2.1 3VA2 motor protection circuit breaker up to 500 A, tested according to IEC EN 60947-4-1 As the 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers have been tested according to standard IEC EN 60947-4-1 (as motor starters), these devices can also be used as motor protection circuit breakers without an additional contactor. In this case the 3VA2 motor protection breaker takes on the short-circuit protection and overload protection functions in addition to functional switching (ON/OFF) of the motor. However, as functional switching of the motor according to utilization category AC-3 reduces the electrical service life of the circuit breaker, this use is only suitable for applications with a low switching frequency. The maximum adjustable rated current of the circuit breaker is also restricted by the increased AC-3 requirements. Dependence of motor protection circuit breaker on motor size and electrical service life 1) Guide value for 4-pole standard motors at 400 V AC, 50 Hz. Selection depends on the specific startup and rated data of the protected motor 2) Rated conditional short-circuit current: * lq = 55 kA - circuit breaker with medium breaking capacity M * lq = 85 kA - circuit breaker with very high breaking capacity C 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 149 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.3.2.2 3VA2 motor protection breaker as tested motor protection combination, 3VA2 with 3RT The 3VA2 motor protection circuit breakers with 3RT contactors and 3RW soft starters were tested as a motor protection combination for standard applications. In this case, the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker takes on the protection functions, shortcircuit protection and overload protection, and the 3RT contactor or the soft starter is responsible for functional switching (ON/OFF) of the motor. You will find the tested device combinations in the Siemens Industry Online Portal (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109483387). 3.3.2.3 Protection functions of 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers for motor protection Different trip unit variants are available for the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker. These vary according to functionality and protection functions. Overview of the ETU versions 1) Adjustable tripping times with phase unbalance in firmware version 4.3 and higher. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 150 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Thermal memory All 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers for motor applications have a "thermal memory" which takes the pre-loading of the three-phase asynchronous motor into account. The tripping times of the inverse-time delayed overload releases are only valid for the unloaded (cold) state. The pre-loading of the 3-phase motor must be taken into consideration in order to prevent damage to the motor, e.g. from being frequently switched on without sufficient cooling time. Principle of operation All 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers for motor protection have a thermal model of the motor integrated in the electronic trip unit. This reduces the response time of the molded case circuit breaker with a thermal memory such that further overloads cannot damage the motor windings. The motor is switched off within a time limit determined by the thermal preloading, see curve in the figure below (response time of the trip unit after overload trip). An overload may also be the next inrush current of the motor. After an overcurrent trip, the trip times are reduced according to the tripping characteristic. A cooling time determined by the size of the motor is required before the motor can be switched on again. This prevents the motor from being thermally overloaded by a current after an overload trip. Response time of the trip unit after overload trip: without thermal memory with thermal memory 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 151 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Protection against phase unbalance All 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers for motor protection have protection against unbalanced current loading of the motor. This ensures that the motor is reliably protected against overheating if a phase failure or major fluctuation of a phase current occurs. The phase unbalance ratio is calculated from the mean value of the three phases L1, L2 and L3 and the highest possible phase current deviating from this. If the phase unbalance ratio exceeds the set value, the circuit breaker trips according to tripping time tunbal. With ETU350M, the tunbal tripping times are permanently set to 0.7 s for startup and to 4 s for continuous operation. With ETU550M and ETU860M, the tunbal tripping times for startup can be set from 0.7 s to 60 s and for continuous operation from 4 s to 420 s. The lowest value is always set as a factory default. The adjustable tripping time can be used for operation with soft starters, for 2-phase phaseangle control or DC braking with soft starters. Calculation formulas: lMW Mean value of the three phase currents li One phase current With the ETU350M trip unit version, the unbalance ratio is permanently set to 40%. With the ETU550M and ETU860M trip unit versions, the unbalance ratio can be set freely between 5% and 50%. The default setting of 40% is set at the factory. Trip classes TC The trip class Tc specifies the tripping time Tp for balanced 3-pole loads, starting from the cold state, with 7.2 times the set current Ir according to IEC EN 60947 4-1. Combinations with class 10 are normally used. The trip classes with "E" indicate a narrower tolerance band of tripping time Tp. These trip classes can also be implemented with the precise electronic trip units of the 3VA2 motor protection circuit breakers. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 152 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Trip classes of overload protection devices according to IEC 60947-4-1: 1) The overload protection device must trip within these times. Tripping characteristic for 3-pole symmetrical load: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 153 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Blocking protection The 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers with the ETU860M motor protection trip unit now have blocking protection integrated in the circuit breaker for the first time. If the motor is blocked (or if it falls short of the breakdown torque), a high motor current almost as high as the starting current but still not as high as a short-circuit current - is generated. Without blocking protection, it can take up to 30 s or even longer (depending on the current and TP settings) for the molded case circuit breaker to trip. This results in unnecessary thermal stress. Blocking protection is automatically deactivated during startup until the motor reaches operating speed (tstart). tstart is equal to tb. Typical application examples for this include: Rock crushers (rock too large or too hard) Conveyor belts (transported goods jammed) 1) Adjustable Ib over 0.4 in firmware version 4.3 and higher 2) Adjustable tb over 0.5 s in firmware version 4.3 and higher Idle running protection The 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers with the ETU860M motor protection trip unit now have idle running protection integrated in the circuit breaker for the first time. When the load on the motor is removed, e.g. when the drive chain or drive belt snaps, the current falls below the normal motor operational current. The integrated idle running protection detects this condition, trips and thus shuts down the application. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 154 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.3.3 ETU350M electronic trip unit Motor protection - function LSI The ETU350M electronic trip unit features: Adjustable parameter setting Ir for overload protection (L) Adjustable parameter setting Isd for short-time delayed short circuit protection (S) Fixed parameter setting tsd for short-time delayed short circuit protection (S), tsd = 0.03 s Fixed parameter setting Ii for short-circuit protection (I), Ii = 15 x Ir Adjustable parameter setting Tc for the trip class Fixed parameter setting for phase unbalance of 40% Permanently active thermal memory, cannot be deactivated ETU350M parameters 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 155 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Setting values for Ir Setting values for Tc Setting values for Isd 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 156 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Instantaneous short-circuit protection Ii Short-circuit protection Ii is permanently set to the highest possible value. Phase unbalance / phase failure: Iunbal of current mean value * permanently set to 40% * Iunbal tripping time during startup permanently set to 0.7 s * Iunbal tripping time during normal operation permanently set to 4 s 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 157 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.3.4 5-series and 8-series electronic trip units Parameter input via display unit With 5-series and 8-series electronic trip units, it is possible to set more parameters and to scale the selection of parameters more finely than on 3-series electronic trip units. Parameters are set via the display unit and its buttons. This functionality is available, however, only if a separate, dedicated power supply is connected to the molded case circuit breakers. Potential alternatives for this power supply: 24 V power supply via: - EFB300 external function box - temporarily connected TD300 or TD500 test device - internal 24 V module - internal COM060 communication module Current flow > 20% In in one of the 3 phases You will find further information on the parameter display in chapter Operator controls (Page 93). Additional features of 8-series units In addition to the features shared with 5-series trip units, 8-series units also offer: With three-pole molded case circuit breakers, a voltage tap for each phase and the option of connecting the potential of the neutral conductor With four-pole molded case circuit breakers, four internal voltage taps are provided for measuring the conductor voltages Additional measurement of power values (only possible with an external 24 V supply) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 158 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.3.4.1 ETU550M electronic trip unit Motor protection - function LSI The ETU550M electronic trip unit features: Adjustable parameter setting Ir for overload protection (L) Adjustable parameter setting Isd for short-time delayed short circuit protection (S) Fixed parameter setting tsd for short-time delayed short circuit protection (S), tsd = 0.03 s Adjustable parameter setting Ii for short-circuit protection (I) Adjustable parameter setting Tc for the trip class or tripping time Tp Adjustable parameter setting for phase unbalance from 5 to 50% / Off, tunbal ETU550M setting parameters 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 159 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Overload protection L: Ir Adjustable from 0.4 to 1.0 x In in absolute current values * Ir < 50 A: in steps of 0.5 A Ir 50 A: in steps of 1 A The ETU550M has a permanently activated thermal memory. Short-time delayed short-circuit protection S: * * Isd tsd Adjustable from 1.2 to 12/15 x In in absolute current values Ir < 50 A: in steps of 0.5 A Ir 50 A: in steps of 1 A Permanently set to 0.03 s Instantaneous short-circuit protection I: Ii Adjustable from 3 to 12/15 x In in absolute current values * Ir < 50 A: in steps of 0.5 A Ir 50 A: in steps of 1 A Trip class Tc or tripping time Tp: Tc Adjustable 10 A / 10E / 20 / 20E / 30 * * Tp Adjustable from 3 to 13 / 15 / 25 / 30 s (dependent on rated current) in steps of 1 s Phase unbalance Iunbal Iunbal * Adjustable from 5 to 50% relative to the mean value of the three phase currents in steps of 1% * tunbal tripping time1) during startup * tunbal tripping time1) during normal operation Adjustable from 4 to 420 s, default setting 4 s Adjustable from 0.7 to 60 s, default setting 0.7 s The phase unbalance function can be deactivated. 1) Adjustable tripping time with phase unbalance in firmware version 4.3 and higher. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 160 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.3.4.2 ETU860M electronic trip unit Motor protection - function LSIG The ETU860M electronic trip unit features: Adjustable parameter setting Ir for overload protection (L) Adjustable parameter setting Isd for short-time delayed short circuit protection (S) Fixed parameter setting tsd for short-time delayed short circuit protection (S), tsd = 0.03 s Adjustable parameter setting Ii for short-circuit protection (I) Adjustable parameter settings Ig and tg for ground-fault protection (G) Adjustable parameter setting Tc for the trip class or tripping time Tp Adjustable parameter setting for phase unbalance from 5 to 50% / OFF, tunbal Adjustable parameter settings Ib and tb for blocking protection Adjustable parameter settings I<< and t<< for idle running protection 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 161 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers ETU860M setting parameters 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 162 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Overload protection L: Ir Adjustable from 0.4 to 1.0 x In in absolute current values * Ir < 50 A: in steps of 0.5 A Ir 50 A: in steps of 1 A The ETU860M has a permanently activated thermal memory. Short-time delayed short-circuit protection S: * * Isd tsd Adjustable from 1.2 to 12/15 x In in absolute current values Ir < 50 A: in steps of 0.5 A Ir 50 A: in steps of 1 A Permanently set to 0.03 s Instantaneous short-circuit protection I: Ii Adjustable from 3 to 12/15 x In in absolute current values * Ir < 50 A: in steps of 0.5 A Ir 50 A: in steps of 1 A Ground-fault protection G: The detection of the ground-fault current is based on the vectorial summation of the three phase currents. * Ig Adjustable from 0.2 to 1 x In in absolute current values Ir < 50 A: in steps of 0.5 A Ir 50 A: in steps of 1 A tg Adjustable from 0.05 to 0.8 s in steps of 0.01 s An alarm threshold IgA between 0.2 to 1 x In can also be set; in steps of 1 A * The current-dependent curve shape I2tg = constant can be deactivated. Ground-fault protection (G) can be deactivated. Note An external current transformer for the neutral conductor cannot be connected. Trip class Tc or tripping time Tp: * Tc Adjustable 10 A / 10E / 20 / 20E / 30 * Tp Adjustable from 3 to 13 / 15 / 25 / 30 s (dependent on rated current) in steps of 1 s 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 163 Applications 3.3 Motor protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Phase unbalance Iunbal Iunbal * Adjustable from 5 to 50% relative to the mean value of the three phase currents in steps of 1% * tunbal tripping time1) during startup Adjustable from 0.7 to 60 s, default setting 0.7 s * tunbal tripping time1) during normal operation Adjustable from 4 to 420 s, default setting 4 s The phase unbalance function can be deactivated. 1) Adjustable tripping times with phase unbalance in firmware version 4.3 and higher. Blocking protection: Ib 1) Adjustable from 0.4 to 10 x In * in steps of 1 A 2) tb Adjustable from 0.5 to 10 s * in steps of 0.5 s Blocking protection can be deactivated. 1) 2) Adjustable Ib over 0.4 in firmware version 4.3 and higher Adjustable tb over 0.5 s in firmware version 4.3 and higher Idle running protection: I<< Adjustable from 0.3 to 0.9 x Ir in steps of 0.01 s t<< Adjustable from 1 to 200 s * in steps of 1 s Idle running protection can be deactivated. * 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 164 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.4 Use of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers as switch disconnectors 3.4 Use of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers as switch disconnectors Switch disconnectors are deployed as: Disconnectors in subdistribution and final distribution boards Bus couplers Disconnectors for machine groups, e.g. as maintenance and repair breakers Operator control and disconnector element for cables, busbars and device groups Application as disconnector unit Application as main switches Isolation of small distribution systems in industrial/commercial buildings Disconnection of loads Switch disconnectors are capable of switching equipment and parts of electrical installations when they are conducting their operational current under normal operating conditions. Switch disconnectors do not have overload or short-circuit releases. For this reason, a molded case circuit breaker or a fuse must be installed upstream of every switch disconnector. Refer to chapter Upstream protection of switch disconnectors (Page 170). Compatibility of 3VA switch disconnectors and accessories 3VA1 switch disconnectors have been developed from the 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker design. Both share the same attributes listed below: Sizes Dimensions Mounting options Procedure for installing accessories This means that a shunt trip can trip the switch disconnectors by remote control, or that the disconnector can be opened or closed by a side wall mounted rotary operator. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 165 Applications 3.4 Use of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers as switch disconnectors Isolating features A switch disconnector isolates individual circuits or items of equipment so that maintenance or repair work can be carried out. This is a health and safety requirement. In compliance with IEC 60947-3, the symbol below is clearly displayed on the front panel of switch disconnectors: In accordance with the requirements of the standard regarding isolating function, the 3VA1 switch disconnector features: the switch disconnector symbol a correctly dimensioned isolating distance in the OFF position When the switch disconnector handle is in the OFF position, the isolating distance between the main contacts is guaranteed to meet the requirements stipulated by standards pertaining to isolating features. This also applies when manual or motor operators installed on the disconnector are in the OFF position. Only when the disconnector is in this safe position can it be locked by various methods (e.g. door mounted rotary operator, motor operator). The 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker therefore also meets the requirements for disconnector units according to IEC 60204-1 in the capacity of a switch disconnector. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 166 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.4 Use of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers as switch disconnectors Making capacity Switch disconnectors have a predefined rated making and rated breaking capacity. As a result, loads are reliably switched on and off up to the specified breaking capacity. Features Switch disconnectors are primarily designed to conduct uninterrupted current up to the magnitude of the permissible rated uninterrupted current Iu. Another important feature of these devices is their rated short-circuit making capacity Icm, as this defines the capability of the switch disconnector to withstand dynamic and thermal current loads. Current loads can reach very high values when the switch disconnector makes on a short circuit. Switch disconnectors are designed to withstand these short-circuit currents without sustaining damage up to the value of their rated short-circuit making capacity. Utilization categories for switch disconnectors Utilization categories are differentiated according to the following criteria: The relationship between operational current and rated operational current The relationship between operational voltage and rated operational voltage Power factor (p.f.) Time constant The utilization category is also identified by a letter: A - for frequent operation B - for infrequent operation, e.g. disconnectors which are used only to isolate parts of electrical installations for maintenance purposes. It is important to note, however, that the term "frequent operation" does not mean that the switch disconnector may be used to start up, accelerate or shut down individual motors in normal operation. For example, a switch disconnector with a rated operational current Ie of 160 A and a rated operational voltage Ue of 400 V AC may be used for frequent switching of a mixture of resistive and inductive loads including moderate overload only if it can conduct a making current I of 480 A (3 x Ie) and withstand a making voltage U of 420 V AC (1.05 x Ue) with a power factor of 0.65. This capability corresponds to utilization category AC-22A. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 167 Applications 3.4 Use of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers as switch disconnectors I Making current Ic Breaking current Ie Rated operational current U Applied voltage Ue Rated operational voltage Ur Recovery voltage 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 168 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.4 Use of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers as switch disconnectors 3.4.1 Overview of 3VA1 as switch disconnectors 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 169 Applications 3.4 Use of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers as switch disconnectors 3.4.2 Upstream protection of switch disconnectors Switch disconnectors are not equipped with an integral overload or short-circuit release. For this reason, a molded case circuit breaker or a fuse must be installed upstream of every switch disconnector. The coordination tables given below contain the following information: The correct assignment of molded case circuit breakers to the switch disconnectors which require protection The maximum permissible rms short-circuit current kA rms for each combination of molded case circuit breaker and switch disconnector Protection of 3VA1 switch disconnectors at 50 / 60 Hz by a 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker More combinations can be found on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/3VADocumentation). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 170 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.4 Use of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers as switch disconnectors Combinations with other protective devices can be configured at any time by means of SIMARIS design or using the characteristics maximum let-through energy I2tmax and maximum let-through current Ic max of the 3VA1 switch disconnector. You will find these characteristics in the technical product data sheets and in the table in chapter Overview of 3VA1 as switch disconnectors (Page 169). Note In the event of a fault, all switching devices in the affected branch must be function-tested (see Regular maintenance (Page 535)). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 171 Applications 3.5 DC network applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.5 DC network applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers The main applications for 3VA circuit breakers in DC installations or networks are: Public transport systems, e.g. electric cars, underground rail networks and streetcars UPS systems Photovoltaic systems Wind power plants 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers as line protection devices with thermal overload releases and magnetic trip units with short-circuit protection are suitable for use in DC networks. Features specific to direct current Short-circuits are interrupted in DC networks by a method similar to the one applied to high alternating currents, i.e. by current limiting. A high arc voltage develops in molded case circuit breakers, which forces a current zero when the arc voltage exceeds the value of the recovery voltage. The current rise, however, is determined by the time constant and not the make time or power factor. Overloads are interrupted by a completely different principle to the method applied in AC networks. With direct currents, there is no periodic zero crossing and thus also no period of time without magnetic energy in the circuit during which the conditions for extinguishing the arc are favorable. The arc is not extinguished until the arc voltage exceeds the line voltage and the current reduces to zero. In other words, a high arc voltage must be developed in order to interrupt the direct current. The rated operational current values are generally the same for DC and AC applications. With DC applications, the breaking capacity depends only on: The arc extinction method used The line voltage 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 172 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.5 DC network applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.5.1 Variants The same thermal-magnetic trip units used as line protection devices in AC installations are also available for protecting DC installations. However, a correction factor must be applied to the magnetic trip unit. Example: 3VA1 160 A, TM240 ATAM: If the switching device is to trip instantaneously in response to an overcurrent of 1200 A, the parameter Ii for instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) must be set to: Ii = 1200 A x 0.7 = 840 A. For further information on trip units and details about setting parameters, please refer to chapter "Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers (Page 110)". It is not possible to use electronic trip units for this application. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 173 Applications 3.5 DC network applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.5.2 Breaking capacity with direct current 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 174 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.5 DC network applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.5.3 Recommended circuit configurations for DC systems GF Ground-fault monitoring 1) Ue > 250 V DC: DC insulating plate is mandatory for sizes 3VA10 and 3VA11 with a non-insulated mounting plate (see chapter Insulating measures (Page 246)) Note DC 2-pole (all-pole disconnection), grounded system The grounded pole must always be assigned to the individual conducting path, so that in the event of a ground fault there are always two conducting paths in series in a circuit with 3pole molded case circuit breakers, and three conducting paths in series in a circuit with 4pole molded case circuit breakers. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 175 Applications 3.5 DC network applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers Note DC 2-pole (all-pole disconnection), non-grounded system If there is no possibility of a double ground fault occurring, or if any ground fault that does occur is dealt with immediately (ground-fault monitoring), 500 V will be the maximum permissible direct voltage. In a non-grounded system, all poles must be disconnected. Further circuits are available on request. See also Insulating measures (Page 246) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 176 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.6 Applications of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker with frequency converters 3.6 Applications of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker with frequency converters 3VA molded case circuit breakers can be used as protective devices in systems using frequency converters. Applications of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers with frequency converters The 3VA1 thermal-magnetic molded case circuit breakers can be used on the primary or secondary side of the frequency converter in these applications. Applications of 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers with frequency converters The 3VA2 electronic molded case circuit breakers can only be used on the primary side of the frequency converter in the specified 50/60 Hz frequency range. Higher or lower frequencies result in major deviations in measured values with the result that the tripping characteristic cannot be adhered to. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 177 Applications 3.6 Applications of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker with frequency converters If the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker with communication is used, it must be ensured that only one 24 V DC power supply unit is used in the system. If this power supply unit is installed on the primary side, the cable must have additional shielding and must be connected to ground. Interruptions in communication might otherwise occur. Note You can find tables of tested protective devices for SINAMICS PM240-2 Power Modules on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109486009). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 178 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.7 400 Hz network applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.7 400 Hz network applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 400 Hz networks are used for: Ground power supply systems for aircraft On-board electrical systems of marine craft and aircraft Other external stations of airports which are protected by uninterruptible power supplies, e.g. radar installations, data processing equipment, communication systems It is important to supply the on-board electrical systems of aircraft with a very smooth DC voltage. This can be generated more easily by 400 Hz power supplies than by 50 Hz networks. Moreover, the power transmitters (transformers) are smaller and lighter by comparison with 50 Hz networks, two important arguments for using 400 Hz on-board electrical systems in aircraft and some marine craft. Suitable 3VA molded case circuit breakers and trip units 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers equipped with thermal-magnetic trip units TM210, TM220 and TM240 are suitable for use in 400 Hz networks. Features specific to 400 Hz supplies The thermal overload release of the 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker comprises a bimetal through which current flows, causing temperature rise. With currents at 400 Hz frequency, the temperature rise in the bimetal is higher than at 50 Hz. This is due to eddy-current losses and the reduction in the available conductor cross section as a result of the skin effect. The rated operational current must therefore be reduced by 10 % of the value used in 50/60 Hz applications. Furthermore, a correction factor must be applied to the magnetic trip unit. Example: 3VA1 160A, TM240 ATAM: Reduction by 10%: Maximum permissible rated operational current for 400 Hz applications = 160 A x 0.9 = 144 A Correction factor 0.7: If the switching device is to trip instantaneously in response to an overcurrent of 1200 A, the parameter Ii for instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) must be set to Ii = 1200 A x 0.7 = 840 A. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 179 Applications 3.7 400 Hz network applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers For further information on trip units and details about the setting parameters, please refer to chapter Line protection applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers (Page 110). It is not possible to use electronic trip units for this application. See also Temperature compensation for thermal-magnetic trip units TM210, TM220 and TM240 (Page 632) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 180 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.8 IT system applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.8 IT system applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers The main advantage of IT systems is that they safeguard continuity of service by electrical installations and are therefore deployed predominantly in consumer installations where availability of electrical power is a priority. As a general rule, circuits are interrupted only if two insulation faults occur simultaneously. Preferred applications for IT systems are therefore: In buildings with rooms used for medical purposes When mobile generators are in operation In certain industries, e.g.: - in the chemical industry - in the oil industry - in the steel industry - in mining The IT system is a low-voltage power supply network with increased failure-safety in the event of ground faults. In an IT system, live phases are not connected to ground. A ground fault does not cause system shutdown. IEC 60364-4-41 (VDE 0100-410) therefore requires insulation monitoring to indicate a fault of this kind. In the unusual event that a fault on the load side coincides with a second fault on the line side, the full phase-to-phase voltage is connected across one contact of the breaker. Siemens 3VA molded case circuit breakers for line protection, whether they are equipped with a thermal-magnetic trip unit or an electronic trip unit, are suitable for use in IT systems. Accordingly, the molded case circuit breakers meet the requirements of standard IEC / DIN EN 60947-2 Annex H up to a maximum voltage (Ue, max.) of 690 V AC. 3.8.1 Selection criteria for 3VA molded case circuit breakers The circuit breakers are always dimensioned and selected irrespective of the system type in which they will be deployed. The circuit breaker is always selected according to the maximum potential short-circuit current in the IT system. The device is selected in accordance with the relevant Icu values of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. If the system operator ensures that no double ground fault can occur on the input or output side of the molded case circuit breaker, the breaking capacity of Icu /Ics remains unchanged in IT systems. If this cannot be ensured, the values in accordance with the standard IEC 60947-2 Annex H apply for single-pole short circuits. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 181 Applications 3.8 IT system applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.8.2 Fault situation The most critical fault for molded case circuit breakers in ungrounded IT systems is a double-phase-to-ground fault on the infeed and load ends of the molded case circuit breaker. If this fault occurs, the entire phase-to-phase voltage is applied across one pole of the molded case circuit breaker. Ungrounded transformer RA Contact resistance of exposed conductive part ground Molded case circuit breaker Exposed conductive part Two faults on the load side - double-phase-to-ground fault A fault develops between two phases and an exposed conductive part or ground. A voltage of 690 V is applied at the main contacts. This voltage is disconnected by two breaker poles. The molded case circuit breaker is rated for Icu/Ics at 690 V. One fault on the line side and one fault on the load side (double-phase-to-ground fault) Single-pole short circuit, the full phase-to-phase voltage of 690 V is applied to main contact L3. Selection of the molded case circuit breaker according to their suitability as defined in IEC 60947-2, Annex H. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 182 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Applications 3.9 Safety-related applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3.9 Safety-related applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers The 3VA molded case circuit breakers can be used in safety-related applications (up to Category 2 and PL d according to ISO 13849-1 and SIL 2 according to IEC 62061). As the molded case circuit breaker has no diagnostic capability, such as mirror contacts, it cannot be used as a second function channel in the safety function. Neither is is practical to trip the molded case circuit breaker every time a safety request occurs, as it has to be reset manually. However it is possible to use the molded case circuit breaker as a "test device output". When combined with a contactor, this corresponds to Category 2 according to ISO 13849-1 and can therefore achieve up to PL d. According to IEC 62061, a hardware fault tolerance (HFT) of 0 can be assumed and up to SILCL 2 can therefore be achieved. Category 2 can be implemented if the contactor is monitored with the evaluation unit and a sufficiently prompt fault response (welding of main contacts) takes place in the event of contactor failure. The molded case circuit breaker is immediately tripped by an undervoltage release in the event of a fault. It is therefore a single-channel architecture with a specified fault reaction. Moreover, the power contactor and the molded case circuit breaker constitute proven components according to ISO 13849-2. DANGER Danger of death due to undetected fault cluster Undetected fault clusters can result in life-threatening situations in the application. In order to avoid an undetected fault cluster, the molded case circuit breaker must be tested after 6 to 12 months at the latest. Documentary evidence of the tests performed must be kept by the user during the period of use. The set delay time has an effect on the maximum response time. DANGER Danger of death due to excessively long delay time The delay time set on the molded case circuit breaker has an effect on the maximum response time. The user must ensure that this response time in the event of a fault is sufficiently short based on the risk assessment. You can find details and calculation examples in the FAQs on the Internet (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/40349715). The B10(d) values (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109738685) of the 3VA molded case circuit breakers are also listed there. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 183 Applications 3.9 Safety-related applications of 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 184 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.1 Overview of accessories for 3VA molded case circuit breakers 4.1.1 Accessories groups 4 A comprehensive range of accessories is available to help you adapt 3VA molded case circuit breakers to the requirements of the specific application. The table below indicates which accessories are compatible with particular 3VA molded case circuit breakers, and which sizes of breakers are compatible with the same accessory: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 185 Accessories 4.1 Overview of accessories for 3VA molded case circuit breakers 4.1.2 Possible combinations of of accessories The tables below indicate the combinability of different accessories. The boxes to the right of the grey diagonal line indicate whether or not accessories can be combined. Examples: Wire connector, 2 cables, and insulating plate offset (green lines in table below): Common box: contains square sym- Accessories can be combined bol Wire connector, 2 cables, and terminal cover (red lines in table below): Common box: is empty Accessories cannot be combined 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 186 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.1 Overview of accessories for 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 187 Accessories 4.1 Overview of accessories for 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 188 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.1 Overview of accessories for 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 189 Accessories 4.1 Overview of accessories for 3VA molded case circuit breakers 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 190 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories 4.2 Internal accessories 4.2.1 Mounting locations on 3VA molded case circuit breakers The portfolio of internal accessories includes: Auxiliary switches Alarm switches Auxiliary releases COM060 communication module 24 V module Cylinder lock (type Ronis) The following tables show the alternative mounting locations for internal accessories, which depend on the size and pole number of the circuit breaker. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 191 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 192 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 193 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 194 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 195 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories See also Cylinder locks for locking the 3VA molded case circuit breaker (Page 365) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 196 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories 4.2.2 Auxiliary and alarm switches The auxiliary and alarm switches for 3VA molded case circuit breakers belong to an integrated range of accessories. They can be installed in all sizes of all circuit breakers up to 1000 A. The auxiliary and alarm switches can be very simply snapped into place and connected up in accessory compartments provided on the front panel of the unit to the left and right of the handle. All auxiliary and alarm switches are designed as changeover contacts and therefore provide a high degree of flexibility for planning and installation purposes. HQ and HP switches The switches are available in versions HQ and HP. HQ switches are 7 mm wide, and HP switches 14 mm wide. Both switch versions can be combined extremely flexibly in a molded case circuit breaker. This level of compatibility means that two HQ switches can be optionally installed in place of one HP switch. HQ and HP switches have the same functionality, but differ in terms of the following features: Connection technology - HQ: One conductor per contact point - HP: Two conductors per contact point possible (loop-through) Key electrical data - HQ: max. 250 V; max. 6 A - HP: max. 600 V; max. 10 A Individual key electrical data can be found at the end of this chapter. All HQ switches are also available in an electronics-compatible version (HQ_el). The electronics-compatible auxiliary switches (HQ_el) are specially optimized for switching small voltages and currents. They are therefore particularly useful for alarms in the vicinity of PLC controllers, for example. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 197 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories The diagram below uses the example of an ET200S to illustrate the conventional method of connecting the electronics-compatible auxiliary switch AUX, the trip alarm switch TAS and the motor operator MO320 to a distributed I/O unit. Further information about contact reliability can be found at the end of this chapter. Auxiliary switches AUX The purpose of auxiliary switches is to signal the position of the main contacts of the molded case circuit breaker. The contacts of the auxiliary switch open and close simultaneously with the main contacts of the molded case circuit breaker. Leading changeover switches LCS Leading changeover switches signal the opening of the main contacts with a lead time of 20 ms in advance of circuit breaker trips and can be used for load shedding, for example. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 198 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories Trip alarm switches TAS Trip alarm switches signal all types of molded case circuit breaker trip, regardless of the cause of the trip. The trip alarm switches are actuated whenever the molded case circuit breaker switches to the TRIP position. Electrical alarm switches EAS Electrical alarm switches are operated as soon as the main contacts of the molded case circuit breaker open in the event that the breaker is tripped by the ETU. They indicate the following conditions: Overload L and neutral conductor overload Short-circuit S, I Ground-fault tripping G Residual current device RCD820 The electrical alarm switch is not operated: When the breaker is tripped manually - PUSH TO TRIP - When the breaker is withdrawn from the plug-in/draw-out socket when the main contacts are closed When activated via an auxiliary release - Shunt trip STL, STL(EI), STF - Undervoltage release UVR - Universal release UNI Electrical alarm switches are compatible only with 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers equipped with electronic trip units (ETU). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 199 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories Short circuit alarm switches SAS Short circuit alarm switches signal trips only if they have been initiated by a short circuit. These events are also indicated on the molded case circuit breaker. The trip must be reset by deliberate acknowledgement of the fault before the molded case circuit breaker is switched to ON again. Short circuit alarm switches are only compatible with 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers. On breakers equipped with electronic trip units, the short circuit alarm function is performed by the electronic trip unit (ETU) and the EFB300 external function box. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 200 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories 4.2.3 Contact sequence diagrams Main contacts open 1) Auxiliary contacts open Contacts closed Manual reset by tool necessary after tripping Automatic reset by motor operator MO320 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 201 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories 4.2.4 Technical specifications of auxiliary and alarm switches 1) Safe separation in the case of side-by-side construction of auxiliary switches and auxiliary releases only up to 440 V and in systems up to an impulse voltage withstand level of 4 kV 2) HP switches without adjacent switches; not in mounting locations 11 and 21 up to 690 V 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 202 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories 1) In combination with manual switching operations, but not when motor operators are used 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 203 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories 4.2.5 Auxiliary releases Auxiliary releases allow remote electrical tripping of the circuit breaker. They can be used to monitor control or main circuits in order to implement a protective system against accidental restart following a power failure, for example. Auxiliary releases therefore perform a main circuit monitoring function in addition to the main circuit monitoring performed by the trip unit. Auxiliary releases are extremely easy to install. No tools are required because these 21 mm wide components are simply snapped into place in the accessory compartments to the left and right of the handle. The accessories are connected by screw terminals for auxiliary conductors with a cross-section of up to 1.5 mm2. The terminals are mounted on the front of the unit for easy access. The shunt trips are suitable for use in electrical interlocks. An attempt to switch on a circuit breaker while the interlock voltage is applied to the shunt trip leads to a so-called "no-load switching operation", i.e. the basic breaker always returns to the TRIP position and the main contacts never close. Note All auxiliary releases are reverse-polarity-protected. Shunt trip left STL Shunt trips of type STL can be fitted in the left-hand accessory compartment as an alternative to an undervoltage release. The units are available with five rated voltages in the following range: 24 to 600 V AC 50/60 Hz 12 to 250 V DC They have a maximum power consumption of 58 VA which is significantly lower than the power consumption of the flexible shunt trip versions. Switches (permanent signal) or momentary push-buttons (minimum signal duration 40 ms) may be used to control shunt trips. Shunt trip left STL (EI) for electrical interlocks Shunt trips of the type STL (EI) can be used to implement electrical interlocks between two molded case circuit breakers. The interlocking auxiliary release prevents short-time contact between the main contacts during a switch-on attempt. Shunt trip STL (EI) is available with a rated voltage of 24 V DC. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 204 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories Shunt trips flexible STF Shunt trips of type STF can be fitted in the left-hand and the right-hand (3VA2 only) accessory compartment. They are therefore suitable for combining different auxiliary releases in one switch. The units are available with six rated voltages in the following range: 24 to 600 V AC 50/60 Hz Due to their design, their power consumption ranges up to maximum 750 VA and is therefore higher than the power consumption of STL versions. Undervoltage releases UVR Undervoltage releases trip the molded case circuit breaker in the event that the rated voltage fails or drops to between 70% and 35% of its normal value (in compliance with the relevant standard). The main contacts of the basic breaker cannot be reclosed until the voltage applied to the UVR reaches 85% of its rated value. The breaker main contacts cannot close until the UVR rated voltage reaches this level. The units are available with rated voltages in the following range: 24 to 480 V AC 50/60 Hz 12 to 250 V DC Universal releases UNI A universal release is a single, 21 mm wide component in which a shunt trip and an undervoltage release are combined. These are subject to the same tripping conditions as the individual devices. Both functions can therefore be performed at the same time with a minimal footprint. The three available rated voltages are identical in each case for both the shunt trip and the undervoltage release. These rated voltages are: 12 V DC 24 V DC 48 V DC 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 205 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories Technical specifications of shunt trips and releases 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 206 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 207 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories Tripping times of shunt trips Cable length under 20 m at Ue: Cable length 20 m to 200 m at Ue and max. conductor cross section: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 208 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories 4.2.6 Time-delay devices for undervoltage releases Undervoltage releases can also be equipped with external, electronic time-delay control devices which prevent unintentional tripping in response to brief voltage dips during periods of disrupted operation. Time-delay device for UVR with fixed delay setting The simple time-delay device with fixed delay setting is available for the following voltages: 110 V AC and 230 V DC 24 V DC The default delay time is >100 ms as supplied, but can be extended by the customer with the addition of supplementary capacitors: The device can be screw-mounted or attached to a 35 mm DIN rail. You can find a circuit diagram in chapter Circuit diagrams (Page 539) or in the operating instructions. 4.2.7 COM060 communication module You can find information about the COM060 communication module in chapter Communication and system integration (Page 484). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 209 Accessories 4.2 Internal accessories 4.2.8 24 V module With the aid of the 24 volt module, the ETU electronic trip unit of the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker can be permanently activated. The module is installed in the right-hand accessory compartment and takes up four slots. The following advantages arise from the use of the 24 V module: Activated display even when the circuit breaker is switched off or no current is flowing through the main circuit. Backlighting permanently activated Through activation of the ETUs, it is possible to test and change setting parameters (5series and 8-series ETUs) Faster tripping of the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker on connecting to a short-circuit by an already active ETU There are two connection points available for ground and 24 V DC, making looping through of the voltage very easy. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 210 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 4.3 Connection system The chapter "Connection technology" contains useful information and provides a summarized description of the 3VA connection system. It provides a helpful guide to connecting cables or busbars to a molded case circuit breaker and so helps to ensure the safety of personnel and material assets. Mistakes which affect the operational safety of electrical installations can be avoided. Contents The chapter discusses the following topics: General information about cables and busbars Portfolio of connection components for 3VA molded case circuit breakers with - Front cable connection - Front busbar connection / cable lug connection - Rear busbar connection / cable lug connection Further connection accessories 4.3.1 General information about cables and busbars Cables and busbars: Cables Cable designation and cable classes A key design feature of a cable is its flexibility. This is primarily determined by the number of cores inside the cable. Cable classes as defined by IEC 60228: Class 1 - cable with solid conductor Class 2 - cable with stranded conductors Class 5 - cable with finely stranded conductors Class 6 - cable with a large number of extra finely stranded conductors 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 211 Accessories 4.3 Connection system The conductors in class 1 and 2 cables are inflexible conductors, either solid or stranded. These are used predominantly in applications with low-curvature cable bending radii and in fixed or inflexible installations. Flexible conductors of class 5 and class 6 permit greater cable bending radii. The cable conductors used in low-voltage power distribution installations mainly belong to classes 1, 2, 5 and 6. Cables with solid conductors in class 1 used for these applications normally have a cross section of 16 mm or less. Please note: Solid-conductor cables in classes 1 and 2 are smaller in diameter than cables in classes 5 and 6 even when their cross sectional area is the same. As a result, cables with the same diameter from different classes may have different connection cross sections. Solid and stranded sector-shaped conductors are also used. Compression lugs and wire-end ferrules Cables are connected by means of compression lugs and wire-end ferrules to the molded case circuit breaker in order to provide stable, safe connections. These elements help to make solid connections at the breaker. The cable is first stripped over the distance L before the compression lug or wire-end ferrule is attached to the cable. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 212 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system The cable must be stripped carefully to ensure that the correct amount of insulating material is removed. If too much material is removed, it will not be possible to make a secure connection between the cable and compression lug or wire-end ferrule. Cable lugs for compression connections compliant with DIN 46235 have ideal heat transfer characteristics for connecting busbar connectors. By contrast, "Terminal lugs with narrow palm for switching devices" (designation "SG" for example) must be used to make direct cable connections in the termination area of the molded case circuit breaker. These terminal lugs vary in design depending on make. All terminal lugs of this kind with the dimensions stipulated in standard IEC 60947-1, Annex P are basically suitable. Cables and busbars: Busbars In addition to cables, the busbar is also widely used in electrical connections, especially in panels. Some of the reasons for using busbars include: High-curvature bending radii which are unsuitable for cables of large cross section Lack of space Heat dissipation, air circulation ... Rigid and in some cases flexible busbars are used in the examples of applications listed above. Rigid busbars are made of copper or aluminum. Pre-punched aluminum busbars, some of which are threaded, are often used. Flexible busbars are chosen for applications which demand a high degree of flexibility and high-curvature bending radii. These consist of bundles of copper or aluminum strips. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 213 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 4.3.2 Portfolio of connection components for 3VA molded case circuit breakers 4.3.2.1 General overview 3VA molded case circuit breakers employ connection technology which is designed to support uncomplicated and convenient commissioning of the breakers in such a way that all installation requirements are fulfilled. To meet this objective, an extensive portfolio of connection components is available. Box terminal Wire connector, 2 cables Wire connector with control wire tap Wire connector Wire connector, large, with control wire tap Wire connector, large Wire connector, 2 cables, with control wire tap Bus connectors edgewise Rear connection stud flat Front bus connectors offset Front bus connectors extended Nut keeper kit Nut keeper kit, right-angled Rear connection stud round Wire connector, 6 cables 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 214 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Furthermore, the connection accessories (see chapter Further connection accessories (Page 246)) can be optionally installed to insulate the termination area of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker and so provide protection against accidental contact. A control wire tap can be implemented quickly using accessory components which are available by special order. Terminal cover Terminal cover, extended Terminal cover, offset Insulating plate Rear insulating plate, offset Phase barriers Control wire tap for busbars Control wire tap for box terminal 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 215 Accessories 4.3 Connection system The table below lists all the main conductor connection systems available for 3VA molded case circuit breakers and also indicates which type of cables or busbars are compatible which each connection system. A basic distinction is made between front and rear connections. The illustration in the table shows the 3-piece pack for the 3-pole molded case circuit breaker. All connection systems are also available in 4-piece packs for 4-pole molded case circuit breakers. 1) A box terminal can be installed at the right-angled nut keeper kit to allow a cable to be connected directly. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 216 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system The connection technology for 3VA molded case circuit breakers can be used without modifications in the following applications: On all fixed-mounted versions of molded case circuit breaker On all molded case circuit breakers equipped with plug-in technology On all molded case circuit breakers equipped with draw-out technology The connection components described above are identical for fixed-mounted breakers, for plug-in and for draw-out versions. If additional insulation measures are necessary, there may be differences between fixed-mounted and draw-out versions. Connection technology available from or installed at the factory All 3VA molded case circuit breakers are available as standard with a nut keeper kit (clip-in nut and clamping screw) at the infeed and load ends. For units up to size 160 A, a box terminal for direct cable connection can be optionally selected instead of the nut keeper kit. The box terminal is preassembled and installed at the factory. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 217 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 4.3.2.2 Front cable connection The diagram below illustrates all the components available for implementing a direct cable connection at the molded case circuit breaker. The only exception is the box terminal as this can be used to connect busbars as well as cables. Connection technology Box terminal Wire connector, 2 cables Wire connector with control wire tap Wire connector Wire connector, large, with control wire tap Wire connector, large Cables and busbars Solid conductor, class 1 Stranded conductor, class 2 Flexible conductors, classes 5 and 6 Sector-shaped conductor Flexible busbars Wire connector, 2 cables, with control wire tap Wire connector, 6 cables 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 218 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Box terminal The box terminal as a factory-assembled connection can be optionally selected as an alternative to the nut keeper kit (see chapter Front busbar and cable lug connections (Page 232)) for all 3VA molded case circuit breakers up to size 160 A. The 3VA breaker is then shipped with preassembled box terminals. An auxiliary connection can be implemented using a special control wire tap. For further information, please refer to chapter Auxiliary conductor terminal (Page 269). In addition to directly connected cables, flexible busbars can also be connected to box terminals. The tables below show all the types and sizes of cable and flexible busbar that can be connected to a box terminal. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 219 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers: 1) Cable connection: Maximum current carrying capacity 400 A Flexible copper busbar: No restrictions 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 220 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers: 1) Cable connection: Maximum current carrying capacity 400 A Flexible copper busbar: No restrictions Box terminals can be ordered as a pack of 3 as a pack of 4 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 221 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Wire connector with and without control wire tap The wire connector is available under separate article numbers depending on whether it is ordered with or without a control wire tap. With the exception of the hole for the control wire tap, both wire connectors are technically identical, i.e. the same cable cross sections can be connected to both variants. Note All control wire taps offered in the 3VA molded case circuit breaker portfolio are permitted only up to a maximum current of 15 A. Suitable cable cross-sections: Cables up to a maximum of 2.5 mm2 can be connected. The wire connector is an internal component, i.e. it is contained within the external contour of the molded case circuit breaker. As a result, the size of cable cross section which can be connected is limited by the geometry of the breaker's termination area. The tables below show all the types and sizes of cable which can be connected to a wire connector. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 222 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers: 1) Copper cable: Maximum current carrying capacity 400 A Aluminum cable: Maximum current carrying capacity 310 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 223 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers: 1) Copper cable: Maximum current carrying capacity 400 A Aluminum cable: Maximum current carrying capacity 310 A Wire connector with and without control wire tap can be ordered: as a pack of 3 as a pack of 4 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 224 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Wire connector, large, with and without control wire tap The wire connector, large, is available under separate article numbers depending on whether it is ordered with or without a control wire tap. With the exception of the hole for the control wire tap, both wire connectors are technically identical, i.e. the same cable cross sections can be connected to both variants. Note All control wire taps offered in the 3VA molded case circuit breaker portfolio are permitted only up to a maximum current of 15 A. Suitable cable cross-sections: Cables up to a maximum of 2.5 mm2 can be connected. The wire connector, large is an external terminal, i.e. it projects beyond the external contour of the breaker's termination area. This means that cables with a larger cross-section can be connected. The terminal cover extended plus the required assembly materials are supplied as standard with all wire connectors, large. This is used for insulation and provides degree of protection IP4x at the front of the molded case circuit breaker and degree of protection IP2x at the infeed side and load side (see chapter Insulating measures (Page 246)). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 225 Accessories 4.3 Connection system The table below shows all the types and sizes of cable which can be connected to a wire connector, large. Wire connector, large with or without control wire tap can be ordered: as a pack of 3 as a pack of 4 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 226 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Wire connector, 2 cables, with and without control wire tap The wire connector, 2 cables, is available under separate article numbers depending on whether it is ordered with or without a control wire tap. With the exception of the hole for the control wire tap, both wire connectors are technically identical, i.e. the same cable cross sections can be connected to both variants. Note All control wire taps offered in the 3VA molded case circuit breaker portfolio are permitted only up to a maximum current of 15 A. Suitable cable cross-sections: Cables up to a maximum of 2.5 mm2 can be connected. The wire connector, 2 cables is an external terminal, i.e. it projects beyond the external contour of the breaker's termination area. The 2-cable capacity of the terminal allows cables with large cross-sectional area to be connected. The extended terminal cover plus the required assembly materials are supplied as standard with all wire connectors, 2 cables. This is used for insulation and provides degree of protection IP4x at the front of the molded case circuit breaker and degree of protection IP2x at the infeed side and load side (see chapter Insulating measures (Page 246)). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 227 Accessories 4.3 Connection system The table below shows all the types and sizes of cable which can be connected to a wire connector, 2 cables. Wire connector, 2 cables with or without control wire tap can be ordered: as a pack of 3 as a pack of 4 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 228 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Wire connector, 6 cables The distribution wire connector, 6 cables is an external terminal, i.e. it projects beyond the external contour of the breaker's termination area. It can hold up to 6 cables. One of the six holes in the terminal can be used to implement a control wire tap. The terminal cover extended plus the required assembly materials are supplied as standard with all distribution wire connectors, 6 cables. This is used for insulation and provides degree of protection IP4x at the front of the molded case circuit breaker and degree of protection IP2x at the infeed side and load side (see chapter Auxiliary conductor terminal (Page 269)). The table below shows all the types and sizes of cable which can be connected to a distribution wire connector, 6 cables. 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 229 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers: Distribution wire connectors, 6 cables can be ordered: as a pack of 3 as a pack of 4 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 230 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Wire connectors for 3VA25 molded case circuit breaker The 3VA25 molded case circuit breaker is shipped with a preassembled nut keeper kit. Wire connectors are also available in 3-pole and 4-pole versions. An auxiliary connection can be implemented using a special control wire tap. For further information, please refer to chapter Auxiliary conductor terminal (Page 269). The table below shows all the types and sizes of cable which can be connected to wire connectors for the 3VA25 molded case circuit breaker. The wire connectors for the 3VA25 molded case circuit breaker can be ordered: as a pack of 3 as a pack of 4 Assembly materials for wire connectors and the necessary insulation measure are included in the scope of supply. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 231 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 4.3.2.3 Front busbar and cable lug connections The diagram below illustrates all the components available for implementing a busbar or compression lug connection on the front panel of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. Connection technology Bus connectors edgewise Front bus connectors offset Front bus connectors extended Cables and busbars Busbars Flexible busbars Compression lugs Nut keeper kit 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 232 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Nut keeper kit With the nut keeper kit, it is possible to connect busbars and compression lugs directly to the terminal of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. An auxiliary connection can be implemented using a special control wire tap. For further information, please refer to chapter Auxiliary conductor terminal (Page 269). The table below provides an overview of the minimum sizes of cables and busbars which can be installed using the nut keeper kit. Nut keeper kits can be ordered: as a pack of 3 as a pack of 4 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 233 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Front bus connectors extended Bus connectors extended can be installed to connect larger busbars and compression lugs outside the termination area of a 3VA molded case circuit breaker. The front bus connectors therefore extend the terminal of the breaker. All front bus connectors extended are supplied as standard with phase barriers to provide insulation between individual phases. For further information, please refer to chapter Insulating measures (Page 246). An auxiliary connection can be implemented using a special control wire tap. For further information, please refer to chapter Auxiliary conductor terminal (Page 269). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 234 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system The table below provides an overview of the minimum sizes of cables and busbars which can be installed using front bus connectors extended. Front bus connectors extended can be ordered: as a pack of 3 as a pack of 4 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 235 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Front bus connectors offset Front bus connectors offset can be installed to connect very large busbars and compression lugs outside the termination area of a 3VA molded case circuit breaker. Front bus connectors offset increase the distance between pole centers of the terminals of the molded case circuit breaker. Distance between pole centers with front bus connectors offset: 3VA10 / 3VA11: 35 mm 3VA12 / 3VA20 / 3VA21 / 3VA22: 45 mm 3VA13 / 3VA14 / 3VA23 / 3VA24: 70 mm All front bus connectors offset are supplied as standard with phase barriers to provide insulation between individual phases. For further information, please refer to chapter Insulating measures (Page 246). An auxiliary connection can be implemented using a special control wire tap. For further information, please refer to chapter Auxiliary conductor terminal (Page 269). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 236 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system The table below provides an overview of the minimum sizes of cables and busbars which can be installed using front bus connectors offset. Front bus connectors offset can be ordered: as a pack of 3 as a pack of 4 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 237 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Bus connectors edgewise Bus connectors edgewise can be installed to connect large busbars and compression lugs outside the termination area of a 3VA molded case circuit breaker. The terminal of the breaker is turned by 90 when bus connectors edgewise are fitted. All bus connectors edgewise are supplied as standard with phase barriers to provide insulation between individual phases. For further information, please refer to chapter Insulating measures (Page 246). An auxiliary connection can be implemented using a special control wire tap. For further information, please refer to chapter Auxiliary conductor terminal (Page 269). The table below provides an overview of the minimum sizes of cables and busbars which can be installed using bus connectors edgewise. Bus connectors edgewise can be ordered: as a pack of 3 as a pack of 4 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 238 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 4.3.2.4 Rear busbar and cable lug connections The diagram below illustrates all the components available for implementing a busbar or compression lug connection on the rear panel of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. Connection technology Nut keeper kit, right-angled Rear connection stud round Rear connection stud flat Cables and busbars Busbars Flexible busbars Compression lugs 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 239 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Nut keeper kit, right-angled The right-angled nut keeper kit can be installed to connect busbars and compression lugs outside the termination area on the rear panel of a 3VA molded case circuit breaker. The terminal of the molded case circuit breaker is turned by 90 at right angles, allowing the busbar or compression lug to be connected at the rear. Note Right-angled nut keeper kits may only be connected to phases 1, 3 and 5 (top terminals) owing to the gases expelled by 3VA molded case circuit breakers. In addition, a box terminal can also be attached to the right-angled nut keeper kit allowing direct connection of a cable. All right-angled nut keeper kits are supplied as standard with phase barriers to provide insulation between individual phases (see chapter Insulating measures (Page 246)). An auxiliary connection can be implemented using a special control wire tap. For further information, please refer to chapter Auxiliary conductor terminal (Page 269). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 240 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system The table below provides an overview of the minimum sizes of cables and busbars which can be installed using the right-angled nut keeper kit. Right-angled nut keeper kits can be ordered: as a pack of 3 as a pack of 4 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 241 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Rear connection stud round The rear connection studs round can be installed to connect busbars and compression lugs to the rear panel of a 3VA molded case circuit breaker. The dimensions of rear connection studs are given in the table below: 1) Width across flats of the supplied lock nut 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 242 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Rear connection studs round can be ordered: as a pack of 3 (2 short connection studs and 1 long connection stud) as a pack of 4 (2 short studs and 2 long studs) as a pack of 1 (1 short connection stud) as a pack of 1 (1 long connection stud) Note In order to achieve degree of protection IP40, terminal covers (flat version) must also be attached when a rear connection stud round is installed. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 243 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Rear connection stud flat The rear connection stud flat can be installed to connect busbars and compression lugs to the rear panel of a 3VA molded case circuit breaker. The rear connection stud flat can be rotated in steps of 45, i.e. it can be installed at an angle of 0, 45 or 90: Note In order to achieve degree of protection IP40, terminal covers (flat version) must also be attached when a rear connection stud flat is installed. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 244 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system The dimensions of rear connection studs flat are stated in the table below: Rear connection studs flat can be ordered: as a pack of 3 (2 short connection studs flat and 1 long connection stud flat) as a pack of 4 (2 short connection studs flat and 2 long connection studs flat) as a pack of 1 (1 short connection stud flat) as a pack of 1 (1 long connection stud flat) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 245 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 4.3.3 Further connection accessories 4.3.3.1 Insulating measures The portfolio of connection accessories includes a broad range of insulating measures. The diagram below provides an overview of insulation accessories available for 3VA molded case circuit breakers. Terminal cover Terminal cover extended Terminal cover offset Insulating plate Insulating plate offset: Phase barriers 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 246 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Phase barriers Phase barriers provide insulation between the individual phases of the molded case circuit breaker. They are simply snapped into place on the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. Phase barriers can be used in combination with the insulating plate and the insulating plate offset. in order to provide additional insulation from the mounting plate. Phase barriers are compatible with: Box terminal Wire connector Front bus connectors extended (included in scope of supply) Front bus connectors offset (included in scope of supply) Bus connectors edgewise (included in scope of supply) Nut keeper kit, right-angled (included in scope of supply) Other insulation accessories: Insulating plate or insulating plate, offset Depending on the intended purpose of the phase barriers, they must be snapped into position in the direction indicated by the arrows below: Front connection Rear connection for right-angled nut keeper kit In combination with insulating plate 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 247 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Terminal cover, extended terminal cover, and offset terminal cover All terminal covers afford degree of protection IP40 at the front of the breaker and degree of protection IP20 at the infeed and load ends provided that they are correctly installed (cutting of grille structure). All terminal covers have a marking on the inside face which can be drilled through before the cover is installed. A voltage detector can be inserted through this hole to test for safe isolation. WARNING Reduced degree of protection If a hole is drilled through the terminal cover, degree of protection IP40 is no longer afforded. Suitable precautions must be taken to safeguard against any hazards posed by this loss of protection. Marking for holes Phase barriers can also be installed on all terminal covers in order to maintain the required clearances and creepage distances which might be reduced as a result of ionized gas following a short circuit. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 248 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Terminal cover The terminal cover is compatible with: Box terminals Wire connectors Nut keeper kits The terminal cover is simply snapped into place on 3VA1 breakers, or is snapped into place and secured with two screws on 3VA2 breakers. Terminal cover extended The terminal cover extended always consists of two parts: Rear insulating plate, provides insulation from the panel mounting plate Front half, pushed over the molded case circuit breaker from the front The insulating plate is fitted to the rear panel of the molded case circuit breaker and then secured by two screws to the front half of the terminal cover. The terminal cover extended is also secured by two additional screws to the molded case circuit breaker itself. The terminal cover extended is compatible with: Wire connectors, large (terminal cover extended included in scope of supply) Wire connectors, 2 cables (terminal cover extended included in scope of supply) Wire connectors, 6 cables (terminal cover extended included in scope of supply) Front bus connectors extended Bus connectors edgewise 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 249 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Terminal cover offset The terminal cover offset always consists of two parts: Rear insulating plate, provides insulation from the panel mounting plate Front half, pushed over the molded case circuit breaker from the front The insulating plate is fitted to the rear panel of the molded case circuit breaker and then secured by two screws to the front half of the terminal cover. The terminal cover offset is also secured by two additional screws to the molded case circuit breaker itself. The terminal cover offset is compatible with: Front bus connectors offset Insulating plate and insulating plate offset In certain cases it may be necessary to provide insulation from the panel mounting plate, see section "Insulation measures" in chapter Insulating measures (Page 246). The insulating plates for the 3VA molded case circuit breakers are designed for this purpose. The insulating plate is fitted to the rear panel of the molded case circuit breaker and can be installed in combination with phase barriers. Potential applications: Insulating plate: - Bus connectors extended - Non-insulated, straight conductors / terminals Insulating plate, offset: - Bus connectors offset 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 250 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Side plate for 3VA1 2-pole CAUTION Risk of injury A side plate must be fitted if the side surface at the handle end of a 2-pole 3VA1 breaker with current rating In > 100 A is freely accessible. For further information, please refer to Operating Instructions 3ZW1012-0VA10-2AA0. The article number of the side plate is 3VA9112-0SG20. DC insulating plate A DC insulating plate must be installed on 3-pole and 4-pole molded case circuit breakers for some applications: Ue > 415 V AC: For IT system applications and for entry of incoming feeder cables through the bottom panel of the circuit breaker with non-insulated mounting plate Ue > 250 V DC: with non-insulated mounting plate For further information, please refer to Operating Instructions 3ZW1012-0VA10-0AA0 The article numbers for the DC insulating plates are 3VA9113-0SG10 (3-pole) and 3VA91140SG10 (4-pole) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 251 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Insulating measures 1) The 3VA12 molded case circuit breaker requires a rear insulating plate in the case of infeed from below. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 252 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Insulation requirements for inputs/outputs of the molded case circuit breakers The insulation requirements are represented by letters in the tables below. These letters stand for the following insulation accessories: Legend for insulation measures of molded case circuit breakers 3VA10 to 3VA24 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 253 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Note All the insulation measures represent minimum requirements. Covers can be replaced with higher-quality covers: * Insulation measure A can be replaced with D and E * Insulation measure B can be replaced with D and F * Insulation measure E can be replaced with D * Insulation measure L can be replaced with K 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 254 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Insulation measures for 3VA11 molded case circuit breaker, 1-pole 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 255 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Insulation measures for 3VA10 / 3VA 11 molded case circuit breakers, 2-pole, 3-pole, 4-pole 1) Insulating plate 3VA911.-0SG10 must always be used with these systems. 2) This connection type is only permissible for terminals 1 / 3 / 5. 3) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 256 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 1) 2) Insulating plate 3VA911.-0SG10 must always be used with these systems. This connection type is only permissible for terminals 1 / 3 / 5. 3) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 257 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Insulation measures for 3VA12 molded case circuit breaker 1) This connection type is only permissible for terminals 1 / 3 / 5. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 258 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 1) This connection type is only permissible for terminals 1 / 3 / 5. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 259 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Insulation measures for 3VA13 and 3VA14 molded case circuit breakers 1) These terminals are only permissible for connections 1 / 3 / 5. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 260 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 1) These terminals are only permissible for connections 1 / 3 / 5. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 261 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Insulation measures for 3VA20, 3VA21 and 3VA22 molded case circuit breakers 1) This connection type is only permissible for terminals 1 / 3 / 5. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 262 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 1) This connection type is only permissible for terminals 1 / 3 / 5. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 263 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Insulation measures for 3VA23 and 3VA24 molded case circuit breakers 1) This connection type is only permissible for terminals 1 / 3 / 5. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 264 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 1) This connection type is only permissible for terminals 1 / 3 / 5. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 265 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Legend for insulation measures of 3VA25 molded case circuit breaker 1) Spare part, included in the scope of supply of the terminals below: * 2) 3) 3VA950.-0JB23 * 3VA950.-0JG23 * 3VA950.-0JB32 * 3VA950.-0JG32 Spare part, included in the scope of supply of the terminals below: * 3VA960.-0JJ43 * 3VA960.-0JC43 Included in the scope of supply of the circuit breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 266 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Insulation measures for 3VA25 molded case circuit breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 267 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Touch protection Insulated cables and busbars With insulated cables and busbars that have insulation that reaches inside the termination area of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker, the unit is classed as finger-safe (IP2X) if it is also equipped with a terminal cover. This protection is guaranteed only if the unit is installed and wired correctly. Non-insulated cables and busbars With non-insulated cables and busbars, and bus connectors extended or bus connectors offset, the unit is classed as finger-safe (IP2X) if it is also equipped with an extended or offset terminal cover. This protection is guaranteed only if the unit is installed and wired correctly. External wire connectors External wire connectors are supplied as standard with a terminal cover extended. The external wire connectors are classed as finger-safe (IP2X) on condition that the extended terminal cover is correctly installed. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 268 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system 4.3.3.2 Auxiliary conductor terminal A control wire tap can be implemented easily using components from the 3VA molded case circuit breaker equipment portfolio. 1) Maximum current carrying capacity 15 A Note A maximum current limit of 15 A applies to all control wire taps for 3VA molded case circuit breakers and must not be exceeded. The control wire tap must be taken into account when configuring the molded case circuit breaker. Suitable cable cross-sections: Cables up to a maximum of 2.5 mm2 can be connected. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 269 Accessories 4.3 Connection system All wire connectors can be ordered with control wire tap under a separate article number. The wire connector is then supplied with a hole for the control wire tap. A ring terminal can be installed in this hole. The screw required is supplied. Control wire tap for box terminal This control wire tap is inserted in the box terminal with the cable. The following connections can be selected for the control wire tap: Bare conductor Ring terminal Wire-end ferrule Cable lug (connector) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 270 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.3 Connection system Control wire tap for busbar connector This control wire tap is installed at the 3VA molded case circuit breaker with the busbar. It can also be installed using: Front bus connectors extended Front bus connectors offset Bus connectors edgewise Nut keeper kits, right-angled The following connections can be selected for the control wire tap: Bare conductor Ring terminal Wire-end ferrule Cable lug (connector) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 271 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology 4.4.1 Introduction With most applications, 3VA molded case circuit breakers are installed in a fixed position in switchboards or distribution boards. The breaker is normally secured by mounting screws directly to the mounting plate or other suitable supporting stays of the panel. The cables or busbars of the main circuits are connected directly to the 3VA molded case circuit breaker by various terminals or connectors. A rigid, permanent connection is thus created between the 3VA molded case circuit breaker and the panel. For certain applications, e.g. cyclic inspections or service, it must be possible to replace the 3VA molded case circuit breakers quickly. To meet this requirement, 3VA molded case circuit breakers can be converted to plug-in and draw-out units. The main differences between plug-in units and draw-out units are convenience of operation and the potential for functional expansion. Plug-in technology Plug-in technology is the less expensive and more space-saving of the two solutions. The 3VA molded case circuit breaker is inserted in the appropriate plug-in socket and fitted with plug-in contacts which make a keyed, friction-locked connection with the corresponding mating contacts (tulip-type contacts) in the plug-in socket. In this case, the device is plugged in and withdrawn manually. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 272 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Draw-out technology Like the plug-in versions, draw-out versions of 3VA molded case circuit breakers are equipped with plug-in contacts at the main current paths. In addition, side walls including guide and support bolts are bolted to the sides of the 3VA molded case circuit breakers. In this case, the mating contacts are in the draw-out socket. This is also equipped with a guide mechanism via which the molded case circuit breaker is moved into the draw-out socket by means of a crank handle in order to connect the breaker to the main circuits. The operator can clearly read from a position indicator whether the breaker is properly connected to the main circuits or is 100% safely isolated from them (so that it can be withdrawn). Cable connection With plug-in and draw-out circuit breakers, the cables or busbars are connected to the plugin socket or the draw-out socket. Here, the termination areas are implemented in the same way as for the molded case circuit breaker. That is, all the connection technology available for the 3VA molded case circuit breaker is also available in a similar way for the plug-in and draw-out sockets. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 273 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology 3VA plug-in and draw-out units Plug-in and draw-out technology as it is implemented in 3VA molded case circuit breakers is described below. But 3VA switch disconnectors in MCCB design can also be converted to plug-in or draw-out technology. The information given below therefore applies analogously to 3VA switch disconnectors. WARNING Formation of arcs between contacts and irreparable damage to circuit breakers and installation When the 3VA molded case circuit breaker is moved into or out of the socket when the main contacts are closed (breaker position ON), arcs can form between contacts and result in irreparable damage to the circuit breaker or the electrical installation, and possibly cause physical injury to personnel. Do not move the 3VA molded case circuit breaker into or out of the plug-in socket or the socket of the draw-out unit unless the main contacts are open, i.e. unless the breaker is in the OFF position. Before moving the molded case circuit breaker into or out of the socket, use the handle to switch it to the OFF position. In order to prevent operating errors, 3VA molded case circuit breakers are equipped with an autotrip plunger when they are converted to plug-in or drawout units. This plunger automatically trips the circuit breaker (breaker position TRIP) and thus opens the main contacts whenever an attempt is made to move a unit into or out of the socket when the breaker contacts are closed. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 274 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology 4.4.2 Overview of variants / products Installation overview 3-pole and 4-pole 3VA molded case circuit breakers are available in a version for fixed mounting, as a plug-in version and a draw-out version, as shown in the table below: Apart from the complete kit for plug-in or draw-out technology, a plug-in or draw-out "conversion kit" for the 3VA molded case circuit breaker can be ordered as a separate item. These conversion kits are used to prepare 3VA molded case circuit breakers in advance so that ready-assembled units are available at short notice in the event that a defective breaker needs to be replaced. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 275 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology 4.4.3 General information With plug-in and draw-out circuit breakers, the cables or busbars are connected to the plugin socket or the draw-out socket. The same socket unit is used for the same sizes of both variants. The incoming and outgoing feeder ends of the socket unit termination area is designed to match the relevant 3VA molded case circuit breaker. The major benefit of this design feature is that all terminal and connection variants of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker are fully compatible with the corresponding plug-in or draw-out unit. To facilitate the ordering process, the components used in combination with plug-in and draw-out units have been given separate article numbers. Furthermore, an optional terminal cover for the molded case circuit breaker can also be installed as a terminal cover over the plug-in socket or draw-out socket. The connection systems available for a 3VA rated current version and the sizes of cable or busbar cross section which are compatible with various connection types are described in detail in chapter Connection system (Page 211). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 276 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology 4.4.4 Information about installation, built-on and built-in components Securing plug-in and draw-out units to the mounting plate Bolts supplied with complete kit Supplied with each complete kit for plug-in or draw-out technology: 4 fastening bolts, metric thread, Phillips pan head The fastening bolts are used to attach the relevant socket unit to a mounting plate or supporting stay. Sets of fastening bolts can also be ordered separately as spare parts. Fastening bolts with an inch thread are also available. Mounting positions The permissible mounting positions are described in Chapter Permissible mounting positions and mounting positions with accessories (Page 60). See also Connection system (Page 211) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 277 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology 4.4.5 Plug-in technology 4.4.5.1 Product description Applications The plug-in versions of 3VA molded case circuit breakers are designed for use in complex applications for which speedy replacement of molded case circuit breakers is a basic requirement. Plug-in technology can be used, for example, when clear visual evidence of safe electrical isolation of circuits is essential, e.g. when overhaul work is in progress. Description With a plug-in system, the molded case circuit breaker is moved into and out of the plug-in socket manually. WARNING Risk of large magnetic forces in the event of short circuits Accident hazard posed by short circuit events. The molded case circuit breaker can be ejected from its socket by the resulting magnetic forces. The 3VA molded case circuit breaker must be bolted securely in position in the socket. The complete kit for plug-in technology contains assembly bolts for this purpose. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 278 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology A complete kit for plug-in technology contains all the components required to convert the fixed mounting version of a 3VA molded case circuit breaker or 3VA switch disconnector to a plug-in version. A complete kit for plug-in technology contains: Plug-in socket 4 mounting screws for installing the socket in the panel Mounting screws for fixing the molded case circuit breaker in the plug-in socket - 3-pole version: 2 mounting screws from the scope of supply of the plug-in unit and 2 mounting screws from the scope of supply of the molded case circuit breaker - 4-pole version: No additional mounting screws in the scope of supply of the plug-in unit 4 mounting screws from the scope of supply of the molded case circuit breaker Plug-in contacts for attachment to the main terminals of the molded case circuit breaker - 3-pole: 6 plug-in contacts - 4-pole: 8 plug-in contacts Autotrip plunger, labeled "Plug-in" 2 screw-mounted terminal covers for the molded case circuit breaker Cable cages (see chapter Cable cage (Page 306)) A conversion kit for plug-in technology contains: Plug-in contacts for attachment to the main terminals of the molded case circuit breaker - 3-pole: 6 plug-in contacts - 4-pole: 8 plug-in contacts Autotrip plunger, labeled "Plug-in" 2 screw-mounted terminal covers for the molded case circuit breaker Cable cages (see chapter Cable cage (Page 306)) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 279 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Scope of supply of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker and the 3VA switch disconnector in molded case circuit breaker design: For 3-pole version up to 250 A: 2 assembly bolts For 3-pole version up to 630 A: 4 assembly bolts For 4-pole version up to 630 A: 4 assembly bolts Plug-in contacts for attachment to the main terminals of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker 3VA molded case circuit breaker Screw-mounted terminal cover for the molded case circuit breaker Autotrip plunger 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 280 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Terminal covers As described above, two screw-mounted terminal covers are included in the plug-in socket complete kit and the plug-in socket conversion kit. These feature molded grips to ease withdrawal of the molded case circuit breaker from its socket. Since it requires significant force to remove a molded case circuit breaker from its socket, the plug-in terminal covers are bolted to the contact unit. If the termination area of the plug-in socket needs to be protected by terminal covers, a variety of models of terminal cover are available to order as options for this purpose. Autotrip plunger An autotrip plunger is supplied as standard with every complete kit and every conversion kit for converting a 3VA molded case circuit breaker to plug-in technology. The plunger performs safety functions in operation. When a 3VA molded case circuit breaker is converted to a 3VA plug-in unit, this plunger is installed from the rear of the device and latched. The plunger performs safety functions in operation. It prevents the molded case circuit breaker from being switched to the ON position if the breaker is not correctly bolted to the socket. For further information, see also section "Signal 'Plug-in unit - MCCB correctly bolted to plug-in socket'" in chapter Position signaling switches (Page 295). WARNING Make sure that the autotrip plunger is correctly installed The molded case circuit breaker cannot be safely moved into or out of the socket without an autotrip plunger. Insertion and removal in switched-on state (circuit breaker position ON) can lead to formation of arcs between contacts and can result in irreparable damage to the breaker and electrical installation as well as physical injuries. Once installed, the autotrip plunger cannot be dismantled again! Note the color coding and labels for the autotrip plunger: * Plug-in technology: Black, labeled "Plug-in" * Draw-out technology: Grey, labeled "Draw-out" 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 281 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Auxiliary circuit connectors Molded case circuit breakers or switch disconnectors in molded case circuit breaker design are frequently equipped with internal accessories, e.g. with an auxiliary switch and auxiliary release. A broad range of internal accessory components is also available for the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. For further information, please refer to chapter Internal accessories (Page 191). To ensure that the electrical connections required by plug-in units can be quickly and safely disconnected, auxiliary circuit connectors can be installed. The part of the auxiliary circuit connectors on the circuit breaker side is mounted on the underside of the molded case circuit breaker using the cable cages and is electrically connected to the internal accessories. Appropriate openings and cable ducts are provided in the molded case circuit breaker for routing stranded wires. The plug-in socket half of the auxiliary circuit connector is inserted in the socket and electrically connected to the customer's installation. When the molded case circuit breaker is inserted into the plug-in socket, the internal accessories in the breaker are quickly connected to the customer's installation without the use of tools. Note Plug-in and draw-out units use different versions of the auxiliary circuit connector. The drawout version has a longer, movable telescopic rail because the distance to be bridged in the draw-out socket is longer. Further details about auxiliary circuit connectors can be found in chapter Auxiliary circuit connector (Page 301). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 282 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Position signaling in the plug-in socket Several position signaling switches (number depends on socket size) can be fitted in the plug-in socket. Auxiliary switches are capable of signaling "Plug-in unit - MCCB correctly bolted to plug-in socket" via electrical connections. For further information, please refer to chapter Position signaling switches (Page 295). Padlocks for preventing insertion of a molded case circuit breaker The socket unit can be locked with padlocks to prevent unauthorized insertion of a molded case circuit breaker during service calls and inspections. Using these locks to prevent insertion and operation of a molded case circuit breaker helps to protect personnel and the installation itself. The socket unit of the plug-in socket is equipped with three openings for padlocks. Openings for padlocks: Up to three padlocks Shackle diameter 6 mm to 8 mm / 0.25" to 0.31" 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 283 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Benefits of plug-in technology Defective molded case circuit breakers can be replaced quickly and easily Clear visual evidence of safe electrical isolation of main circuits Remote signaling of molded case circuit breaker positions: - "INSERTED": The 3VA molded case circuit breaker is properly inserted and bolted to the socket - "WITHDRAWN": The bolts have been removed and the 3VA molded case circuit breaker removed Plug-in socket can be locked by padlocks to prevent insertion of a molded case circuit breaker Degree of protection IP20 at all termination points No grounding required See also Locking and interlocking (Page 360) 4.4.5.2 Combination with other accessories 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 284 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology 4.4.6 Draw-out technology 4.4.6.1 Product description Typical applications for draw-out versions of 3VA molded case circuit breakers are installations in which inspections and overhauls need to be carried out at regular intervals and, for reasons of safety, clear visual evidence of safe electrical isolation of plant sections must be provided at short notice so that work can commence. Draw-out versions of 3VA molded case circuit breakers are also suitable for applications which require that molded case circuit breakers or switch disconnectors can be replaced very rapidly when necessary. In the draw-out version, the 3VA molded case circuit breaker is supported by the side walls of the draw-out unit and can be moved into three defined positions by rotation of a crank handle. The current breaker position is indicated by the breaker status indicator. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 285 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Defined positions CONNECT position: The molded case circuit breaker is connected to the main circuits. The auxiliary circuits are also electrically connected to the installation via the auxiliary circuit connectors. This is the normal operating position of the molded case circuit breaker. TEST position: The main circuits are not connected to the installation. The auxiliary circuits are connected to the installation via auxiliary circuit connectors. The auxiliary circuits can be function-tested with the breaker in the TEST position even when the installation itself is not live. DISCON position: Neither the main circuits nor the auxiliary circuits are connected to the installation. The molded case circuit breaker is electrically isolated. If the molded case circuit breaker is not in any of these defined positions, the breaker status indicator displays the word UNBLOCK on a white background. When the breaker is in this position, its main contacts cannot be closed if the autotrip plunger is correctly installed (see below). Move the molded case circuit breaker into a defined position NOTICE Gear damage The following operations will lead to irreparable damage of the draw-out socket gear: * Molded case circuit breaker is in DISCONNECT position: Insertion of the crank handle (position indicator changes to UNBLOCK) and counterclockwise turning of the crank handle toward DISCONNECT. * Molded case circuit breaker is in CONNECT position: Insertion of the crank handle (position indicator changes to UNBLOCK) and clockwise turning of the crank handle toward CONNECT. In the situations described above, pay attention not to turn the crank handle in the indicated direction. Note If the breaker status indication is CONNECT, TEST or DISCON, the sliding clutch of the crank gear is engaged and rotation of the crank handle has no effect. By removing and reinserting the crank handle, it is possible to disengage the gear. The breaker status indicator will then show UNBLOCK. The molded case circuit breaker can now be moved to a new position. 1. If the crank handle is inserted in the crankcase, pull it out. 2. Insert the crank handle into the crankcase again. By removing and reinserting the crank handle, it is possible to disengage the gear. 3. Turn the crank handle until the breaker status indication shows the required position. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 286 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Remove the molded case circuit breaker NOTICE Gear damage The following operations will lead to irreparable damage of the draw-out socket gear: * Molded case circuit breaker is in DISCONNECT position: Insertion of the crank handle (position indicator changes to UNBLOCK) and counterclockwise turning of the crank handle toward DISCONNECT. * Molded case circuit breaker is in CONNECT position: Insertion of the crank handle (position indicator changes to UNBLOCK) and clockwise turning of the crank handle toward CONNECT. In the situations described above, pay attention not to turn the crank handle in the indicated direction. 1. Move the molded case circuit breaker into the DISCON position. The molded case circuit breaker is electrically isolated. 2. To disengage the lock, press the safety lock slide underneath the breaker status indication downwards as indicated by the arrow. 3. Remove the molded case circuit breaker. Components of a complete kit for draw-out technology A complete kit for draw-out technology contains all the components required to convert the fixed mounting version of a molded case circuit breaker or switch disconnector to a draw-out version. Draw-out socket including side walls with the mechanical components required to guide the molded case circuit breaker into and out of the socket under the control of a crank handle 4 mounting screws for installing the socket in the panel Plug-in contacts for attachment to the main terminals of the molded case circuit breaker - 3-pole: 6 plug-in contacts - 4-pole: 8 connectors Side walls with guide bolts for mounting on the molded case circuit breaker Autotrip plunger, labeled "Draw-out" 2 screw-mounted terminal covers for the molded case circuit breaker Cable cage (see chapter Cable cage (Page 306)) Note Information about the crank handle The crank handle is not supplied as part of the complete kit and must be ordered separately. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 287 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Components of a conversion kit for draw-out technology Plug-in contacts for attachment to the main terminals of the molded case circuit breaker - 3-pole: 6 plug-in contacts - 4-pole: 8 plug-in contacts Side walls with guide bolts for mounting on the molded case circuit breaker Autotrip plunger, labeled "Draw-out" 2 screw-mounted terminal covers for the molded case circuit breaker Plug-in contacts for attachment to the main terminals of the molded case circuit breaker Side walls with guide bolts for mounting on the molded case circuit breaker Screw-mounted terminal cover for the molded case circuit breaker Autotrip plunger 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 288 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Installation instructions The draw-out socket is permanently mounted in the panel by means of the mounting screws included in the complete kit for draw-out technology. The molded case circuit breaker / switch disconnector in molded case circuit breaker design is supplied with two assembly bolts (3-pole version) or four assembly bolts (4-pole version). These bolts are not required if the device is to be converted to a draw-out unit. Terminal cover Two terminal covers are included in the scope of supply of the complete kit for draw-out technology and the conversion kit for draw-out technology for the molded case circuit breaker. These two terminal covers are intended for installation over the molded case circuit breaker. If terminal covers are to be attached to the busbars of the draw-out socket, they must be ordered separately, see chapter Insulating measures (Page 246). Autotrip plunger An autotrip plunger is supplied as standard with every complete kit and every conversion kit for converting a molded case circuit breaker to draw-out technology. WARNING Make sure that the autotrip plunger is correctly installed The molded case circuit breaker cannot be safely moved into or out of the socket without an autotrip plunger. Moving it into or out of the socket when the main contacts are closed (breaker position ON) can cause arcs to form between contacts and result in irreparable damage to the circuit breaker or the electrical installation, and possibly cause physical injury to personnel. Once installed, the autotrip plunger cannot be dismantled again! Note the color coding and labels for the autotrip plunger: * Plug-in technology: Black, labeled "Plug-in" * Draw-out technology: Grey, labeled "Draw-out" When a molded case circuit breaker is converted to a molded case circuit breaker for drawout technology, the autotrip plunger is installed from the rear of the device and latched. The plunger performs various safety functions in operation: It prevents closure of the main contacts of the molded case circuit breaker when the breaker is inserted in the draw-out socket and in an undefined position (breaker status indication is UNBLOCK). It allows the breaker to be closed in the defined positions TEST and CONNECT. It trips the molded case circuit breaker (TRIP) when the breaker's main contacts are closed (switching position ON) and an attempt is made to move the breaker out of one of the three defined positions CONNECT, TEST or DISCON using the crank handle. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 289 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Auxiliary circuit connectors 3VA molded case circuit breakers or 3VA switch disconnectors are frequently equipped with internal accessories, e.g. auxiliary switches and auxiliary releases. A broad range of internal accessory components is also available for the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. For further information, please refer to chapter Internal accessories (Page 191). To ensure that the electrical connections required by draw-out units can be quickly and safely disconnected, auxiliary circuit connectors can be installed. The part of the auxiliary circuit connectors on the circuit breaker side is mounted on the underside of the molded case circuit breaker using the cable cages and is electrically connected to the internal accessories. Appropriate openings and cable ducts are provided in the 3VA molded case circuit breaker for routing stranded wires. The socket-end half of the auxiliary circuit connector with the movable telescopic rail is inserted in the socket and electrically connected to the customer's installation. When the molded case circuit breaker is inserted into the draw-out unit, an electrical connection between the internal accessories in the breaker and the customer's installation is quickly established. Note Plug-in and draw-out units use different versions of the auxiliary circuit connector. The draw-out version has a longer, movable telescopic rail because the distance to be bridged in the draw-out socket is longer. Further details about auxiliary circuit connectors can be found in chapter Auxiliary circuit connector (Page 301). Position signaling in the draw-out socket Several position signaling switches (number depends on socket size) can be installed in the right-hand side wall of the draw-out socket. These auxiliary switches are capable of signaling breaker positions DISCON, TEST and CONNECT. The auxiliary switches also output a position indication signal if the molded case circuit breaker in the draw-out socket is not in one of the positions specified above. For information, please refer to chapter Position signaling switches (Page 295). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 290 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Protection against unauthorized operation of molded case circuit breaker Padlocks for protection against unauthorized operation To provide protection against unauthorized operation of the molded case circuit breaker, padlocks can be inserted through the plastic frame opening of the padlock locking unit on the right side wall of the draw-out socket. The plastic frame is simple to pull out. The crank handle opening is mechanically sealed when the plastic frame is in the OUT position. Openings for padlocks in plastic frame: Up to three padlocks Shackle diameter 6 mm to 8 mm / 0.25" to 0.31" Attach padlocks 1. Move the molded case circuit breaker into the CONNECT, TEST or DISCON position. The breaker must be in one of these positions before the plastic frame can be pulled out. 2. Pull out the plastic frame. The crank handle opening is sealed off. 3. Insert padlock shackles through the plastic frame and lock padlocks as illustrated above. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 291 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Cylinder lock for protection against unauthorized operation A cylinder lock can be retrofitted in the right-hand side wall of the draw-out socket. Like the plastic frame and padlocks, this cylinder lock is capable of locking a molded case circuit breaker in either the CONNECT, TEST or DISCON position. The cylinder lock utilizes the locking mechanism of the plastic frame. This is evident from the way the plastic frame moves into or out of the socket as the cylinder lock is turned. Signaling of locked/unlocked status The locked or unlocked status of a draw-out unit can be signaled electrically. This requires the installation of a position signaling switch (3VA9987-0KB00) in the right-hand side wall of the draw-out socket. This switch signals whether the plastic frame described above is in the "IN" or "OUT" position. For further details, refer to chapter Position signaling switches (Page 295). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 292 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Integration of molded case circuit breaker position signal into a communication network By means of the COM100 and COM800 breaker data servers, various statuses of multiple molded case circuit breakers can be queried and passed on by bus systems. This includes messages such as "Breaker tripped", "Breaker on", "Breaker off", reason for tripping. Depending on the version of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker, actual current and voltage measurements can also be passed on. To provide this communications capability, the molded case circuit breaker itself is equipped with a COM060 communication module which functions as the breaker's actual communications interface. In addition to the status information listed above, the position of the molded case circuit breaker in the draw-out unit can also be transferred. For this purpose, the molded case circuit breaker and the draw-out socket must be equipped with the communications interface for the draw-out unit. This kit allows the position of the molded case circuit breaker in the draw-out unit to be picked up and transferred to the COM060 communication module and from there to the higher-level communication network. For further information about the communication kit for draw-out units, please refer to chapter Communications interface for draw-out unit (Page 300). Operation through the panel door The molded case circuit breaker can be optionally installed in the panel in such a way that the breaker can be operated even when the panel door is closed. Draw-out versions of molded case circuit breakers can then be switched on or off when the panel door is not open. This is made possible by a cutout in the panel door which allows access to the main control elements, i.e the handle and the <PUSH TO TRIP> button of the molded case circuit breaker, but prohibits access to other live components inside the panel. This solution is referred to as a "door feedthrough". Door feedthroughs are mounted on the front of the molded case circuit breaker and securely attached to the breaker by means of two bolts and a latch. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 293 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology The door cutout must be positioned such that it is flush with the door feedthrough. It must also be positioned in such a way as to minimize the size of the gap between the feedthrough walls and the cutout. A cover frame can be fitted as well in order to obtain an optimum finish. An opening in the panel through which the crank handle can be inserted must be provided in addition to the cutout for the door feedthrough. With its straight sides, the door feedthrough is designed to allow the molded case circuit breaker to be moved through positions DISCON, TEST and CONNECT, while at the same time providing a permanently tight seal around the feedthrough area (degree of protection IP30) and preventing access to live components inside the panel. Markings are visible on the door feedthrough to help the user identify the current position of the molded case circuit breaker as it is moved into or out of the panel. Since mounting dimensions may vary slightly, however, these markings should be regarded as a rough guide only. The crank handle mechanism provides the user with feedback information about the molded case circuit breaker position, e.g. whether it has been correctly inserted. Benefits of draw-out technology Defective molded case circuit breakers can be replaced quickly and easily Clear visual evidence of safe electrical isolation of main circuits Molded case circuit breaker and accessories can be function-tested in the TEST position Remote signaling of molded case circuit breaker positions CONNECT, TEST and DISCON Padlocks and / or cylinder locks can be used to lock draw-out unit so that the molded case circuit breaker cannot be inserted or removed by unauthorized persons Molded case circuit breaker can be operated through the panel door Degree of protection IP20 at all termination points No grounding required See also Locking and interlocking (Page 360) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 294 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology 4.4.6.2 Combination with other accessories See also Locking and interlocking (Page 360) 4.4.7 Accessories for plug-in and draw-out units 4.4.7.1 Description of individual product variants Position signaling switches These auxiliary switches are capable of signaling a variety of states via electrical connections. The position signaling switch is available in only one version. Applications: Signal "Position of breaker in the draw-out unit" Signal "Draw-out unit locked / open" Signal "Plug-in unit - MCCB correctly bolted to plug-in socket" The position signaling switches are changeover switches, i.e. they have three connections: NO contact NC contact Common potential contact 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 295 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Signal "Position of molded case circuit breaker in the draw-out unit" Up to three position signaling switches can be integrated in the draw-out unit in order to transmit breaker position information to monitoring and control systems. They are installed in the right-hand side wall of the unit at the positions indicated in the diagram below: 41a or 41b: Detects position CONNECT 42a or 42b: Detects position TEST 43a or 43b: Detects position DISCON Signal "Position of molded case circuit breaker in the draw-out unit" It is irrelevant whether the position signaling switch is inserted in slot a or b. Only one position signaling switch per position is usually installed. The remaining free slots can be used for the signaling switches of the communication link kit or for an additional position signaling switch. If the molded case circuit breaker in the draw-out unit is moved into a defined position with the crank handle, the corresponding position signaling switch outputs a signal that can be further used electrically, e.g. for visual or acoustic alarm indications. If the molded case circuit breaker is not in any of the defined positions, the breaker status indicator displays the word UNBLOCK on a white background. In this position, the molded case circuit breaker is either off (position OFF, contacts open) or tripped (position TRIP, contacts open). The breaker main contacts cannot be closed with the breaker in the UNBLOCK state. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 296 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Depending on the position of the molded case circuit breaker in the draw-out unit, the outputs of the position signaling switches assume one of the following states: Signal "Draw-out unit locked / open" Slot for position signaling switch for signal "Draw-out unit locked / open" Plastic frame for padlock locking unit 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 297 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Signal "Draw-out unit locked / open" A position signaling switch to transmit this signal is installed in position 44 of the right-hand side wall of the draw-out unit. A position signaling switch in position 44 outputs a signal which indicates whether the padlock locking unit is in the OUT position, thereby locking the draw-out unit. The draw-out unit can be locked in the defined breaker positions CONNECT, TEST and DISCON by padlocks or a cylinder lock (available as retrofit component). The position of the molded case circuit breaker cannot be changed when the draw-out is locked. In the locked state, the opening for the crank handle is mechanically sealed and the handle cannot be inserted. To lock the unit using padlocks, the padlock locking unit on the draw-out unit must be pulled out manually so that the shackles of the padlocks can be inserted through the opening. When the draw-out unit is locked by the cylinder lock, the padlock locking unit moves out automatically as the cylinder lock is turned because it is mechanically coupled with the cylinder lock in the draw-out unit. The position of the padlock locking unit ultimately determines the position of the contacts of the position signaling switch. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 298 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Signal "Plug-in unit - MCCB correctly bolted to plug-in socket" This option is provided for plug-in units only. Depending on the socket size, up to two position signaling switches can be installed in slot No. 46. Slot 46 for position signaling switch of the plug-in socket Slot 46 for position signaling switch of the plug-in socket Mechanical system for actuation of position signaling switches when the bolt is tightened Bolt hole which determines the signal output by the position signaling switches With this application, the position signaling switches indicate whether the molded case circuit breaker is inserted in the plug-in socket and secured by at least one bolt. The reason for this application is that the molded case circuit breaker needs to be secured in position by mounting screws in the plug-in socket. The four mounting screws supplied with the complete kit for plug-in technology must be used for this purpose. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 299 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Communications interface for draw-out unit The pre-assembled cable set which functions as the communications interface for the drawout unit consists of a pre-assembled cable with a mini USB port at one end and three special position signaling switches at the other. It is also supplied with another cable with mini USB connector and tab connector. Attaching the cable set 1. Insert the three position signaling switches of the cable set in the right-hand side wall according to the color coding of the cables, see diagram below. It is irrelevant whether the switches are inserted in slots a or b. CONNECT: Position signaling switch with green cables TEST: Position signaling switch with blue cables DISCON: Position signaling switch with red cables The remaining slots are normally used to install standard position signaling switches. 2. Remove the seal over the opening for the micro USB port on the right-hand side wall. 3. Insert the USB connector attached to the cable set into the micro USB port in the righthand side wall. 4. Store the cable in the space available behind the side wall. 5. Connect the position signaling switches and the COM060 communication module to the USB connector and tab connector of the second cable. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 300 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology The cable with pre-assembled USB and tab connectors can also be ordered as an individual item for installation on molded case circuit breakers prepared for use as draw-out units. For detailed instructions on how to install the communications interface for the draw-out unit, please refer to the relevant Operating Instructions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/80597324). For instructions on how to read out data via remote data transfer, refer to the operating instructions for the COM100/COM800 breaker data server. Auxiliary circuit connector Plug-in technology Draw-out technology Auxiliary circuit connectors are required only if the molded case circuit breaker to be converted to plug-in or draw-out technology is equipped with internal accessories. Plug-in units use a different design of auxiliary circuit connector than draw-out units. The number of auxiliary circuit connectors required depends on the accessories to be installed in the molded case circuit breaker and ultimately on the number of electrical connections which need to be brought out of the molded case circuit breaker. Each auxiliary circuit connector can be used to connect up to four cables. Accordingly, the breaker-end and socket-end halves of the auxiliary circuit connectors have four screw-type terminals which are labeled ".1" to ".4". 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 301 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology A total of nine auxiliary circuit connectors can be installed depending on the size of the molded case circuit breaker and the size of the plug-in or draw-out socket. The slots for auxiliary circuit connectors are labeled from right to left in the socket, starting at 1. Socket-end auxiliary circuit connector Breaker-end auxiliary circuit connector Cable cage Cable cages are used to attach the breaker-end half of the auxiliary circuit connector to the underside of the molded case circuit breaker. Slot numbers are also printed on the cable cages. The design of the cable cages for the top and bottom halves of the molded case circuit breaker is different so that the cages cannot be mixed up or installed in the wrong position. The fixing tongues of the breaker-end half of the auxiliary circuit connectors latch into small recesses in the cable cages which are screw-mounted to the rear panel of the circuit breaker. The auxiliary circuit connectors are securely fixed once the cable cages have been installed. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 302 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Fixing tongue (breaker end) Fixing hook (socket end) Latching element (socket end) The socket-end half of the auxiliary circuit connectors is simply snapped into the socket. Various cable routing openings and ducts are provided in the socket and the molded case circuit breaker. For further details, please refer to the operating instructions for the complete kits for plug-in or draw-out technology. See also Cable cage (Page 306) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 303 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Door feedthrough Door feedthroughs must be installed for applications which require direct operation of a molded case circuit breaker even when the panel door is closed, the draw-out version of a molded case circuit breaker to be electrically isolated from or connected to the installation while the panel door is closed, prevention of access to live components inside the panel. Door feedthroughs are mounted over the front of the molded case circuit breaker and securely attached to the breaker by means of two bolts and a latch. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 304 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Terminal cover for a molded case circuit breaker converted to plug-in or draw-out technology Terminal cover with molded grips, can be screwed to contact unit Terminal cover for covering the termination area Two screw-mounted terminal covers are included in the scope of supply of the complete kits and the conversion kits for plug-in and draw-out technology. These feature molded grips to ease withdrawal of the molded case circuit breaker from its socket. Since it requires significant force to remove a molded case circuit breaker from its socket, the plug-in terminal covers are bolted to the contact unit. These terminal covers can be ordered separately as spare parts. The additionally available terminal covers are used for the plug-in technology as well as the draw-out technology for covering the terminal area. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 305 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology Cable cage Cable cages are used to attach the breaker-end half of auxiliary circuit connectors to the molded case circuit breaker. They are also designed to act as cable ducts for installing wires from internal accessories to the auxiliary circuit connector. For further information about cable cages, please refer to chapter Auxiliary circuit connector (Page 301). Cable cages consist of a top half and a bottom half. These parts are designed such that they cannot be mounted in the wrong position at the rear of the molded case circuit breaker. Cable cages are included in the scope of supply of the conversion kits and complete kits for converting molded case circuit breakers to plug-in or draw-out units and are therefore also supplied with complete kits. They are available as standard only in the broadened version for 4-pole units. For use on 3-pole units, part of the cable cage need only be cut away (at the required breaking point). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 306 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology 4.4.7.2 Overview of technical specifications Technical specifications of the accessories for internal components of molded case circuit breakers in plug-in and draw-out technology: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 307 Accessories 4.4 Plug-in and draw-out technology 4.4.7.3 Combination with other accessories Information about combination with other accessories The communications interface for the draw-out unit and the switches for signaling the position of the molded case circuit breaker in the draw-out unit are mutually compatible. For further information, please refer to the following chapters: Position signaling switches (Page 295) Communications interface for draw-out unit (Page 300) The switches for signaling whether or not the molded case circuit breaker is locked have no influence on other accessories described in chapter Position signaling switches (Page 295) Note No transfer of "locked / not locked" signals The information "locked / not locked" cannot be transferred via the COM060 communication module. A molded case circuit breaker which requires a communications interface to transfer signals must be equipped with a COM060 communication module. When internal accessories are integrated in a molded case circuit breaker, auxiliary circuit connectors and cable cages for plug-in and draw-out technology must also be installed. Door feedthroughs are required only if the molded case circuit breaker needs to be operated when the cubicle door is closed. The door feedthrough is compatible with position signaling switches, communications interface and auxiliary circuit connectors with cable cages. The terminal cover for plug-in technology can be installed in combination with any other internal accessories. It does not have any effect on other accessories. A variable depth adapter (see section Door mounted rotary operator (Page 316)) can be used in conjunction with the door mounted rotary operator in order to compensate the racking distance and so allow the molded case circuit breaker to be moved out when the cubicle door is closed. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 308 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators 4.5 Manual operators The manual operators for 3VA molded case circuit breakers are described in this chapter. Overview of manual operators The manual operators available for 3VA molded case circuit breaker are listed below: Front mounted rotary operator (optionally with door interlock) Door mounted rotary operator - Fixing bracket for long shafts - Variable depth adapter for draw-out units - Supplementary handle for door mounted rotary operator Side wall mounted rotary operator (optionally with mounting plate) The following accessories are available for all manual operators: Illumination kit Cylinder locks for locking, blocking and interlocking 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 309 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators 4.5.1 Opening, closing and resetting the 3VA molded case circuit breaker Opening and closing To close the 3VA molded case circuit breaker: Turn the manual operator to the ON (I) position. To open the 3VA molded case circuit breaker: Turn the manual operator to the OFF (O) position. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 310 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators Resetting the manual operator after the molded case circuit breaker has tripped When the molded case circuit breaker trips, the manual operator moves automatically from the ON (I) to the TRIP position. The molded case circuit breaker remains in the tripped state until the manual operator is reset: 1. Clear the fault which has caused the molded case circuit breaker to trip. 2. Turn the manual operator counter-clockwise to the limit stop (RESET position, at or just past OFF (O)). The manual operator remains in the OFF (O) position. 3. Turn the manual operator to the ON (I) position. The molded case circuit breaker is closed again. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 311 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators 4.5.2 Front mounted rotary operator The front mounted rotary operator is available in two versions: With door interlock Without door interlock Front mounted rotary operator with door interlock Front mounted rotary operator without door interlock Device for up to 3 padlocks Door contact (door interlock element) Cylinder lock device Indication of the breaker status (on, off, trip) (see below) Handle with mechanism for up to 3 padlocks Trip unit button <PUSH TO TRIP> Defeat function (door interlock element) Door interlock 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 312 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators Indication of the breaker status on front mounted rotary operator ON: Breaker closed TRIP: Breaker tripped OFF: Breaker open RESET: Reset following a trip Mounting position 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 313 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators Front mounted rotary operator with door interlock The front mounted rotary operator with door interlock projects through the panel door. This arrangement ensures that the molded case circuit breaker can be switched on only when the panel door is closed. The door is locked automatically when the front mounted rotary operator is turned to position ON (I). Overriding the door interlock The door interlock can be overridden by a deliberate action. This means that the door can be opened with the operator in position ON (I), e.g. so that maintenance can be carried out. Door position switch Door interlock Defeat function Procedure 1. Press the door interlocking pin with a sharp object. 2. Hold the pin down while the door is opened. Switch on the circuit breaker with the panel door open The door contact must be operated manually in order to switch on the molded case circuit breaker with the panel door open. The handle can then be moved to the ON (I) position. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 314 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators Testing the tripping mechanism The button <PUSH TO TRIP> can be pressed to perform a function test on the tripping mechanism. Procedure 1. Turn the front mounted rotary operator to position ON (I) in order to close the molded case circuit breaker. 2. Press the button <PUSH TO TRIP> with a tool such as a screwdriver. The front mounted rotary operator moves from position ON (I) to position TRIP. The molded case circuit breaker is now in the tripped state. 3. Turn the front mounted rotary operator counter-clockwise to the limit stop (RESET position, at or just past OFF (O)). The front mounted rotary operator remains in the OFF (O) position and the molded case circuit breaker can now be closed again. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 315 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators 4.5.3 Door mounted rotary operator With the door mounted rotary operator installed, it is possible to operate the molded case circuit breaker through the panel door without opening the door. Door mounted rotary operator Handle with device for up to 3 padlocks Indication of the breaker status ON, TRIP, mounting position, OFF, RESET For mounting position, see chapter Front mounted rotary operator (Page 312) Tolerance compensation Device for up to 3 padlocks Cylinder lock device (type Ronis) Trip unit button <PUSH TO TRIP> 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 316 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators Door interlock with door mounted rotary operator The door interlock of the door mounted rotary operator locks the door as soon as the door mounted rotary operator is turned to position ON (I). Overriding the door interlock The door interlock can be overridden by a deliberate action. This means that the door can be opened with the operator in position ON (I), e.g. so that maintenance can be carried out. The door interlock can also be completely deactivated by a small modification on the inside of the handle. The panel door can then also be opened at any time without additional measures if the circuit breaker is switched on (position ON). For details, see the Operating Instructions (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/80600132). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 317 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators Procedure 1. Press the door interlocking pin with a sharp object. 2. Hold the pin down while the door is opened. See also (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/80600132) Tolerance compensator Door mounted rotary operators are supplied as standard with a tolerance compensator. This device compensates any potential minor offset between the rotary switch of the cubicle doors and the shaft of the door mounted rotary operator. Tolerance compensator 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 318 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators Offset compensator Testing the tripping mechanism The button <PUSH TO TRIP> can be pressed to perform a function test on the tripping mechanism. Procedure 1. Turn the door mounted rotary operator to the OFF (O) position. 2. Open the panel door. 3. Use a tool to turn the shaft to the ON (I) position in order to close the molded case circuit breaker. Alternatively, the supplementary handle for the door mounted rotary operator can also be used to close the breaker. 4. Press the button <PUSH TO TRIP> with a tool such as a screwdriver. The door mounted rotary operator moves from position ON (I) to position TRIP. The molded case circuit breaker is now in the tripped state. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 319 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators 5. Turn the door mounted rotary operator counter-clockwise to the limit stop (RESET position, just beyond OFF (O)). The manual operator remains in the OFF (O) position. 6. Close the panel door. The molded case circuit breaker can now be closed again. Supplementary handle for door mounted rotary operator The supplementary handle can be used to operate the molded case circuit breaker when the cubicle door is open. Use the supplementary handle to close the molded case circuit breaker: A deliberate action is required to turn the molded case circuit breaker to the ON (I) position: 1. Push in the supplementary handle. 2. Turn the supplementary handle to the ON (I) position in order to close the molded case circuit breaker. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 320 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators Variable depth adapter The variable depth adapter enables adjustment of the travel distance Connect - Test Disconnect when using draw-out technology. As a result, the panel door does not have to be opened in the Connect, Test and Disconnect positions. See also chapter Draw-out technology (Page 285) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 321 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators 4.5.4 Side wall mounted rotary operator The side wall mounted rotary operator allows the molded case circuit breaker to be operated through the right-hand or left-hand side wall of the cubicle. Side wall mounted rotary operator Handle with device for up to 3 padlocks Side wall of cubicle Device for up to 3 padlocks Device for cylinder lock Trip unit button <PUSH TO TRIP> Switching position indicator ON, TRIP, mounting position, OFF, RESET For mounting position, see chapter Front mounted rotary operator (Page 312) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 322 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators Side wall mounted rotary operator with mounting plate The side wall mounted rotary operator is available in a version with mounting plate for molded case circuit breakers up to 250 A. The mounting plate can be installed on the righthand or left-hand side panel. The space on the mounting plate can be used to install other components. If there is insufficient space available on the mounting plate to install terminals, a terminal plate can be bolted to the cubicle. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 323 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators 4.5.5 Locking and interlocking for manual operators The following accessories for locking, blocking and interlocking are used: Locking at the handle Locking, blocking and interlocking at the rotary operator 4.5.5.1 Locking by the handle The following manual operators can be locked by the handle: Front mounted rotary operator Door mounted rotary operator Side wall mounted rotary operator Up to three padlocks with a shackle diameter of between 5 and 8 mm can be used to lock the rotary operators. Padlocks are not included in the scope of supply. Front mounted rotary operator Lockable switching positions: Position OFF (O) Position ON (I) Possible only if the front mounted rotary operator has been modified accordingly during installation. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 324 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators Door mounted rotary operator and side wall mounted rotary operator Lockable switching positions: Position OFF (O) When the door mounted rotary operator or the side wall mounted rotary operator is locked in the OFF (O) position, the molded case circuit breaker cannot be closed, nor can the cubicle door be opened. The door interlock cannot be overridden. Position ON (I) Possible only if the door mounted rotary operator or the side wall mounted rotary operator has been modified accordingly during installation. Note No impairment of protection functions Locking the rotary operators in the ON (I) position does not impair the protective functionality of the molded case circuit breakers. In the event of a fault, the molded case circuit breaker trips in the normal way. When the rotary operator is unlocked, the switching position changes to TRIP. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 325 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators 4.5.5.2 Locking and interlocking by the rotary operator The following manual operators can be locked and interlocked by the rotary operator: Front mounted rotary operator Rotary operator with shaft stub Door mounted rotary operator Side wall mounted rotary operator The manual operators can be locked by up to three padlocks with a shackle diameter of between 5 and 8 mm or by means of cylinder locks (type Ronis). Manual operators can be interlocked only by means of cylinder locks (type Ronis). In addition, the door mounted rotary operator and side wall mounted rotary operator at the masking plate in the panel door or side panel can also be locked using cylinder locks (type Kaba). Padlocks and cylinder locks are not included in the scope of supply of manual rotary operators. Locking with padlocks All rotary operators are equipped with a padlock locking unit. This locking unit is simply pulled out of the rotary operator. Example of rotary operator with shaft stub: Lockable switching positions: Position OFF (O) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 326 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators Locking or interlocking using a cylinder lock (type Ronis) Rotary operators can be locked or interlocked (depending on how the lock holder is installed) by means of the cylinder lock (type Ronis). Example of a front mounted rotary operator and a rotary operator with shaft stub: Locking with cylinder lock (type Ronis): The cylinder lock (type Ronis) locks the rotary operators in the OFF (O) position. Mutual interlocking with cylinder lock (type Ronis): By using the cylinder lock insert for interlocking, it is possible to establish a mutual interlock between an unlimited number of rotary operators. This requires that the keys of all molded case circuit breakers locked in the open position are removed from the lock and stored in a safe place. Only the key of the rotary operator which is in the ON (I) position is left in the cylinder lock. This key cannot be removed while the rotary operator is in the ON (I) position. The key can be removed only after the rotary operator has been turned to the OFF (0) position, the cylinder lock turned to the "locked" position so that the molded case circuit breaker is interlocked. See also chapter Cylinder locks for implementing interlocks between multiple 3VA molded case circuit breakers (Page 369). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 327 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators Locking with cylinder lock (Kaba) The door mounted rotary operator and the side wall mounted rotary operator can be locked by means of a cylinder lock (type Kaba) fitted in the panel door or side panel. The cylinder lock (type Kaba) is not included in the scope of supply. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 328 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators 4.5.6 Degree of protection When fitted with an escutcheon (see illustration below), a front mounted rotary operator installed in the cubicle door has degree of protection IP30. Note To ensure that the control cabinet door can still be opened, the front mounted rotary operator must not project over the cover frame by more than 5 mm when the door is closed. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 329 Accessories 4.5 Manual operators 4.5.7 Accessories Illumination kit With this kit installed, the front edge of the handle of the front mounted operator of the door mounted rotary operator or side wall mounted rotary operator lights up to indicate the switching position of the circuit breaker. The illumination kit can be ordered with the operator as a pre-assembled accessory, or individually as a retrofit component. The illumination kit operates on a 24 V DC supply. Its power consumption is 0.16 W. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 330 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators 4.6 Motor operators 4.6.1 MO310 side mounted motor operator The MO310 side mounted motor operator makes it possible to implement remote control of the 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker without having to attach anything to the front of the circuit breaker. Its compact design (cover size of 45 mm) and the DIN rail mounting option make this MO310 side mounted motor operator especially suitable for: Building distribution boards Distribution boards MO310 side mounted motor operators are also used in conjunction with automatic transfer control devices. MO310 motor operator Plastic cover Seal Handle for manual operation <PUSH TO TRIP> button Reset mode setting LED "Active" Mechanism for padlocks 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 331 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators Description The switchstick on the front panel clearly shows the switching position of the molded case circuit breaker. The MO310 side mounted motor operator meets the requirements pertaining to isolating features stipulated by IEC / EN 60947-1. Switchstick on the front panel 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 332 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators LED status displays See also chapter Faults, causes of faults and rectification of faults (Page 338). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 333 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators 4.6.1.1 MANUAL, AUTO and LOCK modes The MO310 side mounted motor operator is switched to MANUAL or AUTO mode when the plastic cover is opened (MANUAL) or closed (AUTO). MANUAL: When the plastic cover is open, the MO310 side mounted motor operator is in MANUAL mode. The switchstick on the front panel can be operated to move the molded case circuit breaker to the ON (I) or OFF (O) position. AUTO: If the plastic cover is closed, the MO310 side mounted motor operator is operated via control cables, e.g. via pushbuttons or a PLC. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 334 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators LOCK: The MO310 side mounted motor operator can be interlocked to prevent reclosing by operating the locking bar in the OFF (O) position. The locking device can be locked with up to three padlocks (shackle diameter 5.0 mm to 8.0 mm). Padlocks are not included in the scope of supply. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 335 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators 4.6.1.2 Closing, opening and resetting the 3VA molded case circuit breaker Closing and opening in MANUAL mode The plastic cover is open. The MO310 side mounted motor operator is in MANUAL mode. Close the molded case circuit breaker: Push the switchstick to the ON (I) position. The molded case circuit breaker is closed ON (I). The contacts are closed. Open the molded case circuit breaker: Push the switchstick to the OFF (O) position. The molded case circuit breaker is open OFF (O). The contacts are open. Closing and opening in AUTO mode The plastic cover is closed. The MO310 side mounted motor operator is in AUTO mode. The 3VA molded case circuit breaker can only be closed or opened by means of electrical signals. Close the 3VA molded case circuit breaker by means of an electrical ON signal at the terminal block: The molded case circuit breaker is ON (I). The contacts are closed. The switchstick is in the ON (I) position. Open the 3VA molded case circuit breaker by means of an electrical OFF signal at the terminal block: The molded case circuit breaker is OFF (O). The main contacts are separated. The switchstick is in the OFF (O) position. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 336 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators Resetting the molded case circuit breaker The method by which the molded case circuit breaker is reset by the MO310 side mounted motor operator depends on the selected reset mode. Selectable reset mode The reset mode can be set. After the molded case circuit breaker has tripped, the selected reset mode determines the response of the motor operator in the TRIP position. Response of MO310 side mounted motor operator to tripping of the molded case circuit breaker, depending on the selected reset mode: Connection diagram for control of the MO310 motor operator The MO310 motor operator is edge-controlled, i.e. it reacts only to the positive edge of an ON or OFF command at the relevant terminals 3 and 4. In this case, the OFF signal is dominant, i.e. the motor operator will be switched off in response to an OFF edge even if an ON signal is applied. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 337 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators The MO310 requires a pause period of 80 ms between the end of an OFF signal and the edge of an ON signal. Since the OFF signal is dominant, it does not require a pause period. 4.6.1.3 Faults, causes of faults and rectification of faults Device defective and internal fault: "Device defective" refers to a fault or defect in the motor operator which cannot be rectified. The device must be replaced. This can be caused by a defective microswitch, for example. "Internal error" refers to faults which can be rectified (e.g. an undefined switching position, fault during automatic RESET, excessively long switching times). If the motor operator fault condition cannot be rectified by switching it ON/OFF again, the switching position must be corrected manually. Note You must first ensure that the rotary switch for RESET mode is in a defined state. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 338 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators 4.6.2 Motor operator MO320 The motor operator MO320 transmits commands via electrical control cables to open and close the molded case circuit breaker. The source of commands transmitted via electrical control cables can be a pushbutton or a PLC, for example. Motor operators must also used in conjunction with automatic transfer control devices. MO320 motor operator LED "TRIP" Characteristic data of the molded case circuit breaker Indication of the breaker status ON/OFF Mechanism for padlocks Handle for manual operation Seal Connecting terminals for power supply (AC/DC depending on version) Reset mode setting LED "Active" Button for trip unit <PUSH TO TRIP> 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 339 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators Description of front panel The front panel of the motor operator MO320 features an indication of the breaker status and an LED labeled "TRIP". The indication directly reflects the status of the actuating shaft. With its clear breaker status indication, the motor operator MO320 meets the requirements pertaining to isolating features stipulated by IEC / EN 60947-1. Indication of the breaker status on the front panel LED status displays See also chapter Faults, causes of faults and rectification of faults (Page 346). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 340 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators 4.6.2.1 MANUAL, AUTO and LOCK modes The motor operator MO320 is switched to MANUAL or AUTO mode when the plastic window is opened (MANUAL) or closed (AUTO). MANUAL: When the plastic window is open, the motor operator MO320 is in MANUAL mode. The motor operator is moved to position ON (I) or OFF (O) by manual operation of the handle. AUTO: When the plastic window is closed, the motor operator MO320 is in AUTO mode. The motor operator can be operated via control cables, e.g. in response to signals issued by a pushbutton or by control commands output by a PLC. LOCK: The motor operator can be locked in the OFF (O) position to prevent reclosure of the breaker. The padlock locking device snaps out if the slide above it is moved to the "LOCK" position. Up to three padlocks with a shackle diameter of between 5 and 8 mm can be inserted through the openings in the padlock locking unit. Padlocks are not included in the scope of supply. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 341 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators 4.6.2.2 Opening, closing and resetting the 3VA molded case circuit breaker Closing and opening in MANUAL mode The plastic window is open, the motor operator is in MANUAL mode. The supply to the LEDs is also disconnected, but the motor operator remains fully operational. Close the 3VA molded case circuit breaker: Turn the handle clockwise until the breaker status indicator displays ON (I). The molded case circuit breaker is now ON (I). The contacts are closed. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 342 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators Open the 3VA molded case circuit breaker: Turn the handle clockwise until the breaker status indication indicates OFF (O). The molded case circuit breaker is now OFF (O). The contacts are open. Closing and opening in AUTO mode The plastic window is closed, the motor operator is in AUTO mode. The 3VA molded case circuit breaker can only be closed or opened by means of electrical signals. Close the 3VA molded case circuit breaker by means of an electrical ON signal at the terminal block: The molded case circuit breaker is ON (I). The contacts are closed. The switching position indicator on the front panel of the motor operator displays ON (I). Open the 3VA molded case circuit breaker by means of an electrical OFF signal at the terminal block: The molded case circuit breaker is OFF (O). The main contacts are separated. The switching position indicator on the front panel of the motor operator displays OFF (O). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 343 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators Resetting the molded case circuit breaker If the 3VA molded case circuit breaker has tripped, the LED labeled "TRIP" lights up Reset mode setting The method by which the 3VA molded case circuit breaker is reset by the motor operator depends on the selected reset mode. Reset modes The reset mode can be set. After the molded case circuit breaker has tripped, the selected reset mode determines the response of the motor operator in the TRIP position. Motor operator response to tripping of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker depending on the reset mode selection: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 344 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators Connection diagram for control of the motor operator MO320 Note An EMERGENCY-OFF circuit is implemented by means of undervoltage releases (Page 191). For further circuit diagrams, see chapter "Circuit diagrams" (Page 539). The MO320 motor operator is edge-controlled, i.e. it reacts only to the positive edge of an ON or OFF command at the relevant terminals 3 and 4. In this case, the OFF signal is dominant, i.e. the motor operator will be switched off in response to an OFF edge even if an ON signal is applied. The MO320 requires a pause period of 80 ms between the end of an OFF signal and the edge of an ON signal. Since the OFF signal is dominant, it does not require a pause period. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 345 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators 4.6.2.3 Faults, causes of faults and rectification of faults 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 346 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators 4.6.3 SEO520 motor operator with stored energy operator The front motor operator with SEO520 stored energy operator is primarily designed for network synchronization applications on account of its fast switching times. It also offers the option of a communication link which allows the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker to be remotely controlled in fieldbus systems associated with the 3VA range. Connecting terminals Cylinder lock installation option (type Ronis) for mode interlocking OFF button Tool insertion slot for manually winding up the stored energy operator Installation option for mechanical operating cycles counter ON button Slot for storing tool for manual wind-up <PUSH TO TRIP> test button Locking device for padlocks Active and Communication LEDs Mode slide switch Reset mode selector switch Indication of status of stored energy operator Indication of the breaker status (ON/OFF) Power supply top unit (24 V DC, 42 - 60 V AC/DC, 110 - 230 V AC/DC) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 347 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators Description of front panel The front panel of the motor operator with SEO520 stored energy operator features an indication of the breaker status and an LED labeled "TRIP". The clear breaker status indication allows the SEO520 motor operator to meet the requirement pertaining to isolating features stipulated by IEC / EN 60947-1. Indication of the breaker status on the front panel LED status displays Stored energy operator status display 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 348 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators 4.6.3.1 MANUAL, AUTO and LOCK modes The SEO520 motor operator with stored energy operator features the operating modes MANUAL (manual mode) AUTO (remote control mode) LOCK (locked) These are selected using a slide switch on the front of the SEO. MANUAL In MANUAL mode (slide switch on the left), the SEO520 motor operator can only be operated using the buttons on the front panel of the SEO520 motor operator. AUTO In AUTO mode (slide switch in the middle), the SEO520 motor operator is operated via control cables, e.g. via pushbuttons or a PLC, or via the optional communication function. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 349 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators LOCK In LOCK mode (slide switch on the right, only possible in the OFF (O) position), the SEO520 motor operator can be interlocked to prevent reclosing. The locking device can be locked with up to three padlocks (shackle diameter 5.0 mm to 8.0 mm). Padlocks are not included in the scope of supply. 4.6.3.2 Closing, opening and resetting the 3VA molded case circuit breaker Closing and opening In MANUAL mode In MANUAL mode, the molded case circuit breaker is operated using the buttons on the front panel of the SEO520 motor operator. Remote control is not possible. Operating the ON (I) button causes the contacts of the molded case circuit breaker to close. Operating the OFF (O) button causes the contacts to open. This is not performed by means of a TRIP. It is an actual switch-off operation. In AUTO mode In AUTO mode, the molded case circuit breaker can be closed and opened by means of electrical signals at the terminal block. Versions with the communication module can be closed and opened via the connection to the COM060 communication module in the molded case circuit breaker. This takes place via the communication environment selected for the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker, e.g. PROFIBUS, PROFINET, Ethernet (Modbus TCP). ON/OFF commands can also be issued via the powerconfig commissioning and parameterization software. Here too, an actual switch-off operation is performed and not a TRIP. In AUTO mode, the OFF (O) button on the SEO520 operator can be used. The ON (I) button cannot be operated. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 350 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators Resetting the molded case circuit breaker The method by which the molded case circuit breaker is reset by the SEO520 motor operator depends on the selected reset mode. Selectable reset mode The reset mode can be set. After the molded case circuit breaker has tripped, the selected reset mode determines the response of the motor operator in the TRIP position. Response of SEO520 motor operator to tripping of the molded case circuit breaker, depending on the selected reset mode: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 351 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators Connection diagram for control of the SEO520 motor operator The SEO520 motor operator is edge-controlled, i.e. it reacts only to the positive edge of an ON or OFF command at the relevant terminals 3 and 4. In this case, the OFF signal is dominant, i.e. the motor operator will be switched off in response to an OFF edge even if an ON signal is applied. The SEO520 requires a pause period of 80 ms between the end of an OFF signal and the edge of an ON signal. Since the OFF signal is dominant, it does not require a pause period. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 352 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators 4.6.3.3 Faults, causes of faults and rectification of faults "Device defective" refers to a fault or defect in the motor operator which cannot be rectified. The device must be replaced. This can be caused by a defective microswitch, for example. "Internal error" refers to faults which can be rectified (e.g. an undefined switching position, fault on automatic RESET, excessively long switching times). If the motor operator fault condition cannot be rectified by (remotely) switching it ON/OFF again, the following actions are necessary: Ensure that the rotary switch for RESET mode is in a defined state (1, 2 or 3) Correct the switching position manually (manually charge the stored energy and operate the ON/OFF button). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 353 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators 4.6.3.4 Communication A communication-capable version of the SEO520 motor operator can be ordered as an option. This integrates it in the 3VA communication environment and makes it possible to remotely control the molded case circuit breaker. The signal transmission takes place via an SEO-COM adapter to the COM060 communication module in the right-hand accessory compartment of the molded case circuit breaker. 1. Insert the COM060 communication module and the SEO-COM adapter in the molded case circuit breaker. 2. Break off the assembly support of the SEO-COM adapter. 3. Fit the SEO520 in the mounting position. The communication connection is established automatically when the COM060 is connected to COM800/100, thereby contacting the 24 V DC. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 354 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators 4.6.3.5 Accessories Cylinder lock (type Ronis) The SEO520 motor operator can be fitted with a cylinder lock (type Ronis) at the front. The lock kit comprises a cylinder lock with four possible key versions and the SEO-specific lock insert. The cylinder lock interlocks the selected operating mode (MANUAL, AUTO, LOCK) to prevent any unauthorized change of operating mode. Operating cycles counter The mechanical operating cycle counter can be installed at the front. It counts the number of ON/OFF cycles from the time it is installed. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 355 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators Compatibility with other accessories CAUTION Irreparable damage to the molded case circuit breaker If the SEO520 motor operator is equipped with a communication option, the use of auxiliary (AUX) switches is not permitted in the HP version (3VA9988-0AA11) due to requirements pertaining to air and creepage distances in the right-hand accessory compartment of the molded case circuit breaker. This warning notice is relevant for cases where an SEO520 motor operator with a communication option is used in an application without communication. If the SEO520 motor operator is connected to a communication system, the COM060 communication module occupies the mounting location of the auxiliary (AUX) switch in the HP version in the righthand accessory compartment. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 356 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators 4.6.4 Technical specifications MO310 motor operator 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 357 Accessories 4.6 Motor operators MO320 motor operator 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 358 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking SEO520 motor operator with stored energy operator Details of breaking capacity of inputs/outputs 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 359 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking 4.7 Locking and interlocking 4.7.1 General information With all types of 3VA molded case circuit breaker, a basic distinction is made between: Locking of molded case circuit breakers Interlocking of molded case circuit breakers 4.7.1.1 Locking Padlock devices can be used to lock 3VA molded case circuit breakers in the OFF (O) or ON (I) position. A molded case circuit breaker cannot be operated when it is locked. Locking a molded case circuit breaker in the OFF (O) position In order to prevent closure of a 3VA molded case circuit breaker, it can be locked in the OFF (O) position by a padlock. Once it is locked, the 3VA molded case circuit breaker is safely locked in the OFF (O) position. It can be unlocked again only by an authorized person. The padlock devices for locking the 3VA molded case circuit breaker in the OFF (O) position ensure safe separation of the main contacts as defined by IEC 60947-2. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 360 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Locking a molded case circuit breaker in the ON (I) position It is also possible to safely lock a 3VA molded case circuit breaker in the ON (I) position using a padlock device. The breaker contacts cannot be opened when it is locked in this position. A 3VA molded case circuit breaker can be released from its ON position again only by an authorized person. The TRIP function, i.e. the protective functionality of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker, is not affected by locking the breaker in the ON (I) position. In the event of a fault, the 3VA molded case circuit breaker trips in the normal way. 4.7.1.2 Interlocking The available interlocking devices can be used to implement a mutual interlock between at least two 3VA molded case circuit breakers. The interlocking device only ever releases one 3VA molded case circuit breaker at a time, thereby ensuring that only the released circuit breaker can be operated. All other 3VA molded case circuit breakers remain in the safe OFF (O) position and are blocked by the interlock. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 361 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Principle of two mutually interlocked 3VA molded case circuit breakers: Molded case circuit breaker blocked/locked in the safe switching state OFF (O) Molded case circuit breaker released for operation The following interlocking systems are available for 3VA molded case circuit breakers: Front interlock Rear interlock Front interlock All front interlocks are installed on the front panel of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. Front interlocks make it impossible to install some other external accessories, e.g. motor operator, rotary operators. They also partially restrict access to internal accessory compartments. Rear interlock The rear interlock does not affect the front panel of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. All components of the interlocking system are concealed behind the molded case circuit breaker or the mounting plate. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 362 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking 4.7.2 Locking The following locking devices are available for 3VA molded case circuit breakers: Padlock device for the handle Cylinder locks for locking the 3VA molded case circuit breaker 4.7.2.1 Padlock device for the handle The padlock device for the handle is directly attached to the handle of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker and latched in place. Note For installation instructions, please refer to operating instructions "Padlock device for the handle". When the padlock device for the handle is installed, the 3VA molded case circuit breaker can be locked in the OFF (O) position by up to three padlocks (shackle diameter 4.5 to 8.5 mm). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 363 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking If the application requires the 3VA molded case circuit breaker to be locked in the ON (I) position as well, the metal pin must be removed by pliers from the handle, see illustration below. This deliberate action is a safety precaution and prevents accidental locking of the breaker in the ON position. Metal pin Padlock devices in INSTA distribution boards Installed padlock devices for the handle of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers in rated current versions 100 A, 160 A and 250 A have a cover size of 45 mm. They are therefore suitable for installation in INSTA distribution boards. Installation of other accessories When the padlock device for the handle is fitted, some other accessories cannot be installed, see chapter Possible combinations of of accessories (Page 186). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 364 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking 4.7.2.2 Cylinder locks for locking the 3VA molded case circuit breaker The 3VA molded case circuit breaker can also be locked in the OFF (O) or ON (I) position by means of a cylinder lock (type Ronis). The 3VA molded case circuit breaker is protected against further operation once it has been locked. Cylinder locks (type Ronis) can be fitted to all types of 3VA molded case circuit breaker. The cylinder lock is installed in an accessory compartment of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. To provide a cylinder lock, the following two components need to be ordered: One cylinder lock (type Ronis) One lock and two keys are always included in the order. Selection of the lock number is highly flexible, i.e. it can be selected from a choice of three different lock numbers. If different cylinder lock numbers are required for multiple locks, they can be selected from the predefined article numbers stated in the catalog. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 365 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking One adapter kit The adapter kit transfers the motion of the lock to the switching mechanism. The article number includes the adapter kit and two cylinder lock housings. One cylinder lock housing (locking) is used for locking applications and the other housing (interlocking) for interlocking applications. Slide for locking in the OFF position Slide for locking in the ON position Cylinder lock housing for locking Cylinder lock housing for interlocking 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 366 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Locking in the OFF (O) position The cylinder lock (type Ronis) is installed with the adapter kit and the cylinder lock housing for locking in the right-hand accessory compartment of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker so that the breaker can be locked in the OFF (O) position. The slide for locking in the OFF position is fitted for this purpose. Adapter kit with OFF position slide Actuating lever Cylinder lock housing for locking Cylinder lock (type Ronis) Accessory cover 1. Remove the accessory cover from the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. 2. Drill a hole through the accessory cover at the position marked on the rear face and smooth down the drilled surface with a file. 3. Insert a cylinder lock (type Ronis) and the locking version of the cylinder lock housing in the drilled hole and connect it securely to the accessory cover via the actuating lever. 4. Install the adapter kit in the right-hand accessory compartment of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. 5. Reattach the accessory cover to the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 367 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking To lock the 3VA molded case circuit breaker in the OFF (O) position, the key must be turned to the vertical "locked" position. Locking in the ON (I) position For safety reasons, a deliberate action is required to lock the breaker in the ON (I) position. The slide for locking in the ON position must be used for this purpose. Further information can be found in the relevant operating instructions. Use of cylinder locks (type Ronis) for other applications Cylinder locks (type Ronis) can also be used in the following applications: For locking the racking distance in draw-out units, see chapter Draw-out technology (Page 285) For locking in the manual operators of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker, see chapter Manual operators (Page 309) Installation of other accessories The installation of the cylinder lock in the accessory compartment of the molded case circuit breaker partly excludes the installation of other accessory components, e.g. front mounted accessories such as manual and motor operators as well as front interlocks. Likewise the cylinder lock blocks slots for internal accessories (for overview see chapter Mounting locations on 3VA molded case circuit breakers (Page 191)). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 368 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking 4.7.3 Front interlocking Front interlocks are installed on the front panel of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. The following interlocking devices are available for 3VA molded case circuit breakers: Cylinder locks for implementing interlocks between an unlimited number of molded case circuit breakers Sliding bar with Bowden cable Sliding bar 4.7.3.1 Cylinder locks for implementing interlocks between multiple 3VA molded case circuit breakers Cylinder locks (type Ronis) can be installed in the accessory compartments not only to lock molded case circuit breakers, see chapter Cylinder locks for locking the 3VA molded case circuit breaker (Page 365), but also to implement mutual interlocks between an unlimited number of 3VA molded case circuit breakers. The purpose of this system is to ensure that only one single 3VA molded case circuit breaker included in the interlock application can be in the ON (I) position at any given time. In order to implement a mutual interlock between multiple 3VA molded case circuit breakers, the following two components must be ordered for each circuit breaker to be included in the interlock arrangement: One cylinder lock (type Ronis) One lock and two keys are always included in the order. Note It is important to order the same lock number for all circuit breakers to be included in the interlock arrangement! 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 369 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking One adapter kit The adapter kit transfers the motion of the lock to the switching mechanism. The article number includes the adapter kit and two cylinder lock housings. Slide for locking in the OFF position Slide for locking in the ON position Locking version of cylinder lock housing Interlocking version of cylinder lock housing If, for example, three 3VA molded case circuit breakers are to be interlocked, three cylinder locks (type Ronis) with the same lock number and 3 adapter kits suitable for the particular 3VA molded case circuit breaker must be ordered. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 370 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Installing the cylinder lock in the accessory compartment The cylinder lock (type Ronis) is installed together with the adapter kit and the interlocking version of the cylinder lock housing in the right-hand accessory compartment of the molded case circuit breaker. Adapter kit Actuating lever Cylinder lock housing for interlocking Cylinder lock (type Ronis) Accessory cover 1. Remove the accessory cover from the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. 2. Drill a hole through the accessory cover at the position marked on the rear face and smooth down the drilled surface with a file. 3. Insert a cylinder lock (type Ronis) and the interlocking version of the cylinder lock housing in the drilled hole and connect it securely to the accessory cover via the actuating lever. 4. Install the adapter kit in the right-hand accessory compartment of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. 5. Reattach the accessory cover to the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. A cylinder lock (type Ronis) is installed at each 3VA molded case circuit breaker to be interlocked. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 371 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Interlocking of molded case circuit breakers WARNING Use of more than one key poses safety hazard and/or risk of damage to property Only leave one key in the entire interlock arrangement. Store all other keys in a safe place or lock them away. In order to ensure reliable functioning of the interlock, only one must remain in the entire interlock arrangement. This one key serves as the release instrument for only one molded case circuit breaker at a time. 1. Move all 3VA molded case circuit breakers in the interlock arrangement to the OFF position and lock them (turn the cylinder lock to the horizontal "locked" position). 2. Remove all keys. All 3VA molded case circuit breakers in the interlock arrangement are now safely locked in the OFF (O) position and cannot be operated. 3. Insert one single key in one circuit breaker included in the interlock; store or lock away all other keys. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 372 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking 4. Use the single key to turn the cylinder lock of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker to be released to the "unlocked" position. Once the key is in the "unlocked" position, it must not be removed. 5. Move the handle of the released 3VA molded case circuit breaker to the ON (I) position. Releasing a different molded case circuit breaker 1. Move the handle of the currently released molded case circuit breaker to the OFF (O) position. 2. Turn the cylinder lock to the vertical "locked" position and remove the key. This 3VA molded case circuit breaker is now safely locked in the OFF (O) position and cannot be operated. 3. Use the same key to turn the cylinder lock of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker to be released to the horizontal "unlocked" position. 4. Move the handle of the released 3VA molded case circuit breaker to the ON (I) position. Interlock combinations The following interlock combinations can be implemented with cylinder locks: All 3VA1 and 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers can be mutually interlocked. Interlocks can be implemented between all sizes of breakers. Mutual interlocks can be implemented between all 2-pole, 3-pole and 4-pole molded case circuit breakers. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 373 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Installation of other accessories When the cylinder lock is fitted in the accessory compartment of the circuit breaker, some other accessories cannot be installed, see chapter Possible combinations of of accessories (Page 186). See also Manual operators (Page 309) Draw-out technology (Page 285) 4.7.3.2 Sliding bar with Bowden cable: Modules for sliding bar with Bowden cable A mutual interlock between up to three molded case circuit breakers can be implemented by means of the front Bowden cable interlock module. This interlock functions according to the blocking principle: If one of the circuit breakers included in the interlock is unlocked, the Bowden cables move in such a way as to ensure that the other molded case circuit breakers are locked in the OFF (O) position. In order to implement a front Bowden cable interlock, sliding bar modules must be mounted on the 3VA molded case circuit breakers to be included in the interlock arrangement. These modules are equipped with a handle blocking device to block or release operation of the handle. Sliding bar module Slide 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 374 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking A Bowden cable must be installed in addition to the sliding bar modules. This cable prevents the slides from releasing more than one molded case circuit breaker at any one time. As a result, only one 3VA molded case circuit breaker at a time can be operated and only one molded case circuit breaker can be in the ON (I) position. 3VA1 160 molded case circuit breaker, blocked by slide 3VA2 250 molded case circuit breaker, released by slide Note For installation instructions, please refer to operating instructions "Sliding bar modules". Bowden cable lengths The following lengths of Bowden cable can be ordered: 0.5 m 1.0 m 1.5 m 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 375 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Interlock combinations Interlocks can be implemented between the following 3VA molded case circuit breakers: Possible combinations of handle positions When a cable interlock module using a Bowden cable is installed to interlock two 3VA molded case circuit breakers, the following combinations of handle position are possible: When a cable interlock module using a Bowden cable is installed to interlock three 3VA molded case circuit breakers, the following combinations of handle position are possible: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 376 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Installation of other accessories When the front Bowden cable interlock module is fitted, some other accessories cannot be installed, see chapter Possible combinations of of accessories (Page 186). 4.7.3.3 Sliding bar The sliding bar can be used to implement an interlock between three 3VA molded case circuit breakers of the same size. Up to three padlocks (shackle diameter of between 4.5 and 8 mm) can be attached in order to lock the bar in position. Installing the sliding bar Side plate Locking slide 1. Attach two side plates to the sides of the 3VA molded case circuit breakers. 2. Attach the locking slide securely to the two side plates. Locking the handle The handle of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker to be locked is blocked when the locking slide is moved into position. Up to three commercially available padlocks (shackle diameter 4.5 to 8 mm) can be fitted to lock the slide in position and prevent operation of the blocked handle. The blocked 3VA molded case circuit breaker is thus always locked in the safe OFF (O) position, while the released circuit breaker can still be operated. If the locking slide is in the midway position and locked there by padlocks, both or all three of the molded case circuit breakers can be blocked or held securely in the OFF (O) position. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 377 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Example of an interlock between two 3VA molded case circuit breakers: Scope of supply One article number always includes: 2 side plates 1 locking slide Interlock combinations The following interlock combinations can be implemented with the sliding bar: Interlocks can be implemented between the same rated current versions of molded case circuit breakers: - 3VA11 with 3VA11 - 3VA12 with 3VA12 - 3VA13 / 3VA14 / 3VA23 / 3VA24 with 3VA13 / 3VA14 / 3VA23 / 3VA24 - 3VA20 / 3VA21 / 3VA22 with 3VA20 / 3VA21 / 3VA22 - Not available for 3VA25 All 2-pole (see note below), 3-pole and 4-pole molded case circuit breakers of the same size can be interlocked. Note The 2-pole molded case circuit breaker must always be mounted on the right-hand side in the sliding bar module. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 378 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Possible combinations of handle positions When a sliding bar interlock between two 3VA molded case circuit breakers is locked by padlocks, the following combinations of sliding bar position are possible: When a sliding bar interlock between three 3VA molded case circuit breakers is locked by padlocks, the following combinations of handle position are possible: Installation of other accessories When the front handle blocking device is fitted, some other accessories cannot be installed, see chapter Possible combinations of of accessories (Page 186). 4.7.4 Rear interlock Rear interlock The rear interlock system is capable of creating an interlock between two 3VA molded case circuit breakers and does not restrict the number of accessories which can be assembled on the front panel of the molded case circuit breaker. The rear interlock operates according to the following principle: When one molded case circuit breaker is closed, the other circuit breaker is prevented from closing by a tappet which engages in the breaker mechanism directly from the rear panel of the molded case circuit breaker. The rear interlock is provided by two interlocking modules which are attached at the rear of the molded case circuit breakers and behind the mounting plate. The two interlocking modules are interconnected by means of the interlocking rod. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 379 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Machining work to the panel mounting plate is required. Molded case circuit breaker 1 Molded case circuit breaker 2 Mounting accessories Interlocking modules Panel mounting plate Interlocking rod Note The mounting frame for the rear interlocking rod can only be used with fixed-mounted molded case circuit breakers. For installation instructions, please refer to the operating instructions for the rear interlock. Scope of supply One article number always includes: Two interlocking modules Mounting accessories Interlocking rod 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 380 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Interlock combinations The following interlock combinations are possible: All molded case circuit breakers 3VA11 / 3VA12 / 3VA13 / 3VA14 and 3VA20 / 3VA21 / 3VA22 / 3VA23 / 3VA24 can be independently interlocked. Mutual interlocks can be implemented between all 2-pole, 3-pole and 4-pole molded case circuit breakers. Handle positions When a rear interlock is installed between two 3VA molded case circuit breakers, the following combinations of handle position are possible: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 381 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Aid to facilitate installation of rear interlock An installation aid is available for all 3VA molded case circuit breakers. It facilitates installation of the rear interlock and reduces the amount of work required to the panel mounting plate. Mounting plates (specific to molded case circuit breaker) DIN rail 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 382 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking 1. Assemble installation frame: - Place mounting plates on the molded case circuit breaker. - Install rear interlock. - Bolt the DIN rails to the adapter plates. 2. Bolt the assembled installation frame to the panel mounting plate. No further work to the panel mounting plate is required. The same rear interlock combinations can be implemented regardless of whether or not the installation aid is used. Note For installation instructions, please refer to the operating instructions for the rear interlock. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 383 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Rear interlock for plug-in and draw-out units In order to use a rear interlock for plug-in or draw-out versions of the molded case circuit breakers, the tappet needs to be lengthened. The tappet extension transfers the interlocking motion of the modules through the plug-in socket or the draw-out socket. Interlocking module Tappet extension Plug-in or draw-out socket Molded case circuit breaker The rear interlock for plug-in or draw-out units is available as a complete kit containing all the required components: Two interlocking modules Mounting accessories Interlocking rod All the required tappet extensions An installation aid must be ordered separately if it is required. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 384 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.7 Locking and interlocking Interlock combinations The same rear interlock combinations can be implemented for plug-in and draw-out versions as for fixed-mounted versions. Note Plug-in and draw-out technology cannot be used in conjunction with mounting plates and profile rails. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 385 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices 4.8 Residual current devices Residual current devices afford fault protection (formerly referred to as: protection in case of indirect contact) and supplementary protection (formerly referred to as: protection in case of direct contact) in low-voltage systems. In the event of a basic insulation failure or direct contact with live components, they provide some degree of protection to persons, material assets and livestock against harm. Operating principle of a residual current device In fault-free electrical installation, the vector sum of the load currents of all connected conductors equals zero. A residual current occurring in the protected circuit as the result of an insulation fault, for example, induces a voltage in the secondary winding of a summation current transformer. The evaluation electronics system monitors the induced voltage and transmits a trip command to the RCD trip unit if the trip criterion is fulfilled. The molded case circuit breaker with residual current protection combination is designed to ensure that the molded case circuit breaker contacts open if the residual current exceeds a preset value. 4.8.1 Portfolio The new portfolio of residual current devices includes different RCD designs so that an optimum solution is available for every conceivable type of application. The types can be distinguished as follows: Designs: - Side mounted - Loadside - Modular Because a wide variety of residual current waveforms (e.g. sinusoidal AC residual currents or smooth DC residual currents) can occur in different applications (depending on the electronic switch in the circuit), the following types of residual current devices are available: Type A Type B Type B+ 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 386 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Since all residual current devices can be set to between 0.03 A and maximum 5 A or 30 A, they are suitable for use in the following applications: Personnel protection: In = 30 mA with instantaneous tripping Note In order to protect personnel, it is necessary to seal the transparent protective cover so that the 30 mA setting range cannot be changed. Fire protection: In 300 mA Protection in the case of indirect contact Ground-fault protection While residual current devices attached to the circuit breakers are supplied with voltage from all connected phases of the system to be monitored, the modular residual current device (MRCD) is supplied from a 1-phase auxiliary voltage source (internal or external). The modular residual current device utilizes an undervoltage release (UVR) or a shunt trip. The recommended applications for different RCD designs are thus as follows: + Suitable - Less suitable 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 387 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Sizes Special "BASIC" residual current devices have been developed for use with 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers. Basic RCD310 and Basic RCD510 Side-mounted residual current devices are available for 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers and 3VA1 switch disconnectors with box terminals up to 250 A. These residual current devices are optimally designed for installation in distribution boards. Features The key features of the RCD310 and RCD510 series are: Type A Response current In adjustable in eight steps from 0.03 A to 5 A Compact, L-shaped design Cover size 45 mm 3 and 4-pole versions LEDs to signal "ready" state and pre-alarms Tripped signal at device and via electrical contacts Signal must be acknowledged via the RESET button on the residual current device Through-hole technology allows connection of cables to circuit breaker's box terminals Electromagnetic release (RCR) with dual functionality Suitable for mounting on DIN rail Suitable for use as a display unit only 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 388 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Special characteristics There are two different functional types of side mounted residual current device, i.e. the RCD310 and the RCD510. The differences in functionality between these two types are explained by the list of features below. Time delay: - RCD310 without time delay (instantaneous) - RCD510 with an adjustable delay time t from 0 to 3000 ms Number of poles: - RCD310 is available only in a 4-pole version - RCD510 is available in 3-pole and 4-pole versions Rated operating current: - RCD310 available only up to 160 A (3VA11) - RCD510 available up to 250 A Supplied connection technology: - RCD510 (3VA12 molded case circuit breaker) is supplied with the necessary connection components (1 set of box terminals). Advantages Slimline, side mounted design (30 mm) leaves space for other components in the distribution board. The residual current devices, the 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers and the 3VA1 switch disconnectors all have a cover size of 45 mm, so that they are easy to install, for example, adjacent to miniature circuit breakers in a distribution board. With the DIN rail adapter accessory installed, RCD310 and RCD510 units up to 160 A can be mounted easily on a DIN rail. The side mounted residual current devices also feature a screw mounting option so that they can be attached directly to a mounting plate. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 389 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Basic RCD320 and Basic RCD520 Features The key features of the RCD320 and RCD520 series are: Type A Response current In adjustable in eight steps from 0.03 A to 5 A Compact design Cover size 45 mm 3 and 4-pole versions LEDs to signal "ready" state and pre-alarms Tripped signal at device and via electrical contacts Signal must be acknowledged via the RESET button on the residual current device Suitable for use in 1-phase and 3-phase systems Special characteristics The differences between the two RCD320 and RCD520 residual current devices designed for loadside mounting are explained below: Time delay: - RCD320 without time delay (instantaneous) - RCD520 with an adjustable delay time t from 0 to 3000 ms Number of poles: - RCD320 is available only in a 4-pole version - RCD520 is available in 3-pole and 4-pole versions Rated operating current: - RCD320 available only up to 160 A (3VA11) - RCD520 available up to 250 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 390 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Basic RCD520B Residual current devices types B and B+ for loadside mounting are supplied for 3VA11 molded case circuit breakers up to 160 A. Type B is also described as universal current sensitive. Unlike residual current devices RCD320 or RCD520, devices of the type RCD520B detect smooth DC residual currents in addition to pure sinusoidal AC residual currents and pulsating DC residual currents. Features The key features of the RCD520B series are: Types B and B+ (selectable) Type B+ meets the requirements for advanced preventative protection against fire according to VDE 0664-400 Use as residual current device or residual current display unit (selectable) Response current In adjustable in Type B: 8 steps from 0.03 A to 5 A Type B+: 4 steps from 0.03 A to 0.3 A Delay time t adjustable in 10 steps from 0 to 10000 ms Compact design Cover size 45 mm 3 and 4-pole versions LEDs to signal "ready" state, pre-alarm and MONITORING mode Integrated auxiliary contacts for tripped signals and pre-alarms Signal must be acknowledged via the RESET button on the residual current device Tripping by means of plunger Periodic self-test functions Special characteristics Selection between type B/type B+: - Selection of tripping characteristic (B or B+) possible Selection between RCD mode and MONITORING mode: - RCD520B functions as a protection device in "RCD mode" - RCD520B functions purely as a display unit in "MONITORING mode" Number of poles: - The 3-pole version of RCD520B is installed in a 4-pole enclosure Rated current: - RCD520B available for 3VA11 (160 A) molded case circuit breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 391 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices A special "ADVANCED" residual current device has been developed for use with 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers. Advanced RCD820 The RCD820 series is suitable for use in applications with exacting technical requirements: High residual current response values Long delay time settings for selective grading Onboard interface to a fieldbus communication system Graded alarm system Features The key features of the RCD820 series are: Residual current devices available with ratings up to 630 A Type A Response current In adjustable in ten steps from 0.03 A to 30 A Delay time t adjustable in ten steps from 0 to 10000 ms 3 and 4-pole versions LEDs to signal "ready" state, pre-alarms and communication status Auxiliary contacts for tripped signals and pre-alarms With remote acknowledgement and remote commissioning capability Remote tripping possible via communication link or auxiliary contact Suitable for use in 1-phase and 3-phase systems Suitable for use as a display unit only 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 392 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Modular residual current device The modular residual current device (MRCD) is ideal for applications which require a high degree of flexibility. It can be retrofitted easily in an existing installation, for example, in order to provide residual current protection without the need for any major modifications to the existing application. Thanks to its modular design, it is compatible with all breaker designs and can therefore be combined with 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers and with circuit breakers from the 3VA2 range. Note For possible combinations, please refer to Chapter Modular residual current device (Page 478). Further tested combinations available on request. The key features of the MRCD are: Digital modular residual current device type A (compliant with IEC 60947-2 Annex M) Response current In adjustable in seven steps from 0.03 A to 3 A Delay time t adjustable in twelve steps from 0 to 10 s Compact design Cover size 45 mm Suitable for 2-pole, 3-pole or 4-pole circuit breakers Summation current transformer with a diameter ranging from 35 mm to 210 mm Operated by means of 6 buttons Output of status and current measured value on color display screen Fault cause is displayed in the event of faults Two relay contacts, one for alarm (warning of continuous rise in residual current) and one for trip, which can be programmed independently of one another Voltage of monitored circuit up to max. 690 V AC For installation on 35 mm DIN rail 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 393 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices 4.8.1.1 Possible combinations of residual current devices and 3VA circuit breakers 3p 3-pole 4p 4-pole F Fixed-mounted circuit breaker PI Plug-in circuit breaker DO Draw-out circuit breaker 1) Cannot be combined with switch disconnector 2) 3-pole version in 4-pole enclosure 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 394 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices 4.8.2 Residual current devices for mounting on circuit breakers The RCD310, RCD510, RCD320, RCD520, RCD520B and RCD820 residual current devices are available as accessories for mounting on specific 3VA molded case circuit breakers up to the largest circuit breaker size/current rating. Combination with circuit breakers After a residual current device has been mounted on a molded case circuit breaker or switch disconnector, the specifications of the breaker or disconnector remain unchanged with respect to the following characteristics: Standards Conductor cross-sections Use of connection accessories Isolating features Selective behavior When a basic type residual current device is mounted on a 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker or a 3VA1 switch disconnector, the electrical rating of the equipment combination is automatically downgraded to the lower electrical rating of the residual current device. Example: Ue: 3VA1 3VA1 and Basic residual current device 690 V AC 480 V AC For more information, refer to chapter Technical specifications (Page 472). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 395 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Residual current devices Standards The combination of molded case circuit breaker and residual current device conforms to IEC 60947-2 Annex B. Power supply The residual current devices do not require an external power supply, but tap a supply from the main current paths of the molded case circuit breaker or switch disconnector. Guaranteed to function properly Proper functioning of the residual current device is guaranteed even with only one phase and N (applies to RCD320, RCD520, RCD520B and RCD820) or two phases (alternating current or pulsating direct voltage). Direction of incoming supply The direction of incoming supply to the combination of circuit breaker and residual current device is optional, i.e. it can be connected at the top or bottom. The performance of the residual current devices is not impaired by regenerative feedback from motors. Device type Residual current devices without an additional letter at the end of the short code (e.g. RCD520) meet the requirements for device type A, i.e. they are capable of detecting all sinusoidal AC residual currents and pulsating DC residual currents. The letter B at the end of the short code (e.g. RCD520B) indicates that it is a universal current-sensitive residual current device (type B or B+). Combination with external accessories DIN rail adapters DIN rail adapters are available as accessories for side-mounted residual current devices RCD310 and RCD510 up to 160 A. These permit fast and easy installation of residual current devices on 35 mm DIN rails compliant with IEC / EN 60715 TH35-7.5 and TH35-15. You can find more information in chapter DIN rail adapter (Page 531). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 396 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices 4.8.2.1 Side mounted residual current devices Basic RCD310 and Basic RCD510 Front view of Basic RCD310 and Basic RCD510 RCD310 Type designation Maximum rated operational current, rated operational voltage and frequency Electromagnetic release (RCR = Residual Current Release) Standard Rated insulation voltage and rated impulse strength Device type Location and date of manufacture Circuit breaker Only suitable for use in 3-phase systems Knowledge Manager Contact hazard protective cover over main current paths with sealing option Article number Transparent protective cover over setting buttons Setting button for response current LED: ACTIVE and pre-alarm RESET button / tripped display Test button (test device) Auxiliary contacts Product version 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 397 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices RCD510 Type designation Electromagnetic release (RCR = Residual Current Release) Maximum rated operational current, rated operational voltage and frequency Standard Rated insulation voltage and rated impulse strength Device type Location and date of manufacture Circuit breaker Only suitable for use in 3-phase systems Knowledge Manager Contact hazard protective cover over main current paths with sealing option Product version Article number Transparent protective cover over setting buttons Setting button for delay time Setting button for response current LED: ACTIVE and pre-alarm RESET button / tripped display Test button (test device) Auxiliary contacts 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 398 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Description of front panel view Display elements "Ready" signals and alarms "Ready" signal of the residual current device: The LED labeled "ACT" stands for ACTIVE and lights up when the residual current device is ready. Pre-alarm: Both the Basic RCD310 and the Basic RCD510 feature an alarm LED labeled "AL" (prealarm) which lights up promptly to indicate potential shutdown of the installation due to residual current. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 399 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices LED displays Tripped display The <RESET> button is not only used to reset the residual current device, but also as a mechanical indication that the unit has "tripped". If a residual current is detected or the button <TEST> is pressed, the button <RESET> is automatically released and so signals that the residual current device has tripped. Even when the residual current device is at zero potential, the <RESET> remains in the "TRIP" position. Residual current device is operating normally and has not tripped Residual current device has tripped 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 400 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Operator controls Insulation tests It is absolutely essential to isolate the evaluation electronics circuit while insulation tests are in progress in order to protect the circuit against potential damage on the one hand and to prevent detection of insulation faults due to the power pack on the other. This is done simply by withdrawing (15 to 17 mm) the circuit breaker which is anchored in the enclosure. Disconnection of the main conductor connections is thus unnecessary. On completion of the tests, the circuit breaker must be pushed back into position before the residual current device is commissioned. Testing and resetting the residual current device Testing Depending on operating conditions, the test button on the front panel of the residual current device should be pressed in order to function-test the device. The test button is labeled with the letter "T". If the test button is pressed, the device is tested immediately irrespective of the current delay time setting. If the test button is pressed, a residual current is simulated on a test winding attached to the summation current transformer. If the residual current device is functioning properly, it must trip the molded case circuit breaker/switch disconnector. The test button must be held down for at least two seconds. The design of the test button prevents unintentional actuation. Note The residual current device can be successfully tested only if it is connected to a voltage equal to at least 85% of the minimum rated operational voltage. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 401 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Resetting If the residual current device trips the molded case circuit breaker/switch disconnector due to a high residual current or actuation of the test button, the <RESET> button on the RCD is released. At the same time, the trip alarm switch which is mechanically coupled with the <RESET> button also signals that a trip has occurred. The <RESET> button is labeled with the letter "R". The following actions must be taken in order to reset the residual current device and reclose the main contacts of the molded case circuit breaker: 1. Press the <RESET> button on the residual current device. The "tripped" signal at the signaling contacts is canceled, the residual current device is now reset. 2. Reset and switch on the molded case circuit breaker or switch disconnector. Note If the main contacts of the molded case circuit breaker/switch disconnector are closed before the residual current device has been reset, the molded case circuit breaker/switch disconnector will be tripped again immediately (approx. 0.8 s) by the residual current device. This also applies if the fault which leads to the trip has already been rectified. Parameterization of the residual current device Setting button for response current In Setting button for delay time t (RCD510 only) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 402 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Button for setting the response current In The response current can be set in eight steps, ranging from 0.03 A to maximum 5 A. Each response current has a dedicated setting range. The corresponding response current is set as soon as the button is latched in the setting range. If the white setting arrow is resting between two setting ranges, the residual current device is automatically set to 0.03 A for safety reasons. If the response current is set to 0.03 A, the delay time setting t is deactivated and the breaker is tripped instantaneously. in order to afford personal protection in the case of direct contact. Note In order to protect personnel, it is necessary to seal the transparent protective cover so that the 30 mA setting range cannot be changed. The factory setting for the response current is 0.03 A. Button for setting the delay time t (RCD510 only) The delay time on RCD510 units can be set in eight steps, ranging from 0 (instantaneous) to a maximum value of 3000 ms. Each delay time has a dedicated setting range. The corresponding delay time is set as soon as the button is latched in the setting range. If the white setting arrow is resting between two setting ranges, the residual current device trips instantaneously in response to residual currents. The factory setting for the delay time is 0 ms. The delay time is not adjustable on the RCD310. The RCD310 always trips instantaneously. Possible procedure for setting the response current and the delay time 1. Switch off the molded case circuit breaker/switch disconnector. 2. Open the transparent protective cover over the setting buttons. 3. Adjust the setting values for response current and delay time on the residual current device to the maximum value in each case. 4. Switch on the molded case circuit breaker/switch disconnector. The LED labeled "ACT" on the residual current device now lights up, the residual current device is ready. 5. Reduce the setting for the response current until the LED labeled "AL" lights up. The residual current is now 30% higher than the response current setting. 6. By turning the setting button clockwise, set the next higher response current. The LED "AL" goes out, the correct response current is now set. 7. Set the required delay time. 8. Close the transparent protective cover over the setting buttons. The device is now fully parameterized. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 403 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Sealable protective covers of the residual current device Contact hazard protective cover over auxiliary contacts Transparent protective cover over setting buttons Contact hazard protective cover over main current paths Transparent protective cover over setting buttons In order to prevent unauthorized access to the setting buttons for In and t, the transparent cover over the settings buttons can be optionally sealed. Note In order to protect personnel, it is necessary to seal the transparent protective cover so that the 30 mA setting range cannot be changed. Contact hazard protective cover over main current paths including sealing option After the residual current device RCD310 or RCD510 has been mounted on the 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker or 3VA1 switch disconnector, a contact hazard protective cover is installed over the main current paths to protect against direct contact. This cover can be sealed optionally in order to block any attempt to dismantle the residual current device from the molded case circuit breaker/switch disconnector. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 404 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Terminals Note Cables for the following terminals must be routed separately from the main circuits. Their maximum cable length is 300 m. A number of auxiliary contacts which perform different functions are located underneath a contact hazard protective cover: Alarm switches TRIP-IND (TRIP INDICATOR) A tripped signal can be output via the floating contact for display via a warning lamp, for example. This trip alarm switch operates as soon as the residual current exceeds the response current setting value and has therefore caused the residual current device to trip. The standard trip alarm switch has changeover contacts and screw-type connections. The terminal designations of the relevant contact are shown in the diagram below. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 405 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices External control of the residual current release (RCR) MCCB-TRIP Although the RCR is utilized by the residual current device, it can also be accessed externally via a floating contact by means of the auxiliary contact MCCB-TRIP. The floating contact must be capable of switching a 5 mA current with a voltage supply of 24 V DC. The RCR functions as a shunt trip, allowing the circuit breaker to be tripped by remote control. External tripping of the molded case circuit breaker or switch disconnector via the RCR does not affect the residual current device. In other words, neither the "tripped" display on the residual current device nor the auxiliary contacts for the "tripped" signal are activated in the event of an external trip. It is not possible, however, to connect the contacts named above of several residual current devices in parallel. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 406 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Status indicators The table below illustrates the behavior of pre-alarm and tripped signals on RCD310 and RCD510 devices in response to various user actions and residual currents. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 407 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Terminal labeling and cable installation Labeling of terminals The labels for individual terminals are printed on the rear of the contact hazard protection cover for auxiliary contacts. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 408 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Cable installation Cable ducts for bringing out cables are provided to the left and right on the residual current device. Cable duct Other labels on front panel Approvals The residual current device bears the CE mark. For an overview of all approvals, please refer to Appendix (Page 647). For all queries relating to approvals, please contact Technical Support (Page 10). Technical specifications In ...A: Specifies the highest permissible rated operational current of the molded case circuit breaker/switch disconnector with which the residual current device may be combined. Ue ...V: ...Hz: Specifies the operating voltage range of the residual current device. Specifies the operating frequency range of the residual current device. Denotes the response behavior to residual currents. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 409 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Installation The side mounted residual current device is attached to the left-hand side of the molded case circuit breaker or switch disconnector. No tools are required: 1. Push the molded case circuit breaker/switch disconnector onto the residual current device along the guides at the top. 2. Push the molded case circuit breaker/switch disconnector backwards until its rear panel is flush with the rear panel of the residual current device. 3. Place the contact hazard protective cover over the circuit breaker/RCD assembly. 4. Attach the assembly to a mounting plate using the mounting screws or mount it on a DIN rail adapter. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 410 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices The side mounted residual current devices feature through-hole technology. Box terminals of the molded case circuit breaker Phase barriers Summation current transformer With this technology, the cables are simply guided through the summation current transformer and connected directly to the box terminals of the molded case circuit breaker or switch disconnector. The phase barriers not only ensure safe operation, but also serve as a guide for correct routing of cables. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 411 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Tripping In the event of a fault, the side mounted residual current device employs a residual current release (RCR) to trip the molded case circuit breaker or switch disconnector. This release is installed in the accessory compartment to the left of the handle. The RCR and the connecting cable are included in the scope of supply of the side mounted residual current device. The release is connected to the "RCR" contacts on the residual current device via a plug-in connection and receives a trip command if the residual current reaches or exceeds the preset value. Plug-in connection for RCR RCR 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 412 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Use of the residual current device as a pure display unit The RCD310 and RCD510 residual current devices can also operate as pure display units without a tripping function, i.e. they detect and signal residual currents, but do not trip the molded case circuit breaker or switch disconnector and therefore do not interrupt the circuit. To operate the RCD310 or RCD510 purely as a display unit, the residual current release (RCR) and its connecting cable are not installed. The residual current device can perform all its normal functions, e.g. status signaling, in "display mode." Note Because the RCR and its connecting cable have not been installed, the LED "ACT" flashes continuously. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 413 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Function overview The table below provides an overview of all the functions and data which are available in the residual current device environment: Value can be read Value can be edited Commands 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 414 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices 4.8.2.2 Loadside residual current devices Basic RCD320 and Basic RCD520 Loadside residual current devices are also available to order for 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers. Front view of Basic RCD320 and Basic RCD520 RCD320 Circuit breaker Location and date of manufacture Type designation Standard Approvals LED: ACTIVE and pre-alarm Knowledge Manager Rated insulation voltage and rated impulse strength Device type Product version Article number Setting button for response current Maximum rated operational current, rated operational voltage and frequency Transparent protective cover over setting buttons Test button (test device) RESET button / tripped display Auxiliary contacts Contact hazard protective cover over main current paths with sealing option 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 415 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices RCD520 Circuit breaker Location and date of manufacture Type designation Standard Approval LED: ACTIVE and pre-alarm Knowledge Manager Rated insulation voltage and rated impulse strength Device type Product version Article number Setting button for delay time Maximum rated operational current, rated operational voltage and frequency Setting button for response current Transparent protective cover over setting buttons Test button (test device) RESET button / tripped display Auxiliary contacts Contact hazard protective cover over main current paths with sealing option 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 416 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Description of front panel view Display elements "Ready" signals and alarms "Ready" signal of the residual current device: The LED labeled "ACT" stands for ACTIVE and lights up when the residual current device is ready. Pre-alarm: Both the Basic RCD320 and the Basic RCD520 feature an alarm LED labeled "AL" (prealarm) which lights up promptly to indicate potential shutdown of the installation due to residual current. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 417 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices LED displays Tripped display The <RESET> button is not only used to reset the residual current device, but also as a mechanical indication that the unit has "tripped". If a residual current is detected or the button <TEST> is pressed, the button <RESET> is automatically released and so signals that the residual current device has tripped. Even when the residual current device is at zero potential, the <RESET> remains in the "TRIP" position. Residual current device is operating normally and has not tripped Residual current device has tripped 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 418 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Operator controls Insulation tests It is absolutely essential to isolate the evaluation electronics circuit while insulation tests are in progress in order to protect the circuit against potential damage on the one hand and to prevent detection of insulation faults due to the power pack on the other. This is done simply by withdrawing (15 - 17 mm) the circuit breaker which is anchored in the enclosure. Disconnection of the main conductor connections is thus unnecessary. On completion of the tests, the circuit breaker must be pushed back into position before the residual current device is commissioned. Testing and resetting the residual current device Testing Depending on operating conditions, the test button on the front panel of the residual current device should be pressed in order to function-test the device. The test button is labeled with the letter "T". If the test button is pressed, the device is tested immediately irrespective of the current delay time setting. If the test button is pressed, a residual current is simulated on a test winding attached to the summation current transformer. If the residual current device is functioning properly, it must trip the molded case circuit breaker. The test button must be held down for at least 2 seconds. The design of the test button prevents unintentional actuation. Note The residual current device can be successfully tested only if it is connected to a voltage equal to at least 85% of the minimum rated operational voltage. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 419 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Resetting If the residual current device trips the molded case circuit breaker due to a high residual current or actuation of the test button, the <RESET> button on the RCD is released ("RCD" mode must be selected). At the same time, the trip alarm switch which is mechanically coupled with the <RESET> button also signals that a trip has occurred. The <RESET> button is labeled with the letter "R". The following actions must be taken in order to reset the residual current device and reclose the main contacts of the molded case circuit breaker: 1. Press the <RESET> button on the residual current device. The "tripped" signal at the signaling contacts is canceled, the residual current device is now reset. 2. Reset and switch on the molded case circuit breaker. Note The molded case circuit breaker cannot be switched on before the <RESET> button on the residual current device has been actuated and a residual current is no longer present (In > I). Parameterization of the residual current device Setting button for response current In Setting button for delay time t (RCD520 only) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 420 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Button for setting the response current In The response current can be set in eight steps, ranging from 0.03 A to maximum 5 A. Each response current has a dedicated setting range. The corresponding response current is set as soon as the button is latched in the setting range. If the white setting arrow is resting between two setting ranges, the residual current device is automatically set to 0.03 A for safety reasons. If the response current is set to 0.03 A, the delay time setting is deactivated and the breaker is tripped instantaneously in order to afford personal protection in the case of direct contact. Note In order to protect personnel, it is necessary to seal the transparent protective cover so that the 30 mA setting range cannot be changed. The factory setting for the response current is 0.03 A. Button for setting the delay time t (RCD520 only) The delay time on the RCD520 residual current device can be set in eight steps, ranging from 0 (instantaneous) to a maximum value of 3000 ms. Each delay time has a dedicated setting range. The corresponding delay time is set as soon as the button is latched in the setting range. If the white setting arrow is resting between two setting ranges, the residual current device trips instantaneously in response to residual currents. The factory setting for the tripping delay is 0 ms. The delay time is not adjustable on the RCD320. The RCD320 always trips instantaneously. Possible procedure for setting the response current and the delay time 1. Switch off the molded case circuit breaker. 2. Open the transparent protective cover over the setting buttons. 3. Adjust the setting values for response current and delay time on the residual current device to the maximum value in each case. 4. Switch on the molded case circuit breaker. The LED labeled "ACT" on the residual current device now lights up, the residual current device is ready. 5. Reduce the setting for the response current until the LED labeled "AL" lights up. The residual current is now 30% higher than the response current setting. 6. By turning the setting button clockwise, set the next higher response current. The LED "AL" goes out, the correct response current is now set. 7. Set the required delay time. 8. Close the transparent protective cover over the setting buttons. The device is now fully parameterized. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 421 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Sealable protective covers of the residual current device Contact hazard protective cover over main current paths and auxiliary contacts Transparent protective cover over setting buttons Transparent protective cover over setting buttons In order to prevent unauthorized access to the setting buttons for In and t, the transparent cover over the settings buttons can be optionally sealed. Note In order to protect personnel, it is necessary to seal the transparent protective cover so that the 30 mA setting range cannot be changed. Contact hazard protective cover over main current paths and auxiliary contacts including sealing option After the residual current device RCD320 or RCD520 has been mounted on the 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker, a contact hazard protective cover is installed over the main current paths to protect against direct contact. This cover can be sealed optionally in order to block any attempt to dismantle the residual current device from the molded case circuit breaker. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 422 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Terminals Note Cables for the following terminals must be routed separately from the main circuits. Their maximum cable length is 300 m. A number of auxiliary contacts which perform different functions are located underneath the contact hazard protective cover: Alarm switch TRIP-IND (TRIP INDICATOR) A tripped signal can be output via the floating contact for display via a warning lamp, for example. This trip alarm switch operates as soon as the residual current exceeds the response current setting value and has therefore caused the residual current device to trip. The standard trip alarm switch has changeover contacts and screw-type connections. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 423 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices The terminal designations of the relevant contact are shown in the diagram below. Status indicators The table below illustrates the behavior of pre-alarm and tripped signals on RCD320 and RCD520 devices in response to various user actions and residual currents. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 424 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Cable installation Cable ducts for bringing out cables are provided to the left and right on the residual current device. Cable duct Other labels on front panel Approvals The residual current device bears the CE mark. For an overview of all approvals, please refer to Appendix (Page 647). For all queries relating to approvals, please contact Technical Support (Page 10). Technical specifications In ...A: Specifies the highest permissible rated operational current of the molded case circuit breaker with which the residual current device may be combined. Ue ...V: ...Hz: Specifies the operating voltage range of the residual current device. Specifies the operating frequency range of the residual current device. Denotes the response behavior to residual currents. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 425 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Installation Installation Regardless of the type of connection technology installed on the 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker, the residual current devices RCD320 and RCD520 are mounted on the load side (i.e. beneath the thermal-magnetic trip unit) of the breaker: 1. Dismantle the loadside connection components of the molded case circuit breaker and install the supplied connection components for the residual current device. 2. Insert the residual current device into the T slots of the molded case circuit breaker. 3. Push the residual current device backwards until its rear panel is flush with the rear panel of the molded case circuit breaker. 4. Screw the molded case circuit breaker to the residual current device. Special connecting screws are provided on the line side of the residual current device for this purpose. 5. Place a contact hazard protective cover over the circuit breaker/RCD assembly. 6. Reinstall the loadside connection components of the molded case circuit breaker at the outgoing feeder end of the residual current device. 7. Attach the assembly to a mounting plate using the mounting screws. Note Since the outgoing feeder end of the residual current device has exactly the same connection contours as the 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker, all connection accessories, e.g. phase barrier, terminal cover, can also be mounted on the residual current device. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 426 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Tripping The molded case circuit breaker is tripped by means of a direct-acting tappet which engages in the breaker mechanism from the residual current device. The electromagnetic trip unit is integrated in the residual current device. Function overview The table below provides an overview of all the functions and data which are available in the residual current device environment: Value can be read Value can be edited Commands 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 427 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices 4.8.2.3 Loadside residual current device Basic RCD520B Front view of the Basic RCD520B Circuit breaker Type designation and standard Approvals LED: ACTIVE, pre-alarm and MONITORING Knowledge Manager Location and date of manufacture Rated insulation voltage and rated impulse strength Device type Product version Article number Maximum rated operational current, rated operational voltage and frequency Transparent protective cover over setting buttons Selection slide switch for MONITORING / RCD mode Button for setting tripping characteristic type B / type B+ Setting button for response current Setting button for delay time Test button (test device) RESET button / tripped display Auxiliary contacts Contact hazard protective cover over main current paths with sealing option 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 428 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Description of front panel view Display elements "Ready" signal, alarms and monitoring "Ready" signal of the residual current device: The LED labeled "ACT" stands for ACTIVE and lights up when the residual current device is ready to operate. Pre-alarm: The Basic RCD520B features an alarm LED labeled "AL" which lights up promptly to indicate potential shutdown of the installation due to residual current. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 429 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Monitoring: The "MONITORING" LED indicates the operating mode of the RCD520B. When the selection slide switch is set to "MONITORING", the "MONITORING" LED is lit and the "ACT" LED flashes. RCD520B Basic functions purely as a display unit without a tripping function. LED displays 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 430 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Tripped display In RCD mode, the <RESET> button is used not only to reset the residual current device, but also as a mechanical indication that the unit has "tripped". If a residual current is detected or the button <TEST> is pressed, the button <RESET> is automatically released and so signals that the residual current device has tripped. Even when the residual current device is at zero potential, the <RESET> remains in the "TRIP" position. Residual current device is operating normally and has not tripped Residual current device has tripped 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 431 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Operator controls Insulation tests It is absolutely essential to isolate the evaluation electronics circuit while insulation tests are in progress in order to protect the circuit against potential damage on the one hand and to prevent detection of insulation faults due to the power pack on the other. This is done simply by withdrawing (15 to 17 mm) the circuit breaker which is anchored in the enclosure. Disconnection of the main conductor connections is thus unnecessary. On completion of the tests, the circuit breaker must be pushed back into position before the residual current device is commissioned. Testing and resetting the residual current device Testing Depending on operating conditions, the test button on the front panel of the residual current device should be pressed in order to function-test the device. The test button is labeled with the letter "T". If the test button is pressed, the device is tested immediately irrespective of the current delay time setting. If the test button is pressed, a residual current is simulated on a test winding attached to the summation current transformer. If the residual current device is functioning properly, it must trip the molded case circuit breaker (in "RCD" mode). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 432 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices The test button must be held down for at least two seconds. The design of the test button prevents unintentional actuation. When the residual current device is in "MONITORING" mode, it behaves in the same way as in RCD mode (e.g. when the tripped auxiliary switch operates), the only difference being that the molded case circuit breaker is not tripped and the <RESET> button is not released. Note The residual current device can be successfully tested only if it is connected to a voltage equal to at least 85% of the minimum rated operational voltage. Resetting If the residual current device trips the molded case circuit breaker due to a high residual current or actuation of the test button, the <RESET> button on the RCD is released ("RCD" mode must be selected). At the same time, the trip alarm switch which is mechanically coupled with the <RESET> button also signals that a trip has occurred. The <RESET> button is labeled with the letter "R". The following actions must be taken in order to reset the residual current device and reclose the main contacts of the molded case circuit breaker: 1. Press the <RESET> button on the residual current device. The "tripped" signal at the signaling contacts is canceled, the residual current device is now reset. 2. Reset and switch on the molded case circuit breaker. Note The molded case circuit breaker cannot be switched on before the <RESET> button on the residual current device has been actuated and a residual current is no longer present (In > I). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 433 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Parameterization of the residual current device Button for setting tripping characteristic type B / type B+ Setting button for response current In Setting button for delay time t Button for setting the tripping characteristic This rotary switch can be used to change the tripping characteristic of the RCD520B between type B (according to IEC 62423 and IEC 60947-2) and type B+ (according to DIN VDE 0664-400 for In = 30 to 300 mA and for frequencies over 1 kHz). The same conditions apply for type B+ as for type B, i.e. the tripping characteristics of type B and type B+ are identical up to 1 kHz. With device type B+ however, the frequency range for the detection of residual currents extends up to 20 kHz. Tripping takes place below 420 mA within this frequency range to provide increased fire protection. With type B, the tripping threshold increases above 1 kHz to prevent spurious tripping due to discharge currents, particularly in conjunction with frequency converters. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 434 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Button for setting the response current In The response current can be set in 8 steps, ranging from 0.03 A to 0.3 A for type B+ and 0.03 A to maximum 5 A for type B (for detailed information, see "Overview of selection settings in conjunction with In"). Each response current has a dedicated setting range. The corresponding response current is set as soon as the button is latched in the setting range. If the white setting arrow is resting between two setting ranges, the residual current device is automatically set to 0.03 A for safety reasons. If the response current is set to 0.03 A, the delay time setting is deactivated and the breaker is tripped instantaneously. in order to afford personal protection in the case of direct contact. Note In order to protect personnel, it is necessary to seal the transparent protective cover so that the 30 mA setting range cannot be changed. The factory setting for the response current is 0.03 A. Button for setting the delay time t The delay time on the RCD520B residual current device can be set in 10 steps, ranging from 0 (instantaneous) to a maximum value of 10000 ms. Each delay time has a dedicated setting range. The corresponding delay time is set as soon as the button is latched in the setting range. If the white setting arrow is resting between two setting ranges, the residual current device trips instantaneously in response to residual currents. The factory setting for the delay time is 0 ms. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 435 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Possible procedure for setting the response current and the delay time 1. Switch off the molded case circuit breaker. 2. Open the transparent protective cover over the setting buttons. 3. Adjust the setting values for response current and delay time on the residual current device to the maximum value in each case. 4. Switch on the molded case circuit breaker. The LED labeled "ACT" now lights up (RCD mode) on the residual current device or the "ACT" LED flashes and the "MONITORING" LED lights up (monitoring mode); the residual current device is ready. 5. Reduce the setting for the response current until the LED labeled "AL" lights up. The residual current is now 30% higher than the response current setting. 6. By turning the setting button clockwise, set the next higher response current. The LED "AL" goes out, the correct response current is now set. 7. Set the required delay time. 8. Close the transparent protective cover over the setting buttons. The device is now fully parameterized. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 436 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Selecting the operating mode Selection switch for RCD / MONITORING mode Two different operating modes can be selected using the selection switch on the RCD520B: RCD mode The device functions as a residual current device in RCD mode. When I > In, the residual current device trips the molded case circuit breaker by means of a plunger. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 437 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Die <RESET> button on the residual current device releases, thus signaling that the residual current device has tripped. At the same time, the trip alarm switch (TRIP-IND) operates so that the tripped status can be transmitted to an indicator light in the panel door, for example (see also Table "Scenario A" in chapter "Connecting terminals", section "Status indicators"). The molded case circuit cannot be switched back on until the fault has been rectified and the <RESET> button has been pressed. The residual current device is set to RCD mode as supplied. MONITORING mode In MONITORING mode, the device functions purely as a display unit. In this mode, the "ACT" LED flashes and the "MONITORING" LED is lit. If the residual current exceeds the response current set on the RCD520B, this does not result in tripping of the molded case circuit breaker. The <RESET> button also remains in the depressed position and is not released. The trip alarm switch (TRIP-IND) operates however. As soon as the residual current falls below the threshold again, the trip alarm switch resets immediately (see also table "Scenario C" in chapter "Connecting terminals", section "Status indicators"). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 438 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices It is possible to switch between the two operating modes at all times, irrespective of whether the RCD520B residual current device is operating in a running application. Proper functioning of the selection switch is continuously monitored. In the event of a malfunction, the device automatically switches to RCD mode internally, thereby excluding the possibility of a safety-related risk. Overview of selection settings in conjunction with In: 1) Note: If In = 0.03 A, the circuit breaker trips instantaneously irrespective of the setting of t. Note Observe the operating instructions. Functional testing must be performed before the residual current device is put into operation. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 439 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Sealable protective covers of the residual current device Contact hazard protective cover over main current paths and auxiliary contacts Transparent protective cover over setting buttons Transparent protective cover over setting buttons In order to prevent unauthorized access to the settings for In, t, type B/B+ and RCD/MONITORING mode, the transparent cover over the settings buttons can be optionally sealed. Note In order to protect personnel, it is necessary to seal the transparent protective cover so that the 30 mA setting range cannot be changed. Contact hazard protective cover over main current paths and auxiliary contacts including sealing option After the residual current device RCD520B has been mounted on the 3VA11 molded case circuit breaker, a contact hazard protective cover is installed over the main current paths to protect against direct contact. This cover can be sealed optionally in order to block any attempt to dismantle the residual current device from the molded case circuit breaker. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 440 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Terminals A number of auxiliary contacts which perform different functions are located underneath the contact hazard protective cover: Alarm switch Floating auxiliary contacts for 2 different alarms are provided: TRIP-IND (TRIP INDICATOR) A tripped signal can be output via this auxiliary switch, e.g. for connection to a warning lamp. This trip alarm switch operates as soon as the residual current exceeds the set response current, irrespective of whether the residual current device is in RCD or MONITORING mode. Since the relay for the tripped signal (TRIP-IND) is a bistable relay, the relay contact states remain "stored" even in the event of a power outage. When the power supply recovers, the indicated relay contact states are those which existed before the power outage. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 441 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices AL Signaling switch for pre-alarm. This auxiliary switch operates as soon as the residual current exceeds 30% of the operating current setting value. The relay for the pre-alarm signal (AL) drops out again as soon as the residual current reaches or falls below the prealarm threshold of 30%. Since the relay for the pre-alarm signal (AL) is a monostable relay, the relay switches back to the original state in the event of a power outage. The standard auxiliary switches for pre-alarms and tripped signals have changeover contacts and screw-type connections. The terminal designations of the relevant contact, the maximum rated voltage and the current carrying capacity are shown in the diagram below. Each relay contact has a maximum rated operational current of 5 A at 250 V AC (AC-13). The common terminal (11C = Common) is designed such that the maximum permissible current of 5 A can be applied to both relay contacts (TRIP-IND and AL) simultaneously. Note Cables for the following terminals must be routed separately from the main circuits. Their maximum cable length is 300 m. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 442 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Use of signaling switches in SELV and PELV circuits: The signaling switches TRIP-IND and AL meet the requirements for safety isolation (including double insulation between the auxiliary current paths and the main circuit). Requirement: 1. Molded case circuit breakers equipped with a residual current device are operated with a rated operational voltage of 480 V AC. 2. The combination is installed at the distribution system level (overvoltage category III according to DIN EN-60947-1 Annex H). If these two requirements are met, the signaling switches are suitable for SELV and PELV circuits. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 443 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Status indicators The table below illustrates the behavior of pre-alarm and tripped signals on RCD520B devices in response to various user actions and residual currents. Scenario A: Residual current device is in RCD mode, infeed at the top 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 444 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Scenario B: Residual current device is in RCD mode, infeed at the bottom 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 445 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Scenario C: Residual current device is in MONITORING mode, infeed at the top 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 446 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Scenario D: Residual current device is in MONITORING mode, infeed at the bottom 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 447 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Cable installation Cable ducts for bringing out cables are provided to the left and right on the residual current device. Cable duct Other labels on front panel Approvals The residual current device bears the CE mark. For an overview of all approvals, please refer to Appendix. For all queries relating to approvals, please contact Technical Support (Page 10). Technical specifications In ...A: Specifies the highest permissible rated operational current of the molded case circuit breaker with which the residual current device may be combined. Ue ...V: ...Hz: Specifies the operating voltage range of the residual current device. Specifies the operating frequency range of the residual current device. Denotes the response behavior to residual currents. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 448 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Installation Installation Regardless of the type of connection technology installed on the 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker, the RCD520B residual current device is mounted on the load side (i.e. beneath the thermal-magnetic trip unit) of the breaker: 1. Dismantle the loadside connection components of the molded case circuit breaker and install the supplied connection components for the residual current device. 2. Insert the residual current device into the T slots of the molded case circuit breaker. 3. Push the residual current device backwards until its rear panel is flush with the rear panel of the molded case circuit breaker. 4. Screw the molded case circuit breaker to the residual current device. Special connecting screws are provided on the line side of the residual current device for this purpose. 5. Place a contact hazard protective cover over the circuit breaker/RCD assembly. 6. Reinstall the loadside connection components of the molded case circuit breaker at the outgoing feeder end of the residual current device. 7. Attach the assembly to a mounting plate using the mounting screws. Note Since the outgoing feeder end of the residual current device has exactly the same connection contours as the 3VA11 molded case circuit breaker, all connection accessories, e.g. phase barrier, terminal cover, can also be mounted on the residual current device. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 449 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Tripping The molded case circuit breaker is tripped by means of a direct-acting tappet which engages in the breaker mechanism from the residual current device. Periodic self-test In addition to manually checking the proper functioning of the residual current device by pressing the test button, cyclic self-tests are performed inside the residual current device. Checks are performed periodically, for example, to ensure that: the microcontroller is functioning properly the physical connection between the printed-circuit board and the maglatch is interrupted the current transformers and the detection electronics are functioning properly 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 450 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Function overview The table below provides an overview of all the functions and data which are available in the residual current device environment: Value can be read Value can be edited Commands 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 451 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices 4.8.2.4 Loadside residual current device Advanced RCD820 The "Advanced" residual current devices of type RCD820 are available as an accessory for 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers. Front view of Advanced RCD820 Circuit breaker LED: ACTIVE, communication, pre-alarm Knowledge Manager Location and date of manufacture Auxiliary contacts Type designation Tripped display Setting button for delay time Rated insulation voltage and rated impulse strength Device type Product version Setting button for response current Article number Maximum rated operational current, rated operational voltage and frequency Transparent protective cover over setting buttons Test button (test device) Approval Standard RCD-to-ETU connecting cable Contact hazard protective cover over main current paths with sealing option 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 452 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Description of front panel view Display elements "Ready" signals, communication status and alarms "Ready" signal of the residual current device: The LED labeled "ACT" stands for ACTIVE and lights up when the device is ready to operate. Communication status: The LED labeled "COM" stands for COMMUNICATION and indicates the communication status of the residual current device. Pre-alarms: The Advanced RCD820 has two LEDs labeled "AL1" (ALARM 1) and "AL2" (ALARM 2) which light up successively or simultaneously to promptly indicate potential shutdown of the installation due to residual current. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 453 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices LED displays 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 454 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Tripped display If the residual current device is tripped by a residual current, a remote trip command or actuation of the test button, the trip is signaled mechanically on the RCD, i.e. by a rotating disk. Residual current device is operating normally and has not tripped Residual current device has tripped Note In the case of infeed from below, an auxiliary switch must be connected by means of auxiliary contacts CB-S to ensure correct functioning of the tripped display (for description, see auxiliary contacts CB-S). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 455 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Operator controls Insulation tests It is absolutely essential to isolate the evaluation electronics circuit while insulation tests are in progress in order to protect the circuit against potential damage on the one hand and to prevent detection of insulation faults due to the power pack on the other. This is done simply by withdrawing (15 to 17 mm) the circuit breaker which is anchored in the enclosure. Disconnection of the main conductor connections is thus unnecessary. On completion of the tests, the circuit breaker must be pushed back into position before the residual current device is commissioned. Testing and resetting the residual current device Testing Depending on operating conditions, the test button on the front panel of the residual current device should be pressed in order to function-test the device. The test button is labeled with the letter "T". If the test button is pressed, the device is tested immediately irrespective of the current delay time setting. If the test button is pressed, a residual current is simulated on a test winding attached to the summation current transformer. If the residual current device is functioning properly, it must trip the molded case circuit breaker. The test button must be held down for at least 2 seconds. The design of the test button prevents unintentional actuation. Note The residual current device can be successfully tested only if it is connected to a voltage equal to at least 85% of the minimum rated operational voltage. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 456 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Resetting The residual current device and the "tripped" display are reset by means of the handle of the molded case circuit breaker, or the handle of the manual operator or by means of the motor operator. Parameterization of the residual current device Setting button for response current In Setting button for delay time t Button for setting the response current In The response current can be set in ten steps, ranging from 0.03 A to maximum 30 A. A residual current of type A is detected within the 0.03 A to 10 A range. If the response current is set to 30 A, the device detects only residual currents of type AC (i.e. purely sinusoidal currents). Each response current has a dedicated setting range. The corresponding response current is set as soon as the button is latched in the setting range. If the white setting arrow is resting between two setting ranges, the residual current device is automatically set to 0.03 A for safety reasons. If the response current is set to 0.03 A, the delay time setting is deactivated and the breaker is tripped instantaneously. in order to afford personal protection in the case of direct contact. Note In order to protect personnel, it is necessary to seal the transparent protective cover so that the 30 mA setting range cannot be changed. The factory setting for the response current is 0.03 A. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 457 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Button for setting the delay time t The delay time can be set in ten steps, ranging from 0 (instantaneous) to a maximum value of 10000 ms. Each delay time has a dedicated setting range. The corresponding delay time is set as soon as the button is latched in the setting range. If the white setting arrow is resting between two setting ranges, the residual current device trips instantaneously in response to residual currents. The factory setting for the delay time is 0 ms. Possible procedure for setting the response current and the delay time 1. Switch off the molded case circuit breaker. 2. Open the transparent protective cover over the setting buttons. 3. Adjust the setting values for response current and delay time on the residual current device to the maximum value in each case. 4. Switch on the molded case circuit breaker. The LED labeled "ACT" on the residual current device now lights up, the residual current device is ready. 5. Reduce the setting for the response current until the LED labeled "AL1" lights up. The residual current is now 30% higher than the response current setting. 6. By turning the setting button clockwise, set the next higher response current. The LED "AL1" goes out, the correct response current is now set. 7. Set the required delay time. 8. Close the transparent protective cover over the setting buttons. The device is now fully parameterized. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 458 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Sealable protective covers of the residual current device Contact hazard protective cover over main current paths and auxiliary contacts Transparent protective cover over setting buttons Transparent protective cover over setting buttons In order to prevent unauthorized access to the setting buttons for In and t, the transparent cover over the settings buttons can be optionally sealed. Note In order to protect personnel, it is necessary to seal the transparent protective cover so that the 30 mA setting range cannot be changed. Contact hazard protective cover over main current paths and auxiliary contacts including sealing option After the residual current device RCD820 has been mounted on the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker, a contact hazard protective cover is installed over the main current paths to protect against direct contact. This cover can be sealed optionally in order to block any attempt to dismantle the residual current device from the molded case circuit breaker. Terminals Note Cables for the following terminals must be routed separately from the main circuits. Their maximum cable length is 300 m. A number of auxiliary contacts which perform a broad range of functions are located underneath the contact hazard protective cover. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 459 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Alarm switch Floating auxiliary contacts for 3 different alarms are provided: AL1 Signaling switch for pre-alarm threshold 1. This auxiliary switch operates as soon as the residual current exceeds 30 % of the operating current setting value. AL2 Signaling switch for pre-alarm threshold 2. This auxiliary switch operates as soon as the residual current exceeds 60 % of the operating current setting value. TRIP-IND (TRIP INDICATOR) A tripped signal can be output via this auxiliary switch for connection to a warning lamp, for example. The switch operates as soon as the residual current reaches or exceeds the response current setting value and has therefore caused the residual current device to trip. Switches with changeover contacts and screw-type connections are used as standard as auxiliary switches for pre-alarms and tripped signals. The terminal designations of the relevant contact, the maximum rated voltage and the current carrying capacity are shown in the diagram below. Each relay contact has a maximum rated operational current of 5 A at 230 V AC. Since the terminals have a maximum current carrying capacity of 13.5 A, the current flow across the common terminal (01C = Common) must be limited to 13.5 A when all three signaling switches are used. The relays for the pre-alarm signals (AL1 and AL2) drop out again as soon as the residual current reaches or exceeds the relevant pre-alarm thresholds. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 460 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices The relay for the tripped signal (TRIP-IND) drops out again as soon as the residual current device is reset again by means of the molded case circuit breaker handle, or the handle of the manual or motor operator. Since the relay for the tripped signal (TRIP-IND) is a bistable relay, the relay contact states remain "stored" even in the event of a power outage. When the power supply recovers, the indicated relay contact states are those which existed before the power outage. Other auxiliary inputs Two further auxiliary inputs in the form of screw terminals are also provided: REMOTE-T The residual current device can be remotely tripped via this auxiliary input for test purposes ("Remote test button"), for example. To utilize this function, the customer must connect, for example, a pushbutton (NO contact) to terminals 1Y1 and 1Y2 by means of a two-core, twisted cable which must not be more than 300 m in length. The switching contact should have a minimum breaking capacity of 5 V / 1 mA. The residual current device trips if the pushbutton is actuated for at least 2 seconds. The terminals 1Y1 and 1Y2 are galvanically isolated from the mains supply (functional extra low voltage, FELV). In special cases, such as cable installation outdoors, the amplitude of overvoltages (e.g. overvoltages due to thunderstorms) between the conductor and ground must be limited to 2.5 kV by suitable routing of the cable or other protection measures. Each residual current device requires a separate NO contact and cable for remote tripping. It is not possible to use one cable and connect two or more residual current devices in parallel. It is necessary to use an unshielded cable or a shielded, twisted-pair cable with a maximum capacitance of 36 nF as well as a maximum resistance of 50 ohms (total length out and back). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 461 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices CB-S (Circuit Breaker Switch) If the molded case circuit breaker / RCD820 assembly has an infeed from below (reverse feed), it is absolutely essential to install an auxiliary switch (internal accessory, circuit breaker with article number 3VA9988-0AA13) for interrogation of the circuit breaker status to allow resetting of the tripped signal. In this case, the "normally closed contact", i.e. cable at .1C and .2NC, of the changeover contact must be connected. This switch is installed in the accessory compartment of the molded case circuit breaker. The auxiliary switch is then connected to terminals 2Y1 and 2Y2 of the floating contact CB-S. It is necessary to use an unshielded or shielded twisted-pair cable, no more than 1 m in length, with a maximum capacitance of 36 nF as well as a maximum resistance of 50 ohms (total length out and back). When the molded case circuit breaker is reset and then switched on again, the contacts .1C and .2NC of the auxiliary switch are closed and the tripped display on the residual current device is reset. The auxiliary switch is not included in the scope of supply and must be ordered separately. The method for connecting the auxiliary switch to auxiliary contact CB-S is described in the Operating Instructions for the RCD820 residual current device. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 462 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Status indicators The table below illustrates the behavior of pre-alarm and tripped signals on RCD820 devices in response to various user actions and residual currents. 1) Infeed at top 2) Infeed at bottom 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 463 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Cable installation Cable ducts for bringing out cables are provided to the left and right on the residual current device. Cable duct Other labels on front panel Approvals The residual current device bears the CE mark. For an overview of all approvals, please refer to Appendix (Page 647). For all queries relating to approvals, please contact Technical Support (Page 10). Technical specifications In ...A: Specifies the highest permissible rated operational current of the molded case circuit breaker with which the residual current device may be combined. Ue ...V: ...Hz: Specifies the operating voltage range of the residual current device. Specifies the operating frequency range of the residual current device. Denotes the response behavior to residual currents. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 464 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Installation Installation Regardless of the type of connection technology installed on the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker, the RCD820 is mounted underneath the electronic trip unit of the circuit breaker. 1. Dismantle the loadside connection components of the molded case circuit breaker and install the supplied connection components for the residual current device. 2. Insert the residual current device into the T slots of the molded case circuit breaker. 3. Push the residual current device backwards until its rear panel is flush with the rear panel of the molded case circuit breaker. 4. Screw the molded case circuit breaker to the residual current device. Special connecting screws are provided on the line side of the residual current device for this purpose. 5. Place a contact hazard protective cover over the circuit breaker/RCD assembly. 6. Reinstall the loadside connection components of the molded case circuit breaker at the outgoing feeder end of the residual current device. 7. Attach the assembly to a mounting plate using the mounting screws. Note Since the outgoing feeder end of the residual current device has exactly the same connection contours as the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker, all connection accessories, such as phase barriers and terminal covers, can also be mounted on the residual current device. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 465 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Installation of the RCD-ETU connecting cable 1. Remove the contact hazard protective cover. 2. Open the slide over the interface <X3 RCD>. The slide is fitted as a protective guard (e.g. to protect the interface against soiling). 3. Insert one end of the connecting cable into the interface on the residual current device. The interfaces and the connecting cable are labeled to ensure that the cable ends are inserted in the right interfaces. Note Plug in or remove the RCD-ETU cable only when the residual current device is deenergized. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 466 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices 4. Insert the other end of the connecting cable into the interface <X3 RCD> on the ETU. The RCD-to-ETU connecting cable is free of silicone and halogen and is electrically isolated from the main circuits. The connecting cable is included in the scope of supply. Tripping The residual current device utilizes the maglatch of the electronic trip unit (ETU) in order to trip the molded case circuit breaker. It therefore needs to be connected to the ETU of the molded case circuit breaker. This connection is made by means of the RCD-ETU connecting cable. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 467 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Use of the residual current device as a pure display unit The RCD820 residual current device can also operate as a pure display unit without a tripping function, i.e. it detects and signals residual currents, but does not trip the molded case circuit breaker or interrupt the circuit. If the RCD820 device is to operate as a pure display unit, the connecting cable between the residual current device and the ETU of the molded case circuit breaker can be omitted. With the exception of its communications interface functionality, the residual current device can perform all its normal functions (e.g. status signaling via LEDs or alarm switches) in "display mode". Since there is no connection between the RCD and the ETU, the LED "ACT" flashes continuously and the LED "COM" is not illuminated even if a 5-series or 8-series ETU is installed. Communications interface The RCD-ETU connecting cable not only carries the trip command, but also acts as the communications interface between the residual current device and the 3VA communication system. Precondition for interface functionality: The 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker is equipped with a communication-capable, electronic trip unit (ETU 5-series or 8-series). The molded case circuit breaker is linked to the communication system via a COM060 communication module. If the residual current device is linked to the communication system, the link can be used not only to interrogate the device for important status, diagnostic, maintenance and identification data, but also to transmit commands. The residual current device is normally supplied with power by the main current paths. When the molded case circuit breaker is switched off, the power supply will be interrupted if the feed is at the top. In order to maintain the link to the communication system when the power supply from the main current paths is disconnected, the residual current device is supplied with the necessary power by the COM060 communication module. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 468 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices The table below provides an overview of all the functions and data which are available in the residual current device environment: Value can be read Value can be edited Commands 4.8.2.5 1) Reset by means of the molded case circuit breaker handle, or the handle of the manual or motor operator 2) Reset in combination with motor operators 3) On request Special operating modes of residual current devices Residual current devices also function in 1 and 2-phase operation. They are unrestricted in functionality, including the test circuit, if at least 2 conductors are connected (2-pole operation). The phases can be selected freely. Please note the following: 1. Adhere to the permissible rated operational voltage. 2. If a connection to the N pole (N) is made in a 4-pole MCCB-RCD assembly, the current setting of the N pole determines the maximum current carrying capacity of the circuit. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 469 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices If the N pole is protected, the 100% setting (protection) is recommended with the corresponding cable cross-section in the N pole. According to IEC 60947, the neutral conductor must be connected to the designated terminal in the case of a 4-pole breaker. Connecting a line conductor to the switching pole labeled N is not permitted. 3. The same conditions apply in 1 or 2-phase operation as in 3-phase operation with respect to the parameter settings of the residual current device (In or t) or the trip unit of the molded case circuit breaker (e.g. Ir, Ii). Connection of residual current device for 1-phase operation The following 3 and 4-pole molded case circuit breakers equipped with a residual current device can be operated in a single phase (L to N) with 2-pole switching: Loadside residual current devices for 3VA1: RCD320 and RCD520 Permissible rated operational voltage: 100 - 277 VAC 50/60 Hz Loadside residual current devices for 3VA2: RCD820 Permissible rated operational voltage: 100 - 400 VAC 50/60 Hz Wiring example for 1-phase operation, 2-pole switching (3 and 4-pole molded case circuit breakers) 3-pole 4-pole 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 470 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Connection of residual current device for 2-phase operation The following 3 and 4-pole molded case circuit breakers equipped with a residual current device can be operated in two phases (L to L) with 2-pole switching: Loadside residual current devices for 3VA1: RCD320 and RCD520 Permissible rated operational voltage: 127 - 480 VAC 50/60 Hz Side mounted residual current devices for 3VA1: RCD310 and RCD510 Permissible rated operational voltage: 127 - 480 VAC 50/60 Hz Loadside residual current devices for 3VA2: RCD820 Permissible rated operational voltage: 127 - 690 VAC 50/60 Hz Wiring example for 2-phase operation, 2-pole switching (3 and 4-pole molded case circuit breakers) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 471 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices 4.8.2.6 Technical specifications RCD type A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 472 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices 1) 85 V AC minimum voltage (with phase to neutral conductor) for operation of the test function 2) Reset by means of the circuit breaker handle 3) Via MO or SEO 4) Requirement: The 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker is equipped with an ETU 5-series or 8-series 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 473 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 474 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices RCD type B 1) The 3-pole version of RCD520B is installed in a 4-pole enclosure 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 475 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 476 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 477 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices 4.8.3 Modular residual current device Thanks to their design, the modular residual current devices (MRCD) type A 5SV8101-6KK and type B (5SV8101-4KK, 5SV8111-4KK / 0 to 2000 Hz) are compatible with all molded case circuit breaker designs and can therefore be combined with 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers/switch disconnectors and with molded case circuit breakers from the 3VA2 range. The MRCD is installed on a DIN rail (35 mm) as close as possible to the molded case circuit breaker/switch disconnector. Operating principle The MRCD is connected to a summation current transformer through which all live conductors (including neutral conductor where applicable) must be routed. The residual current is detected in the summation current transformer and transferred to the MRCD. If this current exceeds the limit value for the set rated residual current In, the residual current device trips the molded case circuit breaker/switch disconnector by means of a shunt trip or undervoltage release. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 478 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Front view Parameterization of the MRCD For a description of MRCD parameterization procedures and other operating options, please refer to the operating instructions for the unit. Summation current transformer 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 479 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Suitable summation current transformers Depending on the rated operational current or maximum current of the circuit to be monitored, the following summation current transformers can be used: MRCD type A: MRCD type B (5SV8101-4KK, 5SV8111-4KK / 0 ... 2000 Hz): 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 480 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Alignment of conductors in the summation current transformer In order to prevent measurement errors or spurious tripping, it is absolutely essential to ensure that the conductors are properly aligned or arranged in the summation current transformer. Note With MRCD type A, the summation current transformer used for the application must have an inside diameter which is at least 1.5 times larger than the outside diameter of the conductors which pass through it. With MRCD type B, the inside diameter must be at least 2 times larger. If the combination MRCD, summation current transformer, trip unit and molded case circuit breaker/switch disconnector is to be installed, the minimum clearances must be observed. For more information, refer to the operating instructions. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 481 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices Combinations of molded case circuit breaker, MRCD and shunt trip/undervoltage release Modular residual current devices, molded case circuit breakers, and shunt trips or undervoltage releases UVR can be combined as indicated in the tables below: MRCD type A: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 482 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.8 Residual current devices MRCS type B: 1) Cannot be combined with 3VA23 and 3VA24 molded case circuit breakers 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 483 Accessories 4.9 Communication and system integration 4.9 Communication and system integration 4.9.1 System description Communication-capable 3VA molded case circuit breakers are presented in this chapter. You will find out about the components that 3VA molded case circuit breakers require in order to communicate, how these components are interconnected and what properties they have. The advantages of optimum integration of 3VA molded case circuit breakers into a software or communication system are as follows: Acquisition of breaker status Remote control Remote parameterization Monitoring of capacity utilization Acquisition of consumption and performance data Local signaling via the EFB300 external function box Local visualization of 3VA molded case circuit breakers A 3VA molded case circuit breaker can utilize all these functions only if a COM060 communication module is installed in the 3VA breaker and connected to a COM800 breaker data server for up to eight 3VA molded case circuit breakers, or a COM100 breaker data server for one breaker. You can find detailed information on the communication module and breaker data server and the communication link of the molded case circuit breaker in the 3VA Communication System Manual. 4.9.2 Communication system of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker The following components combine with the 3VA molded case circuit breaker to create a communication system: Electronic trip unit (ETU) COM800 / COM100 breaker data server Optional expansion modules for three other communication networks COM060 communication module Draw-out unit with communication link Synchronizable motor operator SEO520 EFB300 external function box (EFB) DSP800 display Commissioning and service software: powerconfig 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 484 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.9 Communication and system integration The diagram below presents the components which render a 3VA molded case circuit breaker capable of communication. Communication system architecture for 3VA The central components of communication-capable 3VA molded case circuit breakers are the ETUs 5-series or 8-series. You can find additional information in the 3VA Communication System Manual. There the components are regarded only as suppliers of information or receivers of commands. Typical communication partners are: SIMATIC S7 powermanager While reference is frequently made to these systems, they are not an integral part of the 3VA communication system. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 485 Accessories 4.9 Communication and system integration 4.9.3 COM800 / COM100 breaker data server The COM800/COM100 breaker data servers can be used to integrate communicationcapable 3VA molded case circuit breakers with ETUs 5-series and 8-series into communication networks of various types. The COM800 breaker data server supports a maximum of eight 3VA molded case circuit breakers The COM100 breaker data server supports one 3VA molded case circuit breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers can be connected to higher-level communication networks by the following methods: Direct Ethernet connection to Modbus TCP 7KM PAC PROFIBUS DP expansion module to PROFIBUS DPV1 / V2 7KM PAC Switched Ethernet PROFINET expansion module to PROFINET IO and PROFIenergy, as well as Modbus TCP 7KM PAC RS 485 expansion module for Modbus RTU 3VA molded case circuit breakers are typically linked to the power monitoring software powermanager or the automation concept TIA (Totally Integrated Automation) via a communication network. 3VA molded case circuit breakers can also be connected to the commissioning and service software powerconfig. The 3VA molded case circuit breakers can also be linked to many non-Siemens systems through such communication networks. Furthermore, local visualization on the DSP800 display can be implemented with the COM800/COM100 breaker data server. Example: Configuration of the COM800/COM100 breaker data server with a 3VA-line of three 3VA molded case circuit breakers and with connection to the power monitoring software powermanager (left), to the DSP800 (center) and to the commissioning and service software powerconfig (right). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 486 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.9 Communication and system integration To establish a communication link, the COM800 or COM100 breaker data server is connected via the 3VA-line to the COM060 communication module of the relevant circuit breaker. PAC expansion modules T-connector From a 24 V DC supply, the COM800/COM100 breaker data server supplies power to all the connected 3VA molded case circuit breakers and the following components: COM060 communication module ETUs 5-series and 8-series Position signaling switch for draw-out socket 7KM PAC PROFIBUS DP expansion module 7KM PAC Switched Ethernet PROFINET expansion module 7KM PAC RS 485 expansion module 4.9.3.1 Area of application The COM800/COM100 breaker data server can be used to link 3VA molded case circuit breakers to: Power monitoring software powermanager Industrial automation systems Building automation systems Parameterization and breaker condition evaluation via communication link Maintenance systems MindSphere 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 487 Accessories 4.9 Communication and system integration 4.9.3.2 Features Working in conjunction with the connected 3VA molded case circuit breakers with ETUs 5series and 8-series, the COM800/COM100 breaker data server supplies the following information about the power distribution system: Condition of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker Tripping history with time stamp, cause of trip and number of trip events for breakers with ETUs 5-series and 8-series Minimum and maximum values of measured variables Limit-value monitoring for measured variables in the 3VA molded case circuit breakers Load curves with power demands, e.g. 15-minute demands Energy values such as active energy (kWh) and reactive energy (kvarh) Power supply to connected 3VA molded case circuit breakers Three simultaneous communication connections via the integrated Ethernet interface (e.g. DSP800, powermanager and, temporarily, powerconfig) 4.9.4 Communication with ETUs Electronic trip units allow detailed setting of protection parameters from a central location. They record measured variables and maintenance information in order to support power and installation monitoring. The electronic trip units (ETUs) provide the following protection functions: Overload protection L ("L" = Long time) Short-time delayed short-circuit release S ("S" = Short time) for time-selective response in case of a short-circuit Instantaneous short-circuit release I ("I" = Instantaneous) Protection of the neutral conductor against overload and short-circuit ("N" = neutral) Protection against residual currents to ground G ("G" = Ground fault) 4.9.4.1 Area of application Communication-capable ETUs are deployed for any application which requires the following functions: Diverse protection functions Finer setting options for protection functions Metering functions For 50 and 60 Hz networks (45 to 65 Hz) The communication option provides a wide range of information about the status of the molded case circuit breaker, as well as the actual measured values. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 488 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.9 Communication and system integration 4.9.5 DSP800 display The DSP800 display is designed for mounting in the panel door and can be optionally connected to the Ethernet (Modbus TCP) interface integrated in the COM800 / COM100 breaker data server. The DSP800 display shows the data of the breaker data server and thus the data of up to eight connected 3VA molded case circuit breakers. The start page of the DSP800 displays the status and maximum current of all 3VAs. All the detailed information about individual molded case circuit breakers can be selected via the efficiently structured menu. This includes Measured values of ETU 5-series and 8-series ETU setting parameters Status Diagnostics With firmware version 2.07, up to three 3WL10 / 3VA27 circuit breakers can also be shown on the DSP800 display. It must be noted that a maximum of 8 breakers can be displayed. Templates for 1, 2, 4 and 8 breakers are available as default screens. These can either be selected and arranged automatically or they can be manually assigned. In addition, the measured values to be displayed can be selected in the overview. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 489 Accessories 4.9 Communication and system integration 4.9.6 Commissioning and testing of electronic trip units using powerconfig powerconfig powerconfig performs the following functions for 3VA molded case circuit breakers: Parameterization of 3VA ETUs and other 3VA components Testing of 3VA Commissioning of 3VA Statistical analysis of 3VA Readout of measured variables such as energy, current, voltage and power from 3VA molded case circuit breakers Readout of minimum and maximum values from 3VA molded case circuit breakers Diagnostics of 3VA The PC on which powerconfig is installed is connected to the 3VA molded case circuit breaker by means of the COM800 / COM100 breaker data server (optionally with modules) or the TD500 test device. The TD500 test device is required in order to perform function tests. You can find more detailed information on the TD500 test device in chapter TD500 test device (Page 513). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 490 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.9 Communication and system integration 3VA molded case circuit breakers and, in some cases, other devices supported by powerconfig are combined in powerconfig to form a project if they are related to one another from a technical, organizational or some other perspective. Electronic trip units (ETU), the EFB300 external function box and the communication structure can be commissioned easily by means of the powerconfig software. On completion of the commissioning process, the ETU settings can be stored as a project on the PC and printed out. powerconfig can also be used to perform ETU trip tests. A test report is generated automatically and stored in the project every time a test is carried out. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 491 Accessories 4.9 Communication and system integration powerconfig supports a variety of different device communication links depending on the SENTRON device used: USB Ethernet (Modbus TCP) PROFINET PROFIBUS MODBUS RTU The possible means of connection of the COM800 / COM100 breaker data server are described in detail in the 3VA Communication system manual (see Reference documents (Page 10)). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 492 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.9 Communication and system integration With 3VA molded case circuit breakers and 3-series ETUs, powerconfig is linked to the ETU interface via the USB interface on the PC and the interface on the TD500 test device. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 493 Accessories 4.9 Communication and system integration 4.9.7 Power management with powermanager For power and plant monitoring, Siemens offers the powermanager software. Together with SENTRON protection devices such as 3VA, 3WL and PAC measuring devices as well as non-Siemens devices, powermanager provides a power monitoring system for reducing energy costs and increasing energy availability. powermanager acquires the measured variables that are needed to optimize power consumption and so reduce costs. These variables not only include energy and power values, but also electrical parameters such as current, voltage, or power factor. Not only is this system able to display values, but also to monitor and archive them for later analysis. In addition, the load monitoring function is capable of monitoring a specified setpoint and making recommendations as to which loads should be connected and disconnected. Identifying savings potential The power monitoring software has been tested by the TUV Rheinland for its suitability to support an energy management system in accordance with ISO 50001. Functionality and user-friendliness The salient features and functions of the power monitoring software are as follows: Good scalability Enhanced report templates Response plans Mass parameterization Virtual measuring points for computing customer-specific parameters Load monitoring function for monitoring specified power limits for freely definable time periods Switching recommendations in the event of limit violations Remote control of circuit breakers 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 494 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.10 EFB300 external function box 4.10 EFB300 external function box 4.10.1 General information 3VA molded case circuit breakers equipped with the electronic trip unit systems ETU 3series, ETU 5-series and ETU 8-series can be optionally upgraded with an EFB300 external function box. The EFB300 external function box receives information from the ETU via a cable connection. This information can be used to output active trip alarms and tripping reasons (configurable using powerconfig) via four digital outputs. Zone selective interlocking ZSI (see chapter Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) (Page 82)) can also be implemented via the EFB300. The EFB300 also supplies the ETU with power which means that the ETU can be parameterized via the display even when a 3VA molded case circuit breaker is in the de-energized state. LED display ZSI Zone selective interlocking DI Digital input DO 0 ... 3 Digital output <SET> button 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 495 Accessories 4.10 EFB300 external function box 4.10.2 Power supply The EFB300 external function box must be operated on a 24 V DC power supply unit. It acts as a power supply for the connected ETU. This allows the ETU to remain operational even when a 3VA molded case circuit breaker has tripped. 4.10.3 Functions of the digital input and digital outputs Functions of the digital input Two different functions can be implemented using the digital input: Tripped signals in the ETU can be reset (this also removes the reason for the tripped signal from the ETU display and the default screen is displayed again). Information from a digital input can be made available via the communication interface of the COM800/COM100 breaker data server, e.g. the status of a door contact transmitter. Functions of the digital outputs With the powerconfig software application, it is possible to selectively assign signals transmitted by the connected ETU to the four digital outputs of the EFB300. powerconfig can be accessed via the TD500 test device or by means of the COM800 or COM100 breaker data server through the interface to the communication system. The following signals (dependent on the ETU) can be assigned: All the trip causes of the ETU - Overload L - Overload L in the neutral conductor - Short-time delayed short circuit S - Instantaneous short circuit I - Ground-fault protection G - Overtemperature - Blocking protection (with motor protection) - Idle running protection (with motor protection) - Phase failure protection (with motor protection) - RCD trip - Group signal for trip due to short circuit (i.e. S or I) This makes it possible to differentiate between overload and short circuit. This is an important criterion for the question "May I reconnect?". - Group alarm for trip by ETU 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 496 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.10 EFB300 external function box Warnings - Alarm level AL1 (90% Ir) - Alarm level AL2 (105% Ir) - Temperature alarm - Load shedding or load pick up By means of the load shedding and load pick up signals, a load can be switched off or connected automatically depending on the capacity utilization of the 3VA molded case circuit breaker. - Ground-fault alarm - Internal ETU fault - Group signal for all warnings - Pre-trip for overload This warning appears 200 ms before an overload trip. This allows the user to bring frequency converters into a safe state, for example. Remote control - The four digital outputs can be controlled directly from the fieldbus/Ethernet. Possible application: Control of an MO320 motor operator without communication capability Limit values (4) - The 8-series ETUs offer a total of four limit value settings. Almost all measured values are available for monitoring. These can be assigned a hysteresis and an additional time delay. In the event of upward or downward violation of the set measured value, a limit value violation is generated which can be output via the EFB300 outputs and also transmitted via the communication system. One possible example is to signal the measured frequency in a combined heat and power plant. Energy pulse (with ETU 8-series only) An energy pulse (S0 signal pulse) contains information pertaining to the consumption of a specific quantity of energy. The data are transmitted by weighted pulses, i.e. a specific number of pulses are transferred to represent one kWh unit. Settings for the energy pulse, see table on next page. Example of energy pulse: Energy meter source: Pulses per unit: Active energy kWh 5 Unit: Pulse length: Output of 140 kWh: 20 kWh 30 ms Output of 35 pulses, each 30 ms in length 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 497 Accessories 4.10 EFB300 external function box Overview of functions available with EFB300 external function box 1) ETU860M (starter protection and motor protection) 2) ETU350M (motor protection) 3) ETU550M (motor protection) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 498 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.10 EFB300 external function box Default output assignments The four outputs of the EFB300 are automatically assigned factory defaults in ETUs with firmware version 4.2 and higher. 4.10.4 Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) Description Microprocessor-controlled, zone selective interlocking (ZSI) has been developed in order to control the total breaking time in low-voltage networks with multiple molded case circuit breakers connected in series. Advantage of ZSI: Regardless of the number of series-connected molded case circuit breakers, all short circuits in the network can be cleared within a maximum time period of 50 ms. Short-circuit clearance times should be minimized, particularly in the case of system short circuits of very large magnitude. Note Backward compatibility The ZSI function is backward-compatible with the ZSI function of the 3WL molded case circuit breakers. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 499 Accessories 4.10 EFB300 external function box Connection Use of the ZSI function is conditional upon the connection of a dedicated EFB300 external function box to each 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker. The EFB300 allows molded case circuit breakers to communicate with one another, a capability which is a basic requirement for the ZSI function. To permit utilization of the ZSI function, EFB300 external function boxes must be interconnected as illustrated below: See also Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) (Page 82) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 500 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.10 EFB300 external function box 4.10.5 <SET> button The <SET> button performs the following functions depending on mode: Operating mode: Acknowledgment of signals Test mode: Execution of a test function Operating mode The EFB300 external function box is in operating mode during operation. Operation of the EFB300 is indicated by steady illumination of the LED labeled "ACT". If a tripped signal is present at an output (output is activated), the user can acknowledge the signal or reset the output. This can be done by various methods: By application of a signal to the digital input of the EFB300 By brief actuation of the <SET> button on the EFB300 By actuation of the <ESC> button on the ETU 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 501 Accessories 4.10 EFB300 external function box LED states in operating mode Steady illumination Flashing Off Simultaneous flashing of all LEDs indicates that the EFB300 is defective. Flashing 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 502 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.10 EFB300 external function box Test mode All inputs and outputs can be activated or deactivated manually in test mode. This can be done to determine whether the digital outputs and the ZSI bus are functioning properly and wired correctly. The LED labeled "ACT" flashes to indicate that test mode is active. The powerconfig software can also be used to test outputs. Activating test mode and performing tests 1. In order to activate test mode, press the <SET> button for at least 2 seconds until all the LEDs for the outputs light up briefly . Test mode is activated when the LED labeled "ACT" starts to flash . 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 503 Accessories 4.10 EFB300 external function box 2. Press the <SET> button briefly. LED "ZSI_OUT" flashes, the ZSI output is selected. 3. In order to activate the selected output, press the <SET> button for longer than 2 seconds. The LED of the selected output changes from flashing to steady illumination to indicate activation of the selected output. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 504 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.10 EFB300 external function box 4. In order to deactivate the output again, press the <SET> button again for longer than 2 seconds. The LED of the activated output will change from steady illumination to flashing. The output is deactivated, but still selected. 5. In order to select the next output, press the <SET> button briefly . The LED of the next output starts to flash , the output is selected. 6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 in order to check the wiring of all digital outputs in succession. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 505 Accessories 4.10 EFB300 external function box Terminating test mode If the <SET> button is not pressed for a period of three minutes after selection of an output, test mode is terminated automatically and the EFB300 reverts to operating mode. Alternative method: After working through the entire menu structure (only the LED labeled "ACT" flashes), press the <SET> button for longer than 2 seconds. LED states in test mode Steady illumination Flashing Off 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 506 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.10 EFB300 external function box 4.10.6 Technical specifications 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 507 Accessories 4.11 Test devices 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 508 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.11 Test devices 4.11 Test devices Test devices are required in order to perform local tests on 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers equipped with electronic trip units (ETUs). Two versions of the test devices are available: TD300 activation and trip box TD500 test device Functional scope of test devices 1) One energy transformer, one Rogowski coil 2) Via powerconfig 4.11.1 TD300 activation and trip box The TD300 activation and trip box is a mobile, battery-operated local test device. Its purpose is: To supply the ETU with power so that the ETU can be parameterized when the molded case circuit breaker is switched off and de-energized. To test and service the electronic trip unit (ETU). The power supply is provided by two AA batteries included in the scope of supply. The TD300 activation and trip box is designed for ease of handling with dimensions of 76 x 107 x 25 mm (W x H x D). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 509 Accessories 4.11 Test devices Description of the TD300 activation and trip box 4.11.1.1 LED "ACT" for indicating the battery status Slide switch ON/OFF <TRIP> pushbutton for testing the molded case circuit breaker 2 1.5 V AA batteries Plug-in connector for insertion in the test socket on the ETU Operation and execution of the TD300 tripping function CAUTION Personal injury, spurious tripping and irreparable damage to the TD300 activation and trip box Use of the TD300 when the molded case circuit breaker is not de-energized can result in personal injury, spurious tripping of the circuit breaker and irreparable damage to the TD300. Disconnect the molded case circuit breaker from the power supply before using the TD300 activation and trip box. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 510 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.11 Test devices TD300: Connect, switch on and off, disconnect Connect the TD300 to the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker 1. Disconnect the molded case circuit breaker from the power supply. 2. Insert the connecting cable in the test socket of the ETU. Switch the TD300 on and off 1. Check whether the molded case circuit breaker is disconnected from the power supply. If it is not, disconnect it. 2. Push the slide switch to ON. The LED labeled "ACT" on the TD300 lights up and the ETU display is activated. The TD300 is ready. If the "ACT" LED does not light up: - Push the slide switch to OFF. - Detach the connecting cable from the molded case circuit breaker. - Replace the batteries. - Follow the correct sequence of steps to connect the unit to the molded case circuit breaker again. - Push the slide switch to ON. 3. Push the slide switch to OFF. The LED labeled "ACT" on the TD300 goes out to indicate that the unit is switched off. Disconnect the TD300 from the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker 1. Switch off the molded case circuit breaker (OFF position). 2. Detach the connecting cable from the molded case circuit breaker. LED states when the TD300 and the molded case circuit breaker are switched on 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 511 Accessories 4.11 Test devices Test the molded case circuit breaker (mechanical trip test) 1. Connect the TD300 to the molded case circuit breaker in the correct sequence and switch on. 2. Switch on the molded case circuit breaker (ON position). 3. Press the pushbutton labeled <TRIP> on the TD300. The molded case circuit breaker trips: The molded case circuit breaker is functioning correctly. The molded case circuit breaker does not trip: - Switch off the TD300. - Switch off the molded case circuit breaker (OFF position). - Detach the connecting cable from the molded case circuit breaker. - Connect the TD300 correctly to the molded case circuit breaker again and switch on. - Repeat the trip test (by pressing the pushbutton labeled <TRIP> on the TD300). - If the molded case circuit breaker fails to trip again, contact Technical Support (Page 10) . 4.11.1.2 Technical specifications of TD300 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 512 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.11 Test devices 4.11.2 TD500 test device The TD500 mobile test device can be used to test the different causes of ETU trips. It is therefore useful for checking the proper functioning and correct wiring of all connected system components before the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker is commissioned. The system behaves as it would in the case of a real trip event. The molded case circuit breaker trips when the set delay times expire and signals all alarms and tripped signals from connected components. Benefits of the TD500 test device A TD500 test device via powerconfig can be used to successively parameterize all 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers directly in situ. The device can store up to 100 test results. Using the TD500 test device and the powerconfig software, it is possible to read out all diagnostic data of the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker either digitally or as a hardcopy. In addition, test functions can be performed directly on the PC with the powerconfig software. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 513 Accessories 4.11 Test devices Description of the TD500 Plug-in connector for insertion in the test socket on the ETU TD500-to-ETU connecting cable TD500 test device Power supply unit 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 514 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.11 Test devices Connecting cable for ETU Pushbutton for transformer test LED "LOG" (available memory status) LED "RESULT" Pushbutton for neutral trip test N Pushbutton for short-time delayed shortcircuit test S PC connection Pushbutton for ground fault trip test G Pushbutton for meter test (current measurement display) Pushbutton for instantaneous short-circuit trip test I Pushbutton for overload trip test L Pushbutton for ETU Power ON/OFF LED "ACT" (status) LED "COM" (communication status) Mains cable connection 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 515 Accessories 4.11 Test devices LED display Interfaces of the TD500 test device The diagram below shows the physical interfaces of the TD500 test device. Top of unit: Connection to 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker Bottom of unit on right: 24 V DC supply Bottom of unit on left: Connection to PC Compatibility with molded case circuit breakers The TD500 test device can be connected to all 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers equipped with ETU 3-series, 5-series and 8-series. The connecting cable from the test device is inserted in the test socket of the ETU. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 516 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.11 Test devices Data stored in the TD500 The following data are stored in the TD500: Article number ETU parameter settings Causes of ETU trips Note Readout of data and clearing of the internal memory of the TD500 Using a PC and the powerconfig software, you can read these data out of the TD500 and clear its internal memory. Test functions of the TD500 The relevant pushbutton must be pressed in order to start a specific test. The molded case circuit breaker is tripped electronically when the pushbutton is actuated. This is essential to allow effectual testing of the electronic and mechanical control elements of the circuit breaker. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 517 Accessories 4.11 Test devices 4.11.2.1 Operation and execution of test functions Connecting and disconnecting the TD500 CAUTION Personal injury, malfunctions and false test results Failure to connect the TD500 test device to the molded case circuit breaker according to the sequence of steps specified below can result in personal injury, malfunctions and false test results. Disconnect the molded case circuit breaker from the power supply before connecting the TD500. Strictly adhere to the sequence of steps described below for connecting the two devices. Connecting the TD500 to the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker 1. Disconnect the molded case circuit breaker from the power supply. 2. Insert the connecting cable in the socket on top of the TD500 test device. 3. Insert the connecting cable in the test socket of the ETU. 4. Insert the cable of the power supply unit in the socket on the bottom of the TD500 test device. 5. Connect the power supply unit to a socket. The TD500 test device is now switched on and ready. on the TD500 test device. 6. Press the pushbutton labeled <ETU Power ON/OFF> The ETU is now powered via the TD500 and activated. Successful communication between the TD500 and ETU is indicated by illumination of the LED labeled "COM" on the TD500. All test functions available for the connected ETU are indicated by illumination of the appropriately labeled LEDs. Example: The L, S and I releases, the transformers (TRANS) and the current meter (METER) can be tested on the ETU: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 518 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.11 Test devices Disconnecting the TD500 from the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker 1. Switch off the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker. on the TD500 test device. 2. Press the pushbutton labeled <ETU Power ON/OFF> The LED labeled "COM" on the TD500 goes out. The ETU is now no longer powered via the TD500 and is deactivated. 3. Disconnect the power supply unit from the socket. 4. Detach the power supply unit cable from the TD500. 5. Detach the connecting cable between the TD500 and the ETU. Test tripping functions L, S, I, N and G 1. Connect the TD500 to the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker as described above. 2. Switch on the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker. 3. To test the tripping function, press one of the pushbuttons <L>, <S>, <I>, <N> or<G on the TD500 test device. - When a pushbutton is pressed, its LED flashes while the test is in progress. - The ETU trips when the set trip times expire and the molded case circuit breaker switches from "ON" to "TRIP". - On completion of the test, the LED of the selected pushbutton changes from flashing to steady illumination. 4. Wait for the test to end and evaluate the test result by the status of the LED labeled "RESULT": Test was successful: The LED "RESULT" lights up green. Test was unsuccessful: The LED "RESULT" flashes red. Repeat the test. If the test fails again, contact Technical Support (Page 10) . 5. Press the pushbutton for the same tripping function again in order to confirm the test result and restore the TD500 to its initial state. 6. Switch on the molded case circuit breaker again (ON position) in order to carry out further tripping function tests. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 519 Accessories 4.11 Test devices Example: Testing the tripping function L on an ETU550 LSI 1. Connect the TD500 test device to the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker. 2. Switch on the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker. 3. Press pushbutton <L> on the TD500 test device. The LED in the pushbutton <L> starts to flash. 4. Wait until the LED in the pushbutton <L> changes from flashing to steady illumination. The test is completed. 5. Evaluate the test result by the status of the LED labeled "RESULT": LED "RESULT" is illuminated steadily in green: The test was successful. LED "RESULT" flashes red: The test was unsuccessful and must be repeated. If the test fails again, contact Technical Support (Page 10) . 6. Press the pushbutton <L> again in order to confirm the test result and restore the TD500 to its initial state. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 520 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.11 Test devices Carry out a meter test The purpose of the meter test is to determine whether the ETU is measuring and displaying current correctly. A test current of 0.4 x In is fed into the ETU. The current value measured by the ETU is then checked to confirm that it matches the test current. Note The molded case circuit breaker does not need to be switched to position "ON" for this test. Execute the test 1. Connect the TD500 test device to the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker. 2. Press the pushbutton labeled <METER> . The LED in the <METER> pushbutton begins to flash. The test takes approximately 30 seconds. 3. Wait until the LED in the pushbutton <METER> changes from flashing to steady illumination. The test is completed. 4. Evaluate the test result by the status of the LED labeled "RESULT": LED "RESULT" is illuminated steadily in green: The test was successful. LED "RESULT" flashes red: The test was unsuccessful and must be repeated. If the test fails again, contact Technical Support (Page 10) . 5. Press the pushbutton <METER> again in order to confirm the test result and restore the TD500 to its initial state. Test transformers This procedure tests the transformers (energy transformer or Rogowski coil) to determine the following: Are transformers installed in the ETU? Are transformers correctly installed in the ETU? Are the installed transformers functioning correctly? Note In order to carry out this test, it is absolutely essential to disconnect all external power supplies (e.g. EFB300, COM800, COM100, 24 V module) to the electronics. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 521 Accessories 4.11 Test devices Execute the test 1. Disconnect all external power supplies to the electronics. 2. Connect the TD500 test device to the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker. 3. Switch on the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker. 4. Press the pushbutton labeled <TRANS> . The LED in the <TRANS> pushbutton begins to flash. The test takes several seconds. 5. Wait until the LED in the pushbutton <TRANS> changes from flashing to steady illumination. The test is completed. 6. Evaluate the test result by the status of the LED labeled "RESULT": LED "RESULT" is illuminated steadily in green: The test was successful. LED "RESULT" flashes red: The test was unsuccessful and must be repeated. If the test fails again, contact Technical Support (Page 10) . 7. Press the pushbutton <TRANS> again in order to confirm the test result and restore the TD500 to its initial state. 4.11.2.2 Executing the test functions using a PC and powerconfig In addition to its capabilities as a stand-alone test device, the TD500 can also act as a PC interface to the ETU. If the TD500 test device is connected both to the ETU and a PC, the protective functions can be triggered from a PC on which the powerconfig software is installed. A test log for the molded case circuit breaker is generated and stored in the powerconfig project. The test log can be printed out. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 522 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.11 Test devices Connections between ETU - TD500 - PC 4.11.2.3 Plug-in connector for insertion in the test socket on the ETU TD500-to-ETU connecting cable TD500 test device Power supply unit USB connecting cable PC with powerconfig installed Parameterizing using the powerconfig software In addition to test functions, the powerconfig software package also provides tools for assigning parameters to ETU 5-series and 8-series. These tools allow you to: assign parameters to ETU 5-series and 8-series store parameter settings for ETU 5-series and 8-series in the powerconfig project and print them out 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 523 Accessories 4.11 Test devices 4.11.2.4 Technical specifications of TD500 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 524 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.12 External current transformer for N conductor 4.12 External current transformer for N conductor The external current transformer for the N conductor is a current transformer for 3-pole 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers with 5-series and 8-series ETUs. This transformer can be used to provide protection for the N conductor against overload as well as for ground-fault protection. 4.12.1 Parameterization of the external N transformer N conductor protection against overload The function "N conductor protection IN" is deactivated ("OFF") as standard (factory setting) in 5-series and 8-series ETUs. If an external N transformer is connected to 5-series or 8-series ETUs, the "N conductor protection IN" must be manually activated on the ETU and adjusted according to system requirements. Ground-fault protection If the external N conductor is used with 5-series or 8-series ETU variants with ground-fault protection, ETU560 and ETU860, no parameterization is required at the user end. As soon as the external N transformer is connected to the ETU, the N conductor is also automatically monitored for ground-fault protection. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 525 Accessories 4.12 External current transformer for N conductor 4.12.2 External current transformer for front busbar connector up to 630 A Technical specifications 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 526 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.12 External current transformer for N conductor 4.12.3 External current transformer as straight-through transformer up to 1250 A Technical specifications 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 527 Accessories 4.13 Escutcheon 4.13 Escutcheon Molded case circuit breakers or supplementary motor operators or front mounted rotary operators for molded case circuit breakers are often installed in panels or distribution boards in such a way that only the operating device is directly accessible. Busbars, cables and the termination area of the molded case circuit breaker are covered by metal or plastic plates in order to prevent direct contact with live components. The panel door itself is often designed as a protective cover. Cutouts must be made in these covers in order to allow access to control elements, which are designed to prevent direct contact with cables, and which are large enough in size that the cover can be closed easily. All these requirements necessitate gap dimensions of a few millimeters between the cutout and the unit. Cover frames are installed in cases where the gap size needs to be minimized and the gaps covered. The use of cover frames makes for a clean-lined, attractive panel front face and provides a higher degree of protection (IP30). 4.13.1 Product description Cover frames are available for the following items of equipment from the 3VA product range: 3VA1 / 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers, 3-pole or 4-pole: Handle area only 3VA1 / 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers, 3-pole or 4-pole: Area around handle and trip unit Front mounted rotary operator Motor operators Loadside residual current devices, 3-pole or 4-pole Door feedthroughs 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 528 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.13 Escutcheon Installation 1. Cut out an opening in the cover plate. Refer to the operating instructions for the correct cutout dimensions. 2. Insert the cover frame into the cutout from the front and fasten by means of small spring steel sheets at the rear of the cover plate. The fastening system is designed such that the the cover frame can move in the cutout. In other words, the cover frame is "float-mounted". Tolerance compensation in the range 3 mm / 0.12" is thus possible in the horizontal direction and in the range 6 mm / 0.24" in the vertical direction. On the one hand, this tolerance compensation is required to achieve the small gap dimension of max. 0.5 mm / 0.19" between the cover frame and device. On the other hand, it is needed to compensate for tolerances, e.g. in the panel, which are always present due to the construction. Typical tolerance compensation examples are: Tolerance compensation of the door angle with right-hinged or left-hinged doors Tilting of devices under their own weight when they are fastened to thin mounting plates Molded case circuit breaker Motor operator Cover frame Panel door (closed) Panel door (open) Tolerance compensation Note To ensure that the panel door can still be opened, a mounted accessory component must not project beyond the cover frame by more than 5 mm / 0.19" when the door is closed. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 529 Accessories 4.13 Escutcheon 4.13.2 Labeling plate A supplementary labeling plate (3VA9087-0SX10) is available for the cover frame. It can be latched in position in the center of any of the four sides of the cover frame. Paper or plastic labels displaying plant-specific information are attached by adhesive to the labeling plate. The scope of supply includes ten labeling plates and ten aluminum-colored labels. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 530 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.14 DIN rail adapter 4.14 DIN rail adapter 4.14.1 Introduction Description of application and basic function The DIN rail adapter is used to mount molded case circuit breakers on 35 mm DIN rails of meter or distribution cubicles, for example. DIN rail adapters are available exclusively for 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers in sizes 100 A and 160 A since, on the one hand, DIN rails are not designed to support heavy weights and, on the other, only molded case circuit breakers with thermal-magnetic trip units and rated operational currents up to maximum 160 A are normally installed in distribution boards. The DIN rail adapters are snapped onto the rear panel of the molded case circuit breaker or fastened by screws. With an adapter installed, the circuit breaker is simple to attach to a DIN rail. This is done by placing the circuit breaker with attached DIN rail adapter from above onto the DIN rail and then pressing the bottom half of the circuit breaker lightly against the rail until the adapter engages. Overview of variants and products 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 531 Accessories 4.14 DIN rail adapter 4.14.2 Information about installation, assembly and attachment 3VA1 160 1-pole and 2-pole molded case circuit breakers 3VA1 160 1-pole molded case circuit breakers To attach these to a DIN rail, a 3VA9181-0SH10 DIN rail adapter is required. This DIN rail adapter is not attached by screws to the molded case circuit breaker, but simply snapped into place on the rear panel. 3VA1 160 2-pole molded case circuit breakers To attach 2-pole molded case circuit breakers to 35 mm DIN rails, a 3VA9182-0SH10 DIN rail adapter is required. This adapter is fitted with threaded nuts. The molded case circuit breakers are screwed onto the adapter by means of the mounting screws supplied with the circuit breakers. The nuts supplied with the circuit breakers are not required. 3VA1 100 and 3VA1 160 3-pole and 4-pole molded case circuit breakers To attach 3-pole and 4-pole molded case circuit breakers to 35 mm DIN rails, a 3VA91870SH10 DIN rail adapter is required. This adapter is fitted with threaded nuts. The molded case circuit breakers are screwed onto the adapter by means of the mounting screws supplied with the circuit breakers. The nuts supplied with the circuit breakers are not required. 3VA1 100 and 3VA1 160 3-pole and 4-pole molded case circuit breakers with side mounted residual current device The 3VA9187-0SH20 DIN rail adapter has been specially developed for use with molded case circuit breakers combined with side mounted residual current device. This DIN rail adapter is also fitted with threaded nuts so that the molded case circuit breaker/residual current device assembly can be fastened to it by means of the screws included in the scope of supply of both devices. Assembly instructions The molded case circuit breaker must first be attached to the DIN rail adapter. 3-pole molded case circuit breakers must be attached such that their right-hand edge (when viewed from above) is flush with the DIN rail adapter. With 4-pole molded case circuit breakers, the N pole is situated opposite on the left-hand side (when viewed from above). The screws are inserted in the fastening holes between phases 1 and 2, and between phases 2 and 3, in the molded case circuit breaker. After the molded case circuit breaker has been attached to the DIN rail adapter, the residual current device must also be mounted on the adapter. After the residual current device has been secured in position on the DIN rail adapter, the main current paths of the residual current device and the molded case circuit breaker must be checked to ensure that they are properly aligned and connected. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 532 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Accessories 4.14 DIN rail adapter Information about combination with other accessories DIN rail adapters are normally used to install molded case circuit breakers (possibly with side mounted residual current device) in distribution boards. The standard cover is then fitted over the circuit breakers. The front panel (45 mm high) is the only part of the device which protrudes through the cover. With this arrangement, it is not possible to use front mounted accessories. When molded case circuit breakers including DIN rail adapter are installed on rails in an open system panel without a cover, it is possible to use front mounted accessories such as motor operator, rotary operator with shaft stub, front mounted rotary operator and the front mounted Bowden cable interlock module. The following accessories are compatible with molded case circuit breakers and DIN rail adapters: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 533 Accessories 4.14 DIN rail adapter 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 534 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Service and maintenance 5.1 5 Notes Qualified personnel It is essential to refer to this documentation when setting up and operating a device/system described here. The device/system must only ever be serviced and maintained by qualified personnel. For the purpose of the safety information in these operating instructions, a "qualified person" is someone who is authorized to energize, ground, and tag equipment, systems, and circuits in accordance with established safety procedures. Maintenance category 5.2 Regular maintenance Recommended maintenance/inspection intervals Following initial commissioning, the equipment/system must be inspected at least once per year. In addition, an inspection should be carried out after 1000 trips at rated operational current. If the molded case circuit breaker or switch disconnector is operated in an atmosphere that is dust-laden or in which corrosive vapors, gases, or salt spray is present, it is advisable to adjust the inspection intervals accordingly, e.g. to twice per year. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 535 Service and maintenance 5.2 Regular maintenance Inspection procedure recommended for 3VA molded case circuit breakers / switch disconnectors Optional inspection procedure for the ETU of the 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 536 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Service and maintenance 5.3 Maintenance following tripping of a molded case circuit breaker 5.3 Maintenance following tripping of a molded case circuit breaker If a 3VA molded case circuit breaker trips on overcurrent (overload, short circuit) or residual current (ground fault or via residual current device), the cause of the trip must be identified and rectified before the molded case circuit breaker is switched on again. In the case of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers with thermal-magnetic trip units, the cause of tripping can be determined by means of the SAS short circuit alarm switch. With 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers, the cause of tripping can be output via the EFB300 external function box. With electronic trip units 5-series and 8-series ETUs, the cause of tripping can be indicated on the LCD and optionally transferred via communication modules. An inspection as described in chapter Regular maintenance (Page 535) should be carried out every time the molded case circuit breaker is tripped by the trip unit. In addition, all black residues on the molded case circuit breaker must be removed as they might contain conductive particles. The molded case circuit breaker should then be switched on and off without load at least five times. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 537 Service and maintenance 5.4 Fault diagnostics 5.4 Fault diagnostics See also Technical Support (Page 10) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 538 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams 6.1.1 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers 6.1.1.1 Basic units 6 Switch disconnectors Fixed mounting, 3-pole and 4-pole Plug-in/draw-out units, 3-pole and 4-pole 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 539 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers with thermal-magnetic trip unit Fixed mounting and plug-in/draw-out units, 3-pole and 4-pole Fixed mounting, 3-pole and 4-pole Plug-in/draw-out units, 3-pole and 4-pole 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 540 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams Fixed mounting and plug-in/draw-out units, 4-pole, unprotected N conductor Fixed mounting, 4-pole, unprotected N conductor Plug-in and draw-out units, 4-pole, unprotected N conductor 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 541 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams 6.1.1.2 Accessories Auxiliary switches, alarm switches and position signaling contacts Changeover contacts for auxiliary switches AUX, trip alarm switches TAS and electrical alarm switches EAS, position signaling switches for plug-in and draw-out units Leading changeover contacts for leading changeover switch LCS Auxiliary releases Undervoltage release UVR Universal release UNI Shunt trip 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 542 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams Motor operators MO310 side mounted motor operator and MO320 front mounted motor operator MO310 / MO320 motor operator actuation controlled via control cable S0 OFF (to be provided by customer) S1 ON (to be provided by customer) F1 Fuse in the control circuit (to be provided by customer) L1 Indicator light AUTO mode (to be provided by customer) L2 Indicator light MAN mode (to be provided by customer) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 543 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams MO310 / MO320 motor operator actuation controlled via control cable and undervoltage release S0 OFF (to be provided by customer) S1 ON (to be provided by customer) S01 Remote command (to be provided by customer) K1 Contactor relay (to be provided by customer) U< Undervoltage release (to be provided by customer) F1 Fuse in the control circuit (to be provided by customer) L1 Indicator light AUTO mode (to be provided by customer) L2 Indicator light MAN mode (to be provided by customer) This circuit is deployed in order to prevent no-load operation of the molded case circuit breaker. The contact of auxiliary contactor K1 prevents no-load operation when the undervoltage release "U<" is de-energized. No-load operations subject the molded case circuit breaker to high stresses. If the undervoltage release is de-energized, auxiliary contactor K1 has not picked up. The contact in the ON circuit (control circuit) of the motor operator is thus not closed, i.e. the molded case circuit breaker cannot be switched. This auxiliary contactor is not necessary when the undervoltage release is supplied uninterrupted (e.g. pushbutton S01) from the same source as the motor operator itself (e.g. contact 3). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 544 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams Plug-in and draw-out units Plug-in units, 3-pole and 4-pole, with two optionally integrated position signaling switches for signaling "Plug-in unit - MCCB correctly bolted to plug-in socket". Draw-out units, 3-pole and 4-pole, with an optional switch for signaling the condition "Draw-out unit locked / open" and six optionally integrated position signaling switches for signaling "Position of breaker in the draw-out unit". 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 545 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams RCD Basic Type A Side mounted RCD Basic, 3-pole and 4-pole Loadside RCD Basic, 3-pole and 4-pole Type B Loadside Basic residual current device, 3-pole (in 4-pole enclosure) and 4-pole 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 546 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams 6.1.1.3 Example: 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker with built-on/built-in accessories 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 547 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams 6.1.2 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers 6.1.2.1 Basic units Fixed mounting and plug-in/draw-out units, 3-pole and 4-pole Fixed mounting, 3-pole and 4-pole * Voltage tap Plug-in/draw-out units, 3-pole and 4-pole 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 548 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams Fixed mounting, 3-pole 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker in 5-wire system Optional external current transformer for N conductor (gray line) * Voltage tap 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 549 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams 6.1.2.2 Accessories Auxiliary switches, alarm switches and position signaling contacts Changeover contacts for auxiliary switches AUX, trip alarm switches TAS and electrical alarm switches EAS, position signaling switches for plug-in and draw-out units Leading changeover contacts for leading changeover switch LCS Auxiliary releases Undervoltage release UVR Universal release UNI Shunt trip 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 550 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams Other internal accessories COM060 communication module 24 V module Motor operators MO320 front mounted motor operator 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 551 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams MO320 motor operator actuation controlled via control cable S0 OFF (to be provided by customer) S1 ON (to be provided by customer) F1 Fuse in the control circuit (to be provided by customer) L1 Indicator light AUTO mode (to be provided by customer) L2 Indicator light MAN mode (to be provided by customer) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 552 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams MO320 motor operator actuation controlled via control cable and undervoltage release S0 OFF (to be provided by customer) S1 ON (to be provided by customer) S01 Remote command (to be provided by customer) K1 Contactor relay (to be provided by customer) U< Undervoltage release (to be provided by customer) F1 Fuse in the control circuit (to be provided by customer) L1 Indicator light AUTO mode (to be provided by customer) L2 Indicator light MAN mode (to be provided by customer) This circuit is deployed in order to prevent no-load operation of the molded case circuit breaker. The contact of auxiliary contactor K1 prevents no-load operation when the undervoltage release "U<" is de-energized. No-load operations subject the molded case circuit breaker to high stresses. If the undervoltage release is de-energized, auxiliary contactor K1 has not picked up. The contact in the ON circuit (control circuit) of the motor operator is thus not closed, i.e. the molded case circuit breaker cannot be switched. This auxiliary contactor is not necessary when the undervoltage release is supplied uninterrupted (e.g. pushbutton S01) from the same source as the motor operator itself (e.g. contact 3). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 553 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams SEO520 motor operator with stored energy operator 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 554 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams Actuation of SEO520 motor operator with stored energy operator controlled via control cable S1 OFF (to be provided by customer) S2 ON (to be provided by customer) S3 Reset signal for operating mode 3 (to be provided by customer) F1 Fuse in the control circuit (to be provided by customer) L1 Indicator light AUTO mode (to be provided by customer) L2 Indicator light MAN mode (to be provided by customer) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 555 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams Actuation of SEO520 motor operator with stored energy operator controlled via control cable and undervoltage release S1 OFF (to be provided by customer) S2 ON (to be provided by customer) S3 Reset signal for operating mode 3 (to be provided by customer) S01 Remote command (to be provided by customer) K1 Contactor relay (to be provided by customer) U< Undervoltage release (to be provided by customer) F1 Fuse in the control circuit (to be provided by customer) L1 Indicator light AUTO mode (to be provided by customer) L2 Indicator light MAN mode (to be provided by customer) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 556 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams Plug-in and draw-out units Plug-in and draw-out units Plug-in units, 3-pole and 4-pole, with two optionally integrated position signaling switches for signaling "Plug-in unit - MCCB correctly bolted to plug-in socket". Draw-out units, 3-pole and 4-pole, with an optional switch for signaling the condition "Draw-out unit locked / open" and six optionally integrated position signaling switches for signaling "Position of breaker in the draw-out unit". * Voltage tap 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 557 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams Draw-out units with communication interface * Voltage tap Draw-out units, 3-pole and 4-pole, with an optional switch for signaling the condition "Drawout unit locked / open" and three optionally integrated position signaling switches for signaling "Position of breaker in the draw-out unit". 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 558 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams RCD Advanced Loadside RCD, 3-pole and 4-pole type A * Voltage tap 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 559 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams Other external accessories T-connector * A connection can also be optionally equipped with a bus terminating resistor. The T-Connector is included in the scope of supply of the COM060 communication module. COM800 / COM100 breaker data server * A connection can also be optionally equipped with a bus terminating resistor. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 560 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams COM800 / COM100 breaker data server with expansion modules COM800 / COM100 breaker data server with 7KM PAC PROFIBUS DP expansion module * A connection can also be optionally equipped with a bus terminating resistor. COM800 / COM100 breaker data server with 7KM PAC Switched Ethernet PROFINET expansion module COM800 / COM100 breaker data server with 7KM PAC RS485 Modbus RTU expansion module EFB300 external function box 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 561 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams External current transformer for N conductor and illumination kit (24 V DC) for manual handle Connection for external current transformer for N conductor * Voltage tap Illumination kit (24 V DC) for manual handle Time-delay device for undervoltage releases 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 562 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams 6.1.2.3 * Example: 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker with built-on/built-in accessories A connection can also be optionally equipped with a bus terminating resistor. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 563 Technical specifications 6.1 Circuit diagrams 6.1.3 Application example Electrical interlocking of two 3VA molded case circuit breakers with undervoltage releases Q1 Molded case circuit breaker 1 UVR1 Undervoltage release in molded case circuit breaker 1 AUX1 Auxiliary switch in molded case circuit breaker 1 Q2 Molded case circuit breaker 2 UVR2 Undervoltage release in molded case circuit breaker 2 AUX2 Auxiliary switch in molded case circuit breaker 2 Note The undervoltage release UVR must not be connected to phases L1 and L3 for 690 V AC applications. In this case, it is connected to phase L1 and the N conductor or to a control voltage supply up to maximum 480 V AC. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 564 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.1 Dimensions of basic units 6.2.1.1 3VA10 and 3VA11 3VA11 160 A 1-pole / 2-pole 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 565 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 3VA10 100 A / 3VA11 160 A 3-pole / 4-pole 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 566 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.1.2 3VA12 3VA12 250 A 3-pole / 4-pole 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 567 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.1.3 3VA13 / 3VA14 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 568 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.1.4 3VA20 / 3VA21 / 3VA22 3VA20 100 A / 3VA21 160 A / 3VA22 250 A 3-pole / 4-pole 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 569 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.1.5 3VA23 / 3VA24 3VA23 400 A / 3VA24 630 A 3-pole / 4-pole 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 570 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.1.6 3VA25 3VA25 1000 A 3-pole / 4-pole 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 571 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.2 Dimensions of accessories 6.2.2.1 Connection technology Bus connectors extended or offset for 3VA up to 630 A Extension Rotated extension 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 572 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Offset Right-angled extension 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 573 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Bus connectors extended or offset for 3VA up to 1000 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 574 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Wire connectors large / for 2 cables / for 6 cables up to 630 A The dimensions of the terminal cover for wire connectors large / for 2 cables / for 6 cables up to 630 A are shown below. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 575 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Rear connection stud flat 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 576 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Rear connection stud round 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 577 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Phase barrier Phase barrier for 3VA up to 630 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 578 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Phase barrier for 3VA up to 1000 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 579 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Terminal cover extended 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 580 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Terminal cover offset 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 581 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Insulating plate 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 582 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Insulating plate offset: 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 583 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.2.2 Plug-in and draw-out units Plug-in socket 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 584 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Draw-out unit 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 585 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Door feedthrough 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 586 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.2.3 Manual operators Front mounted rotary operator Front mounted rotary operator for 3VA up to 630 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 587 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Front mounted rotary operator for 3VA up to 1000 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 588 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Door mounted rotary operator Door mounted rotary operator for 3VA up to 630 A (3VA9..7 - 0FK2.) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 589 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Door mounted rotary operator for 3VA up to 630 A (3VA9..7 - 0FK61) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 590 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Door mounted rotary operator with variable depth adapter (3VA9487-0GB10, 3VA9..7 0FK2.) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 591 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Door mounted rotary operator with variable depth adapter (3VA9..7 - 0FK61) 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 592 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Door mounted rotary operator for 3VA up to 1000 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 593 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Supplementary handle for door mounted rotary operator Supplementary handle for door mounted rotary operator 3VA9.87 - 0GC.. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 594 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Supplementary handle for door mounted rotary operator 3VA9.87 - 0GA80 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 595 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Side wall mounted rotary operator Side wall mounted rotary operator 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 596 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Side wall mounted rotary operator with mounting plate 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 597 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Rotary operator with shaft stub Rotary operator with shaft stub for 3VA up to 630 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 598 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Rotary operator with shaft stub for 3VA up to 1000 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 599 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.2.4 Motor operators MO310 motor operator 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 600 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings MO320 motor operator 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 601 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings SEO520 motor operator with stored energy operator 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 602 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.2.5 Accessories for locking, blocking and interlocking Padlock device for handle 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 603 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Locking, blocking or interlocking with cylinder lock Cable interlock module using a Bowden cable 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 604 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Handle blocking device 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 605 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Rear interlock: Mounting on rear wall of panel, fixed-mounted 3VA up to 630 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 606 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 607 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Rear interlock: Mounting with mounting plate and profile rail 3VA up to 630 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 608 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 3VA up to 1000 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 609 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Rear interlock: Mounting on rear wall of panel, plug-in technology 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 610 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 611 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Rear interlock: Mounting on rear wall of panel, draw-out technology 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 612 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 613 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.2.6 Residual current devices Side-mounted residual current devices Basic RCD310 and Basic RCD510 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 614 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Loadside residual current devices Basic RCD320 and Basic RCD520 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 615 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Loadside residual current device Basic RCD520B 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 616 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Loadside residual current device Advanced RCD820 With 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker sizes 100 A to 250 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 617 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings With 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker sizes 400 A to 630 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 618 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.2.7 Communication and system integration COM800 and COM100 breaker data server DSP800 display 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 619 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.2.8 EFB300 external function box 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 620 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.2.9 Test devices TD300 activation and trip box You can find more information in chapter Technical specifications of TD300 (Page 512). TD500 test device You can find more information in chapter Technical specifications of TD500 (Page 524). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 621 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.2.10 External current transformer for N conductor Dimensions of external current transformer for front busbar connector up to 630 A Dimensions of external current transformer as straight-through transformer up to 1250 A Dimensions 25 ... 630 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 622 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings Dimensions 600 A ... 1250 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 623 Technical specifications 6.2 Dimensional drawings 6.2.2.11 Escutcheon 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 624 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.3 Power losses 6.3 Power losses 6.3.1 Power losses of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers 1) The following values for additional power losses result based on the derating factor of 0.9 (< 500 A) or 0.8 ( 500 A) for plug-in and draw-out units 320 A: 24.5 W 400 A: 29.4 W 500 A: 31.7 W 630 A: 50.0 W 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 625 Technical specifications 6.3 Power losses Note The specified power loss applies to 3-pole and 4-pole devices in the case of 3-phase, symmetrical loading. Power losses of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers - starter protection circuit breakers Power losses of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers - switch disconnectors 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 626 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation 6.3.2 Power losses of 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers Note The specified power loss applies to 3-pole and 4-pole devices in the case of 3-phase, symmetrical loading. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 627 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation 6.4.1 Derating of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers The temperature inside the molded case circuit breaker is influenced by the ambient temperature and the current-dependent power loss generated inside the unit. To prevent overloading of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers under difficult thermal conditions, the maximum rated continuous operational current must be limited as a function of the ambient temperature. Note The values were calculated for molded case circuit breakers without accessories. They do not apply to all installation situations of the molded case circuit breaker and may deviate depending upon factors such as cables and busbars, packing density, ventilation, etc. Please observe the applicable overriding guidelines (e.g. IEC 61439). 1) For TM120M only (starter protection circuit breaker) No derating up to the rated operational current In of the molded case circuit breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 628 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation Derating in combination with accessories None of the accessories from the extensive range available for 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers has an influence on the thermal response thresholds of the switching devices except for two accessories that require additional correction factors. These are: 1) For TM120M only (starter protection circuit breaker) No derating up to the rated operational current In of the molded case circuit breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 629 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation No derating up to the rated operational current In of the molded case circuit breaker No derating up to the rated operational current In of the molded case circuit breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 630 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation No derating up to the rated operational current In of the molded case circuit breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 631 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation 6.4.2 Temperature compensation for thermal-magnetic trip units TM210, TM220 and TM240 The trip units for 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers are factory-calibrated to a temperature of 50 C. The thermal response threshold of the trip unit changes when the circuit breaker is operated in a higher or lower ambient temperature. To obtain the characteristic tripping times at a specific ambient temperature, it is necessary to apply correction factors when setting the thermal trip units. Correction factor TK is applied to compensate for the ambient temperature. The first step in calculating the correction factor TK is to determine the setting factor at 50 C: EF(50 C) Setting factor at 50 C I System current Rated operational current of the molded case circuit breaker In Using the setting factor calculated at 50 C, it is possible to read the correction factor K off the following charts: No derating up to the rated operational current In of the molded case circuit breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 632 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation Using the two calculated values, it is possible to determine the temperature compensation TK and finally the setting value for the trip unit Ir(TU): TK(TU) Temperature compensation for molded case circuit breaker with service temperature TU K Correction factor Service temperature of molded case circuit breaker Tu Trip unit setting value: Ir(TU) = In * EF(50 C) * TK Ir(TU) Trip unit setting value with service temperature Tu The operational current must never exceed the maximum rated operational current In of the molded case circuit breaker. If the current calculated for the operating conditions is higher than the rated operational current of the unit, a molded case circuit breaker with the appropriate rated operational current must be deployed. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 633 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation Example 1: Correction of setting values as a function of ambient temperature Starting point: On a 3VA1 100 A molded case circuit breaker with a TM240 100 A trip unit, the real tripping threshold for various different service temperatures must be set to a required system current of I = 90 A. Ambient temperature 60 C: Setting factor EF(50 C) = (90 / 100) = 0.9 Correction factor K = 0.58 (see chart above) Temperature compensation TK(60 C) = (0.58 * (60 C to 50 C) / 100) + 1 = 1.058 Setting value Ir(60 C) = 100 A * 0.9 * 1.058 = 95 A Ambient temperature 40 C: Setting factor EF(50 C) = (90 / 100) = 0.9 Correction factor K = 0.58 Temperature compensation TK(40 C) = (0.58 * (40 C ... 50 C) / 100) + 1 = 0.942 Setting value Ir(40 C) = 100 A * 0.9 * 0.942 = 85 A If the setting value calculated for the thermal trip unit Ir(TU) is outside the possible setting range, an appropriate molded case circuit breaker with a higher or lower rated operational current must be selected and the compensation calculation then performed again. Note These values do not apply to all installation situations of the molded case circuit breaker and may deviate depending upon factors such as cables and busbars, packing density, ventilation, etc. Please observe the applicable overriding guidelines (e.g. IEC 61439). Example 2: Calculation of the tripping time Starting point: Based on the example above, the tripping time for an overcurrent IO = 360 A will now be calculated. To compensate for the ambient temperature of 60 C, rather than 50 C, the thermal trip unit has been set Ir(60 C) = 95 A for a system current I = 90 A. The first step is to calculate the ratio between the overcurrent and the system current: Io/I = 360 A / 90 A = 4 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 634 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation Using this value, it is now possible to read the tripping time from the characteristics chart: Tripping time (schematic representation) Inclusion of accessories None of the accessories from the extensive range available for 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers has an influence on the thermal response thresholds of the switching devices except for two accessories that require additional correction factors. These are: Plug-in version / draw-out version Residual current devices None of the other accessories has an influence on the thermal response thresholds of trip units. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 635 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation The table below shows the correction factors of setting value Ir for the trip units of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers in plug-in / draw-out technology and for 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers combined with residual current devices: Example Starting point: The current loading of a 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker is calculated to be 90 A and the ambient temperature 65 C for a given application. The plug-in version of the molded case circuit breaker will be used. The appropriate size of molded case circuit breaker is determined first on the basis of the correction factor for 3VA1 plug-in technology (see table above): Design of assembly at 50 C: Ir = (90 A / 0.9) = 100 A It is therefore necessary to select a molded case circuit breaker that allows a setting value of 100 A on the thermal overload release at a calibration temperature of 50 C. A 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker 160 A with In = 125 A is therefore used for the application. The temperature compensation is then calculated according to the method described above: Ambient temperature 65 C: Setting factor EF(50 C) = (100 / 125) = 0.8 Correction factor K = 0.69 (from chart) Switching device temperature compensation TK(65 C) = (0.69 * (65 C ... 50 C) / 100) + 1 = 1.1 Setting value Ir(65 C) = 125 A * 0.9 * 1.1 = 124 A Note These values do not apply to all installation situations of the molded case circuit breaker and may deviate depending upon factors such as cables and busbars, packing density, ventilation, etc. Please observe the applicable overriding guidelines (e.g. IEC 61439). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 636 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation 6.4.3 Additional correction factors with frequencies other than 50/60 Hz for 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers The temperature rise in the bimetal is greater at frequencies above 50/60 Hz. This is due to eddy-current losses and the reduction in the available conductor cross section as a result of the skin effect. The rated operational current must therefore be reduced from the value used in 50/60 Hz applications. In an application with 400 Hz, this means the following for the example from chapter Derating of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers (Page 628) with a 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker when current Ir = 90 A is required: Setting value Ir(400 Hz) = 90 A * 0.9 = 81 A Where ambient temperatures differ from the calibration temperature, temperature compensation as described in chapter Derating of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers (Page 628) must be performed. In addition, a correction factor for setting the magnetic trip unit as a function of frequency must be applied. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 637 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation Example Starting point: A 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker 100 A with a TM240 trip unit is used for a 400 Hz application. The molded case circuit breaker is required to trip instantaneously in response to an overcurrent of 900 A. The maximum permissible rated continuous operational current is calculated first: 100 A * 0.9 = 90 A The setting value for instantaneous short-circuit protection (Ii) is then determined on the basis of the correction factor from the table above: Ii = 900 A * 0.7 = 630 A 6.4.4 Correction factors with direct current for the thermal-magnetic trip units of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers With DC systems, a correction factor must be applied to the magnetic trip unit. Where ambient temperatures differ from the calibration temperature, temperature compensation as described in chapter Derating of 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers (Page 628) must be performed. Example: Starting point: A 3VA1 molded case circuit breaker 160 A with a TM240 trip unit is used in a DC system. The molded case circuit breaker is required to trip instantaneously in response to an overcurrent of 1200 A. The setting value for the instantaneous short-circuit protection (Ii) is: Ii = 1200 A * 0.7 = 840 A 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 638 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation 6.4.5 Derating for the 3VA1 switch disconnector The 3VA1 SD switch disconnectors do not have a trip unit. The temperature inside the switch disconnector is however influenced by the ambient temperature and the current-dependent power loss generated inside the unit. Nonetheless, 3VA1 switch disconnectors up to 125 A do not require derating up to 70 C. To prevent overloading of switch disconnectors over 125 A under difficult thermal conditions, the maximum rated continuous operational current must be limited as a function of the ambient temperature: No derating up to the rated operational current In of the switch disconnector 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 639 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation Limitation of the rated continuous operational current in combination with accessories The table below shows the maximum rated continuous operational current for the plug-in version of switch disconnectors in sizes 160 A, 250 A and 400 A and for switch disconnectors combined with residual current devices: No derating up to the rated operational current In of the molded case circuit breaker No derating up to the rated operational current In of the molded case circuit breaker None of the other available accessories require derating of the 3VA1 switch disconnector. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 640 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation 6.4.6 Derating for the electronic trip units of 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers The current measuring circuits of the electronic trip units of 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers are not affected by the ambient temperature. The Rogowski coils integrated in the trip unit measure the current and compare it to the set tripping threshold. Higher or lower ambient temperatures do not influence the tripping threshold, which means that it is not necessary to apply correction factors. Limitation of the rated operational current The temperature inside the molded case circuit breaker is nonetheless influenced by the ambient temperature and the current-dependent power loss generated inside the unit. To prevent overloading of molded case circuit breakers under difficult thermal conditions, the maximum rated continuous operational current must therefore be limited as a function of the ambient temperature in some cases: The tables below specify the maximum rated uninterrupted operational current as a function of the accessories to be taken into account and the ambient temperature. The operational current must never exceed the maximum rated operational current of the molded case circuit breaker. Note These values do not apply to all installation situations of the molded case circuit breaker and may deviate depending upon factors such as cables and busbars, packing density, ventilation, etc. Please observe the applicable overriding guidelines (e.g. IEC 61439). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 641 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers, fixed-mounted versions 1) Only the COM060 communication module has an effect on derating. Other internal accessories can be used without restriction. COM060 COM060 communication module No derating up to the rated operational current In of the molded case circuit breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 642 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers, plug-in and draw-out versions 1) Only the COM060 communication module has an effect on derating. Other internal accessories can be used without restriction. COM060 COM060 communication module No derating up to the rated operational current In of the molded case circuit breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 643 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers with RCD820 residual current device 1) Only the COM060 communication module has an effect on derating. Other internal accessories can be used without restriction. COM060 COM060 communication module No derating up to the rated operational current In of the molded case circuit breaker 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 644 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation Examples Example 1 Starting point: A plug-in version of a 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker 160 A with an ETU350 LSI trip unit is to be operated at 70 C: Ir(max 70 C) = 160 A No derating is required. Example 2 Starting point: A plug-in version of a 3VA2 molded case circuit breaker 250 A with an ETU850 LSI trip unit is to be operated at 60 C with the COM060 communication module: Ir(max 60 C) = 189 A 6.4.7 Use of terminals with auxiliary conductor connection When connecting terminals with control wire tap are used, the total current from the main circuit and control wire must not exceed the maximum rated operational current of the 3VA1 and 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 645 Technical specifications 6.4 Derating and temperature compensation 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 646 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 A Appendix A.1 Standards and approvals Description Table A- 1 Standard CISPR11 3VA1 and 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers conform to the following international standards Class A Class B Title Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference suppression of equipment in industrial environments. Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference suppression of equipment in domestic environments. IEC 60664-1 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems. IEC 60068-2-1 "Ab" Environmental testing - Part 2-1: Tests - Test A: Cold IEC 60068-2-2 "Bd" Environmental testing - Part 2-2: Tests - Test B: Dry heat IEC 60068-2-27 "Ea" Environmental testing - Part 2-27: Tests - Test Ea and guidance Shock IEC 60068-2-30 "Db" Environmental testing - Part 2-30: Tests - Test Db: Damp heat, cyclic (12 + 12 hours) IEC 60068-2-52 Environmental testing - Part 2: Tests - Test Kb: Salt mist, cyclic (sodium chloride solution) IEC 60068-2-6 "Fc" Environmental testing - Part 2-6: Tests - Test Fc: Vibration (sinusoidal) IEC 60228 Class 1 Solid conductors IEC 60228 Class 2 Stranded conductors IEC 60228 Class 5 Flexible conductors IEC 60228 Class 6 Very flexible conductors (more flexibility than Class 5) IEC 60364-4-41 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 4-41: Protection for safety - Protection against electric shock VDE 0100-410 (IEC 60364-4-41) Protection for safety - Protection against electric shock IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code) IEC 60947-1 / DIN EN 60947-1 (VDE 0600-100) Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - General rules IEC / EN 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - General rules IEC / EN 60947-1, Annex S Digital inputs and/or digital outputs contained in switchgear and controlgear IEC / EN 60947-2 Edition 4.1, 05.2009 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 2: Circuit-Breakers IEC / EN 60947-2, Annex B Circuit-breakers incorporating residual current protection 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 647 Appendix A.1 Standards and approvals Standard IEC / EN 60947-2, Annex H Title "Test sequence for circuit-breakers for IT systems" "Circuit-breakers for IT systems" IEC / EN 60947-3 / DIN EN 60947-3 (VDE 0660-107) Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors and fuse-combination units IEC 60947-4-1 / DIN EN 60947-4-1 (VDE 0660-102) Contactors and motor-starters - Electromechanical contactors and motorstarters IEC / EN 61000-4-2 Electrostatic discharge immunity test IEC / EN 61000-4-3 Radiated, radio-frequency, electromagnetic field immunity test IEC / EN 61000-4-4 Electrical fast transient/burst immunity test IEC / EN 61000-4-5 Surge immunity test IEC / EN 61000-4-6 Immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields IEC 61557-12 Electrical safety in low voltage distribution systems up to 1000 V a.c. and 1500 V d.c. - Equipment for testing, measuring or monitoring of protective measures - Part 12: Performance measuring and monitoring devices (PMD) UL489 Annex SE "Firmware analysis for safety-relevant applications in electronic trip units" RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC (Directive on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment) 3VA molded case circuit breakers conform to the following national standards Please go to (http://www.siemens.com/3VA-Documentation) for a list of national standards to which 3VA molded case circuit breakers conform. Certification by marine classification societies You can find a list of certifications by marine classification societies for 3VA molded case circuit breakers at (http://www.siemens.com/3VA-Documentation). Disposal of waste electronic equipment Waste electronic equipment must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste, e.g. household waste. When disposing of waste electronic equipment, the current local national/international regulations must be observed. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 648 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 ESD guidelines B.1 B Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) ESD components are destroyed by voltage and energy far below the limits of human perception. Voltages of this kind occur as soon as a device or an assembly is touched by a person who is not electrostatically discharged. ESD components which have been subject to such voltage are usually not recognized immediately as being defective, because the malfunction does not occur until after a longer period of operation. ESD Guidelines NOTICE Electrostatic sensitive devices Electronic modules contain components that can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge. These modules can be easily destroyed or damaged by improper handling. * You must discharge your body electrostatically immediately before touching an electronic component. To do this, touch a conductive, grounded object, e.g., a bare metal part of a switch cabinet or the water pipe. * Always hold the component by the plastic enclosure. * Electronic modules should not be brought into contact with electrically insulating materials such as plastic film, plastic parts, insulating table supports or clothing made of synthetic fibers. * Always place electrostatic sensitive devices on conductive bases. * Always store and transport electronic modules or components in ESD-safe conductive packaging, e.g. metallized plastic or metal containers. Leave the component in its packaging until installation. NOTICE Storage and transport If you have to store or transport the component in non-conductive packaging, you must first pack the component in ESD-safe, conductive material, e.g., conductive foam rubber, ESD bag. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 649 ESD guidelines B.1 Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) The diagrams below illustrate the required ESD protective measures for electrostatic sensitive devices. (1) ESD seat (2) ESD standing position (3) ESD seat and ESD standing position Protective measures a Conductive floor b ESD table c ESD footwear d ESD smock e ESD bracelet f Cubicle ground connection Figure B-1 ESD work center 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 650 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 C List of abbreviations C.1 List of abbreviations Overview Table C- 1 Meaning of abbreviations used in this document Abbreviation AC Meaning Alternating voltage ACT ACTIVE (ready signal) AL ALARM (pre-alarm) ASCII [Modbus interface] American Standard Code for Information Interchange ATAM Adjustable Thermal Adjustable Magnetic Trip Unit (adjustable thermal overload release, adjustable magnetic trip unit with short-circuit protection) ATFM Adjustable Thermal Fixed Magnetic Trip Unit (adjustable thermal overload release, permanently set magnetic trip unit with short-circuit protection) ATSE Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment AUX Auxiliary switch C Common CB-S Circuit Breaker Switch (standard auxiliary switch (NO contact)) CD Compact Disk COM-DO COM-Draw-out-Kit DC Direct voltage DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normierung e. V. (German Institute for Standardization) DISCON DISCONNECT DO Draw out EFB External Function Box ESD Electrostatic sensitive devices EMC Electromagnetic compatibility EN European standard ETU Electronic trip unit FTAM Fixed thermal adjustable magnetic trip unit (permanently set thermal overload release, adjustable magnetic trip unit with short-circuit protection) FTFM Fixed thermal fixed magnetic trip unit (permanently set thermal overload release, permanently set magnetic trip unit with short-circuit protection) G Ground fault (protection) GF [tripping characteristic] Ground fault HH-fuse High-voltage fuses 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 651 List of abbreviations C.1 List of abbreviations Abbreviation I Meaning Instantaneous (short-circuit protection) I Isolated I/O Input / Output IEC International Electrotechnical Commission INST [tripping characteristic] INST [tripping characteristic] INSTA Final distribution area IP International Protection IT Injection Tester IT Isolated ground, French: "Isole Terre" L Long-time delay (overload protection) L Overload release LBS Load Break Switch (switch disconnector) LCS Leading changeover switch LI Overload protection (L) and instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) LIG Overload protection (L), instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) and groundfault protection (G) LIN Overload protection (L), instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) and neutralconductor protection (N) LSI Overload protection (L), short-time delayed short-circuit protection (S) and instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) LSIN Overload protection (L), short-time delayed short-circuit protection (S), instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) and neutral-conductor protection (N) LSING Overload protection (L), short-time delayed short-circuit protection (S), instantaneous short-circuit protection (I) and ground-fault protection (N) LT [tripping characteristic] Partial overload range of the characteristic curve of a switching device MCCB Molded case circuit breaker MO Motor operator MRCD Modular residual current device [without integrated trip device] N Neutral conductor NC Normally closed contact NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NO Normally open contact LV Low voltage LV fuse Low-voltage fuse PAC Power Analysis & Control PI Plug-in (unit) RCD Residual Current Device R RESET RCR Residual Current Release REC Reclose (automatic reset) RJ [connector] Registered Jack 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 652 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 List of abbreviations C.1 List of abbreviations Abbreviation RMS Meaning Root Mean Square RS [interface] Formerly: Radio Selector; now usually: Recommended Standard RTU [Modbus interface] Remote Terminal Unit SAS Short circuit alarm switch PLC Programmable logic controller ST Shunt trip STF Shunt trip flexible STL Shunt trip left T Test T [IT systems] French: Terre (ground) TC Test device for molded case circuit breaker or MRCD, suitable for systems with grounded phase TCP Transmission Control Protocol TD Test Device TM Thermal Magnetic TMTU Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit TRIP-IND TRIP INDICATOR (trip alarm switch) TRUE RMS TRUE root-mean-square TU Trip Unit UAR Universal release UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UR Undervoltage release USB Universal Serial Bus UPS Uninterruptible power supply UVR Undervoltage release VDE Verband der Elektrotechnik Elektronik Informationstechnik e.V. (Association of German Electrical Engineers) VDI Verein Deutscher Ingenieure (Association of German Engineers) ZSI Zone selective interlocking 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 653 List of abbreviations C.1 List of abbreviations Table C- 2 Meanings of symbols and abbreviations SymMeaning bol/abbreviation t Delay time In I1 I"KG Residual current; rated residual current; response current I 2t IB Ib Let-through energy Icm Icn Ics Inrush current Initial balanced short-circuit current Take-over current Pickup value blocking protection Making capacity; rated short-circuit making capacity Rated breaking capacity; rated short-circuit breaking capacity Maximum short-circuit breaking capacity (partial selectivity); rated service shortcircuit breaking capacity Icu Maximum short-circuit breaking capacity (full selectivity); rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icw Rated short-time withstand current; rated short-time current Id ID Ig Prospective current; residual current; response residual current Ii Ik IKD IK MAX Let-through current Ground-fault protection; ground-fault release; ground-fault current setting value Instantaneous tripping current; instantaneous short-circuit protection; instantaneous magnetic protection; rated tripping current of instantaneous trip Short-circuit current Uninterrupted short-circuit current Maximum short-circuit current IKmaxline In InG Uninterrupted short-circuit current of system IP Iq Rated peak withstand current, impulse short-circuit current Ir Thermal protection; setting current; response value; current setting value of adjustable overload protection (pickup value overload protection) Is Isc Isd Limit current with selectivity; maximum short-circuit current for selectivity limit Rated operational current Rated operational current (generator) Rated conditional short-circuit current that a switching device (e.g. power contactor,) protected by a short-circuit protective device (e.g. motor protection breaker) can carry for the duration of the tripping delay of the protective device. Prospective current Short-time delayed tripping current; response current of S protection; short-time delayed short-circuit release; short-time delayed short-circuit protection; delay time of S protection Ith IU Conventional free-air thermal current RA t1 t2 Contact resistance of exposed conductive part ground tA Safety clearance Rated uninterrupted current Time of inrush current Ramp up time 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 654 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 List of abbreviations C.1 List of abbreviations SymMeaning bol/abbreviation tb Delay time (delay of blocking time) td tg Response time Delay time associated with the adjustable response current; trip time associated with ground-fault current setting value ti "Virtual" trip time of I protection; highest trip time associated with rated tripping current of instantaneous trip Tp tr Trip time; delay time; time-lag class tsd Trip time associated with short-time delayed tripping current; delay time of S protection tS tZSI Trip time associated with current setting value of adjustable overload protection Fuse pre-arcing time Delay time of all molded case circuit breakers which detect the short circuit but do not receive a blocking signal when ZSI is activated. U Voltage across main contacts of the molded case circuit breaker Ue UNn Maximum voltage; rated operational voltage Nominal system voltage 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 655 List of abbreviations C.1 List of abbreviations 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 656 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 D Conversion tables The U.S. units can be converted to the corresponding European/metric units using the conversion tables listed. Note No liability assumed for completeness or accuracy No liability can be assumed for the completeness or accuracy of the values listed in this section of the manual. Conversion of North American cross section dimensions into metric cross section dimensions Metric cross-sections in accordance with VDE (Verband Deutscher Elektroingenieure (Association of German Electrical Engineers)) (mm2) conductor cross-sections in accordance with AWG (American Wire Gauge) or kcmil (Thousand Circular Mils) AWG mm2 conversion table AWG / kcmil AWG mm2 Metric equivalent [mm2] 20 Diameter d/mm 0.81 1) 0.52 0.75 18 1.02 1) 0.82 1 16 1.29 1) 1.3 1.5 14 1.63 1) 2.08 2.5 12 2.05 1) 3.31 4 10 2.59 1) 5.26 6 8 3.26 1) 8.4 10 6 4.12 1) 13.3 16 4 5.19 1) 21.2 25 2 6.54 1) 33.6 35 1 7.34 1) 42.4 50 1/0 8.25 1) 53.5 -- 2/0 9.27 1) 67.4 70 3/0 10.4 1) 85.0 95 4/0 11.68 1) 107 120 1) Diameters over Solid Conductors and Cross-Sectional Area for All Solid and Stranded Conductors Source: Standard UL 83 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 657 Conversion tables kcmil mm2 conversion table AWG / kcmil kcmil mm2 250 Diameter d/mm 14.6 1) 300 16 1) 152 350 17.3 1) 177 400 18.49 1) 203 500 20.65 1) 253 600 22.68 1) 304 800 26.16 1) 405 1000 29.26 1) 507 1500 35.86 1) 760 2000 41.45 1) 1010 126 1) Diameter over Round Concentric-Lay-Stranded Conductors for Classes B, C and D Source: Standard UL83 Other conversions Conversion factors for units of length Length Conversion factor 1 inch (") 25.4 millimeters (mm) 1 centimeter 0.3937 inches (") Conversion factors for units of weight Weight Conversion factor 1 ounce (Oz.) 28.35 grams (g) 1 pound (lb.) 0.454 kilograms (kg) 1 kilogram (kg) 2.205 pounds (lb.) Pound (lb.) Ounce (Oz.) Conversion for units of temperature Temperature 100 degrees Centigrade (C) 212 degrees Fahrenheit (C) 80 C 176 F 60 C 140 F 40 C 104 F 20 C 68 F 0 C 32 F 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 658 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Conversion tables Temperature - 5 C 23 F - 10 C 14 F - 15 C 5 F - 20 C - 4 F - 25 C - 13 F - 30 C - 22 F Conversion factors for tightening torques Tightening torque Conversion factor 1 Newton meter (Nm) 8.85 lbF in, 8.85 lb-in (inch-pound) 1.36 Newton meter (Nm) 1 lbF ft, 1 lb-ft (food-pound) 0.113 Newton meter (Nm) 1 lbF in, 1 lb-in (inch-pound); 1 / 12 lb-ft 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 659 Conversion tables 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 660 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Glossary AUTO Method of remote operation of the motor operators via control cables, e.g. PLC. Breaking capacity The breaking capacity is the rms value of the current at a specific cos (power factor) and a specific voltage which can be safely interrupted by a switching device or fuse under prescribed conditions. The rms value of the symmetrical component applies in the case of alternating current. I2t characteristic The I2t characteristic is a curve which represents the minimum or maximum values of I2t in relation to break times as a function of the prospective current under defined operating conditions. I2t value The I2t value is the thermal value of a prospective or a limited short-circuit current (letthrough current). Let-through current The let-through current ID is the maximum instantaneous current value during the breaking time of a switching device or fuse. Limited short-circuit currents occur if the switching device reduces the amplitude of the short-circuit current due to, for example, resistance, switching delay and peak arc voltage. The let-through current of a device such as a current-limiting fuse or a current-limiting molded case circuit breaker determines the thermal load (I2t value) imposed on equipment connected downstream of the device (current limiting). LOCK Operating mode of motor operators; the operating mechanism is locked and cannot be operated. Making capacity The making capacity is the value of the prospective making current which the switching device can safely conduct at the instant of closing under prescribed conditions for a specific circuit. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 661 Glossary For molded case circuit breakers, the making capacity is expressed as the maximum possible instantaneous value of the potential prospective current at the input terminals for the specified voltage. MANUAL Local, manual operating mode of motor operators. Protective characteristic The protective characteristic is determined by the rated operational current and the setting and tripping values of the circuit breaker. Rated breaking capacity The rated breaking capacity is the maximum current that can be interrupted by a switching device under certain conditions. Rated frequency Design frequency for a switching device and reference value for other characteristics of the device. Rated making capacity The rated making capacity is the maximum current that a switching device can conduct at the instant of closing in accordance with the utilization category at the relevant rated operational voltage. Rated operational current The rated operational current In for molded case circuit breakers is equivalent to the rated uninterrupted current IU and to the conventional free-air thermal current Ith. Rated operational voltage The rated operational voltage Ue of a switching device, e.g. a molded case circuit breaker, is the voltage which serves as a reference to state other characteristics of the device. The maximum rated operational voltage must never be higher than the rated insulation voltage. With multi-phase circuits, the specified voltage is generally the phase-to-phase voltage. Rated peak withstand current, impulse short-circuit current Maximum permissible instantaneous (peak) value of the prospective short-circuit current in the current path under the highest load. It characterizes the dynamic short-circuit strength of a switching device. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 662 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Glossary Rated residual current The rated residual current In is the fault (residual) current for which residual currentoperated circuit breakers are designed. The residual current rating is declared on the rating plate of the device. Rated service short-circuit breaking capacity The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity Ics is the short-circuit current determined by the operational voltage that a molded case circuit breaker is capable of interrupting repeatedly (test sequence 0 - C0 - CO, formerly P - 2). After a molded case circuit breaker has interrupted a short circuit, it can continue to carry the rated operational current despite increased self-heating and will trip again in the event of a short circuit. Rated short-circuit breaking capacity The rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn of a molded case circuit breaker is the maximum current that the circuit breaker can safely interrupt at a specific rated operational voltage and rated frequency. It is specified as an rms value. With AC molded case circuit breakers, the rated short-circuit breaking capacity must be independent of the magnitude of the DC component. The rated short-circuit breaking capacity also ensures that the molded case circuit breaker can interrupt every current up to the rated short-circuit breaking capacity in the event of a line-frequency recovery voltage with 110% of the rated operational voltage. This applies: To alternating current at every value of the power factor, but not lower than the value defined in the relevant test specification. To direct current (unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer) with every time constant, but not greater than the value defined in the relevant test specification. The short-circuit breaking capacity does not apply in the event of a recovery voltage at line frequency above 110% of the rated operational voltage. Rated short-circuit making capacity The rated short-circuit making capacity Icm of a molded case circuit breaker is the maximum current that the circuit breaker can safely interrupt at a specific rated operational voltage and rated frequency. Unlike other characteristic data, this is specified as a peak value. With AC molded case circuit breakers, the rated short-circuit making capacity must be at least equal to the rated short-circuit breaking capacity multiplied by a factor n. The rated short-circuit making capacity is calculated to allow the molded case circuit breaker to conduct the current during closing at a voltage of up to 110% inclusive of the rated operational voltage. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 663 Glossary Rated short-time current Permissible rms value of the AC component of the prospective short-circuit current which the switching device is capable of conducting for a specific time period, e.g. from 0.05 s to 1 s (thermal short-circuit strength). Rated short-time withstand current The rated short-time withstand current Icw is specified as an rms value of the short-circuit current and characterizes the thermal strength of a circuit of a switchgear assembly under brief load conditions. The rated short-time withstand current calculation normally refers to a period of 1 s. The reference time must be specified if it deviates from the above. The rated short-time withstand current is specified for the distribution and/or main busbars of a switchgear assembly. Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity The rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu is the maximum short-circuit current that a molded case circuit breaker is capable of interrupting (test sequence 0 - C0, formerly P 1). After the molded case circuit breaker has cleared the short circuit, it is capable of tripping with increased tolerances under overload conditions. Limit value of rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity Icu. Rated uninterrupted current The rated uninterrupted current IU of a switching device, e.g. a molded case circuit breaker, is a current that the device can conduct in uninterrupted operation (for weeks, months or years). This current is specified by the manufacturer. Rating The rating is the power that a switching device is capable of switching at the associated rated operational voltage in accordance with the utilization category, e.g. power contactor utilization category AC-3:37 kW at 400 V. Remote control Or AUTO; method of remote operation of the motor operators via control cables, e.g. PLC. Short circuit Connection with a negligibly low impedance between two points of different potential in an electric circuit. The short-circuit current is a multiple of the rated operating current. Short circuits can cause thermal or mechanical damage to switching devices and other parts of an electrical installation. 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 664 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Glossary Short-circuit strength This is the resistivity of a switching device in the closed state, along with its components (e.g. releases), or a complete switchboard, to the electrodynamic and thermal stresses which arise in the event of a short circuit. The characteristic for the dynamic stress is the rated peak withstand current, which is the maximum instantaneous value of the short-circuit current. The characteristic for the thermal stress of the short-circuit current is the root-mean-square value of the short-circuit current throughout its duration. Tripping current of overload release The current value at which a trip unit trips within a specified time. Tripping current, ground fault When the ground-fault current reaches or exceeds this limit value, the ground-fault protection, for example, of a molded case circuit breaker, is tripped. Tripping current, instantaneous When this current limit is exceeded, the circuit breaker trips instantaneously. Tripping current, overload When this uninterrupted current limit is exceeded within a predefined time period, the circuit breaker trips (inverse-time delayed tripping!). Tripping current, short-time delayed When this current limit is exceeded, the circuit breaker trips after a predefined time delay. Tripping time Period of time from the instant of commencement of trip command output to the moment at which the command becomes irrevocable (timing concept for the tripping of circuit breakers). 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 665 Glossary 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 666 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Index 3 3VA connection options, 486 3VA1, 17 Switch disconnector, 165 3VA2, 18 4 400 Hz system, 179 A Accessories 3VA1, 185 3VA2, 185 Color coding, 37 Combinability, 186 Internal, 191 Mounting locations, 191 Overview, 28 Switch disconnector, 165 ACT, 417, 429 Adapter kit cylinder lock, 366, 370 Advanced RCD820, (RCD820) AL, 417, 429 AL1, 460 AL2, 460 Alarm, 399, 417, 429, 453 Alarm display Draw-out technology, 296 ETU, 98 Alarm switch, 197, 199, 202, 202, 468 Electrical alarm switch EAS, 199 Position signaling switch, 295 Residual current device, 405, 423, 441, 460 Short-circuit alarm switch SAS, 200 Ambient conditions, 58 Ambient temperature, 58 Application examples, 21 Applications, 15 Arcing space, 61 AUTO, 341 Autotrip plunger, 281, 289 Auxiliary circuit connector, 301 Auxiliary contact, 423, 441, 459 Auxiliary release, 204 Auxiliary switch, 197, 202 AUX, 198 Leading changeover switch LCS, 198 Position signaling switch, 295 B Basic RCD310, (RCD310) Basic RCD510, (RCD510) Bowden cable, 374 Length, 375 Box terminal, 219 Control wire tap, 270 Breaker data server Draw-out technology, 293 Breaking capacity, 51, 51 3VA2, 52 Direct current, 174 Breaking capacity class, 51 Bus connectors extended Edgewise, 238 Front, 234 Bus connectors offset, 236 Busbar connector Control wire tap, 271 Busbars, 213 C Cable stripping, 213 Cables, 211 Cables and busbars Busbars, 213 Cables, 211 CB-S, 462 Certification, 58 Characteristic curve, 72 Circuit breaker identification, 42 Circuit breaker labels, 42 Circuit Breaker Switch, 462 Clearance, 61 Climatic requirements, 58 COM060 communication module Draw-out technology, 293 COM800 / COM100 breaker data server, 486 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 667 Index Communication DSP800 display, 489 ETU application areas, 488 ETU protection functions, 488 Communications interface, 300, 468 Complete kit Draw-out technology, 287 Plug-in technology, 279 Components 3VA1, 47 3VA2, 48 Compression lugs, 213 Conductive floor, 650 CONNECT (draw-out version), 286 Connection information, 44 Connection stud, 242 Connection stud flat, 244 Connection technology Control wire tap, 269 Factory-assembled, 217 Overview, 214 Contact system, 50 Control elements, 36 Control wire tap, 269 Conversion kit, 279, 288 Plug-in technology, 279 Correction factor (derating), 632 Cover frame, 528 Labeling plate, 530 Tolerance compensation, 529 Cubicle ground connection, 650 Current limiting, 49 Current selectivity, 54 Current sensor, 103 Current setting value, 75 Current transformer for N conductor, 525 Cylinder lock, 365, 369 D DC insulating plate, 251 Delay time (RCD), 403, 421, 435, 458 Derating, 58, 111 3VA1, 628 Correction factor, 632 Switch disconnector, 639 Design 3VA1, 47 3VA2, 48 Digital input (EFB300), 496 Digital output (EFB300), 496 Dimension MO310 motor operator, 600 SEO520 motor operator with stored energy operator, 602 Dimensions Accessories for locking, blocking and interlocking, 603 Basic unit, 565 Communication and system integration, 619 Connection technology, 572, 577 Manual operators, 587 MO320 motor operator, 601 Plug-in and draw-out units, 584 Residual current devices, 614 Test devices, 621 DIN rail, 382 DIN rail adapter, 531, 531 Discharge, 649 DISCON (draw-out version), 286 Display Power supply, 131 Tripped, 344, 400, 418, 431, 455 Display (ETU), 96 Symbols, 96 Distributed neutral conductor, 79 Door feedthrough, 304 Door interlock Door mounted rotary operator, 317 Front mounted rotary operator, 314 Door mounted rotary operator Door interlock, 317 Illumination kit, 330 Interlocking, 327 Locking, 325, 326 Supplementary handle, 320 Tolerance compensator, 318 Variable depth adapter, 321 Double-break contact system, 50 Double-rotary contact system, 50 Draw-out technology, 273, 288, 293, 300 Auxiliary circuit connector, 301 Complete kit, 287 Conversion kit, 288 Defined position, 286 Installation overview, 275 Position signaling switch, 295 Rear interlock, 384 Residual current device, 394 Sliding clutch, 286 Variable depth adapter, 321 Draw-out unit Indication of switching positions, 33 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 668 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Index DSP800 display, 489 Dynamic selectivity, 54 E EFB300, 495 Functions, 498 Operating mode, 501 Test mode, 503 ZSI (zone selective interlocking), 499 EFB300 external function box, 495 Electromagnetic compatibility, 57 Electronic trip unit, (ETU), 87 Electrostatic sensitive devices, 649 EMC (electromagnetic compatibility), 57 EMERGENCY-STOP, 345 Energy flow direction, 105 Energy management powermanager, 494 ESD bracelet, 650 ESD footwear, 650 ESD protective measures, 650 ESD seat, 650 ESD smock, 650 ESD standing position, 650 ESD table, 650 ETU, 19, 70 Connections, 89 Display, 95 Line protection, 115 Operator controls, 93 Parameter, 116, 119, 127, 132, 135 Setting parameters, 101 ETU (electronic trip unit), 87 External current transformers for N conductor, 525 F Fire protection, 387 Free tripping, 46 Front mounted rotary operator Door interlock, 314 Indication of the breaker status, 313 Interlocking, 327 Locking, 326 Full selectivity, 55 G G release, 76 Ground-fault protection, 76, 387 H Handle blocking device, 374, 377 HP switch, 197 HQ switch, 197 I I2t characteristic, 75 Illumination kit, 330 Indication of the breaker status, 285, 313 Motor operator, 340 Installation aid rear interlock, 382 Installation altitude, 59 Instantaneous short-circuit protection, 76 Insulating measures, 252 Insulating plate, 250 Insulation accessories, 246 Insulation test, 401, 456 Interlock combinations, 373, 376 Handle blocking device, 378 Rear interlock, 381 Interlocking, 361, 361, 369 Bowden cable, 374 Combinations, 373, 376, 378, 381 Door mounted rotary operator, 327 Electrical, 204 Front, 369, 369 Front mounted rotary operator, 327 Handle blocking device, 374, 377 Installation aid, 382 Mounting plate, 382 Plug-in and draw-out units, 384 Rear, 379, 379 Releasing a different molded case circuit breaker, 373 Side wall mounted rotary operator, 327 Interlocking module, 380, 384 Interlocking rod, 380 Isolating features, 166 IT system, 181 Insulating measure, 251 K Key data, 43 Knowledge Manager, 43 L Labeling plate (cover frame), 530 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 669 Index Labels, 42 Limitation of rated operational current 3VA2, 641 Line protection, 110 Load acceptance, 102 Load management, 102 Load shedding, 102 LOCK, 341 Locking, 360, 360 Door mounted rotary operator, 325, 326 Front mounted rotary operator, 324, 326 Rotary operator with shaft stub, 326 Side wall mounted rotary operator, 325, 326 M Magnetic trip unit with short-circuit protection, 85 MANUAL, 341 Measured value display (ETU), 99 Meter test (TD500), 521 MO320, 339 MO320 modes, 341 Modular residual current device, 478 Molded case circuit breaker 3VA1, 17 3VA2, 18 Monitoring, 429 Motor operator, 339, 341 Reset mode, 344 Mounting locations, 191 Mounting plate, 323, 382 MRCD, 393, 478, (Parameterization) N Neutral conductor Protection, 79 Neutral conductor protection, 79 No-load switching operation, 204, 544, 553 Nut keeper kit, 233 Right-angled, 240 O Offset compensator, 319 Operating mode (EFB300), 501 Operation of molded case circuit breaker, 46 Optional installation variants, 32 Overload protection, 75 P Padlock device Cylinder lock, 365 Handle, 363 INSTA distribution board, 364 Parameter display (ETU), 100 Partial selectivity, 55 Personnel safety, 387 Phase barrier, 247 Plant monitoring, 494 Plug-in technology, 272, 279 Auxiliary circuit connector, 301 Complete kit, 279 Installation overview, 275 Rear interlock, 384 Residual current device, 394 Pollution degree, 58 Position signaling switch, 295 Possible uses, 14 Power loss 3VA1, 141, 626 3VA2, 142, 627 Power monitoring, 494 Power monitoring system, 494 powerconfig, 490, 491, 522 powermanager, 494 Pre-alarm, 417, 429 Pre-alarm threshold, 460 Protection in the case of indirect contact, 387 R Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity, 51 RCD310, 397 Function overview, 414 RCD320, 415 Function overview, 427 RCD510, 398 Function overview, 414 RCD520, 415 Function overview, 427 RCD520B, 428 Function overview, 451 RCD820, 452 Function overview, 469 RCD-to-ETU connecting cable, 467, 468 RCR, 406, 412 Reference point, 75 Relay contact, 460 Release Auxiliary release, 204 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 670 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 Index RCR, 412 Shunt trip, 204 Undervoltage release, 205 Universal release, 205 Remote test button:, 461 REMOTE-T, 461 Requirements (climatic), 58 Reset mode, 344 Residual current, 386 Residual current device, 386 Alarm switch, 423, 441 Combination with 3VA circuit breaker, 394 Communications interface, 468 Design, 386 DIN rail adapter, 532 Insulation test, 401, 419, 432, 456 Loadside, 452 Modular, 393, 478, 478 Parameterization, 402, 420, 434, 479 RCD-to-ETU connecting cable, 467, 468 Residual current waveform, 386 Side mounted, 397 Sizes, 388 Summation current transformer, 478, 479 Switch disconnector, 388 Residual current release (RCR), 406, 412 Response current, 403, 421, 435, 457 Rogowski coil, 103 Rotary operator Switching position, 35 With shaft stub, 326 S Sealing option, 422, 440, 459 Selective contact system, 19 Selectivity, 53 Setting trip parameters, 74 Shock resistance, 59 Short circuit Alarm switch, 200 Short-circuit protection Instantaneous, 76 Short-time delayed, 76 Short-time delayed short-circuit protection, 76 Shunt trip, 204, 406, 482 Side plate, 251 Side wall mounted rotary operator Illumination kit, 330 Interlocking, 327 Locking, 325, 326 Mounting plate, 323 Terminal plate, 323 Signaling of position, 293 SIMARIS design, 73 Sizes 3VA molded case circuit breaker, 16 Residual current device, 388 Standard display (ETU), 98 Standards, 57 Status indication, 35 Storage, 649 Storage temperature, 58 Summation current transformer, 478, 479 Supplementary handle, 320 Switch, 197 Switch disconnector, 165, 388 Accessories, 165 Coordination table, 170 Isolating features, 166 Making capacity, 167 Upstream protection, 170 Utilization category, 167 Switching position indication CONNECT, 33 DISCON, 33 TEST, 33 UNBLOCK, 33 Switching positions of molded case circuit breaker, 46 T T slot, 426, 449, 465 Tappet extension, 384 TD300, 509 Trip test, 512 TD300 activation and trip box, 509 TD500, 513 Stored data, 517 Test, 519 TD500 test device, 513 Technical specifications, (EFB300 external function box) 3VA switch disconnectors, 24 3VA1 molded case circuit breakers, 24 3VA2 molded case circuit breakers, 26 Alarm switch, 202 Auxiliary circuit connector, 307 Auxiliary release, 206 Auxiliary switch, 202 Motor operator, 358 Position signaling switch, 307 RCD, 473 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03 671 Index TD300, 512 TD500 test device, 524 Technical Support, 10 Terminal cover, 248 Extended, 249 Offset, 250 Plug-in and draw-out units, 305 Terminal lug, 213 Terminal plate, 323 Test EFB300, 503 Free tripping (TRIP), 46 Residual current device, 401, 419, 432, 456 TD300 activation and trip box, 512 TD500 test device, 519 TEST (draw-out version), 286 Test mode (EFB300), 503 Test transformers (TD500), 521 Thermal memory, 75 Thermal trip unit, 85 Thermal-magnetic trip unit, (TMTU) Threshold value, 102 Through-hole technology, 411 Time selectivity, 54 Time-delay device, 209 TMTU, 70, 85 400 Hz system, 179 Line protection, 111 Parameter, 112, 113, 114 Trip unit type, 86 Tolerance compensation Cover frame, 529 Tolerance compensator, 318 TRANS (TD500), 522 Transport, 649 Trip alarm switch RCD310/RCD510, 405 RCD320/RCD520, 423 RCD520B, 441 RCD820, 460 TAS, 199 TRIP INDICATOR, 423, 441, 460 Trip parameters setting, 74 Trip test (TD300), 512 Trip unit, 70 Trip unit type, 86 Tripping characteristic, 72 Tripping characteristic (RCD520B), 434 Type of protection, 68 U Ultimate selectivity value, 54 UNBLOCK (draw-out version), 286 Undervoltage release, 205, 482 Time-delay device, 209 Universal release, 205 V Variable depth adapter, 321 Vibration resistance, 59 W Wire connector, 222 2 cables, 227 3VA25, 231 6 cables, 229 Control wire tap, 270 Large, 225 Z Zone selective interlocking, 54, 54, 82 3WL compatibility, 82 Operating principle, 83 ZSI (zone selective interlocking), 54, 82, 499 3VA molded case circuit breakers with IEC certificate 672 Manual, 03/2019, A5E03603177010-03